Grinding - Siemens

Preface
Fundamental safety
instructions 1
Introduction 2
SINUMERIK
Operating with gestures
(840D sl) 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
Grinding
Setting up the machine 4
Working in the manual mode 5

Operating Manual
Machining the workpiece 6

Machining simultaneous
recording 7
Generating a G-code
program 8
Programming technology
functions 9
Grinding with a B axis (only
for cylindrical grinding 10
machines)
Collision avoidance (only

840D sl) 11
Multi-channel view 12
Valid for: Manage tools 13

SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl / 828D
Software Version Managing programs 14

CNC system software for 840D sl / 840DE sl V4.7 SP2
SINUMERIK Operate for PCU/PC V4.7 SP2 Alarm, fault, and system
messages 15
10/2015
6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2
Continued on next page
Siemens AG Order number: 6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.
Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 11/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Continuation
Teaching program 16
Ctrl-Energy 17
Easy XML 18
SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
Grinding 19
Service Planner (828D only)
Easy Message (828D only) 20

Operating Manual
Edit PLC user program (828D
only) 21
HT 8 22
Appendix A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Order number: 6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 11/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
SINUMERIK documentation
SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation
Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following address:
[email protected]
My Documentation Manager (MDM)

Under the following link you will find information to individually compile OEM-specific machine
documentation based on the Siemens content:
www.siemens.com/mdm
Training
For information about the range of training courses, refer under:
● www.siemens.com/sitrain
SITRAIN - Siemens training for products, systems and solutions in automation technology
● www.siemens.com/sinutrain
SinuTrain - training software for SINUMERIK
FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support. http://support.automation.siemens.com
Grinding
Operating Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2 5
Preface
SINUMERIK
You can find information on SINUMERIK under the following link:
www.siemens.com/sinumerik
Target group
Target group
This documentation is intended for users of cylindrical grinding machines and grinding
machines running the SINUMERIK Operate software.
Benefits
The operating manual helps users familiarize themselves with the control elements and
commands. Guided by the manual, users are capable of responding to problems and taking
corrective action.
Standard scope
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Extensions or changes
made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control.
However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the
equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.
Furthermore, for the sake of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information
about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation
or maintenance.
Hotline and Internet address
Technical Support
You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support in the Internet under
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Grinding
6 Operating Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2
Table of contents
Preface.........................................................................................................................................................5
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................17
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................17
1.2 Industrial security...................................................................................................................17
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................19
2.1 Product overview....................................................................................................................19
2.2 Operator panel fronts.............................................................................................................20
2.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................20
2.2.2 Keys of the operator panel.....................................................................................................22
2.3 Machine control panels..........................................................................................................29
2.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................29
2.3.2 Controls on the machine control panel...................................................................................29
2.4 User interface.........................................................................................................................33
2.4.1 Screen layout.........................................................................................................................33
2.4.2 Status display.........................................................................................................................34
2.4.3 Actual value window...............................................................................................................36
2.4.4 T,F,S window.........................................................................................................................38
2.4.5 Current block display..............................................................................................................40
2.4.6 Operation via softkeys and buttons........................................................................................41
2.4.7 Entering or selecting parameters...........................................................................................43
2.4.8 Pocket calculator....................................................................................................................45
2.4.9 Context menu.........................................................................................................................46
2.4.10 Touch operation.....................................................................................................................46
2.4.11 Changing the user interface language...................................................................................47
2.4.12 Entering Chinese characters..................................................................................................47
2.4.12.1 Entering Asian characters......................................................................................................49
2.4.12.2 Editing the dictionary..............................................................................................................50
2.4.13 Entering Korean characters...................................................................................................52
2.4.14 Protection levels.....................................................................................................................54
2.4.15 Online help in SINUMERIK Operate......................................................................................56
3 Operating with gestures (840D sl)..............................................................................................................59
3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................59
3.2 Finger gestures......................................................................................................................60
4 Setting up the machine...............................................................................................................................63
4.1 Switching on and switching off...............................................................................................63
4.2 Approaching a reference point...............................................................................................64
4.2.1 Referencing axes...................................................................................................................64
4.2.2 User agreement.....................................................................................................................65
4.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................................66
Grinding
Table of contents
4.3.1 Operating modes....................................................................................................................66

4.3.2 Modes groups and channels..................................................................................................68
4.3.3 Channel switchover................................................................................................................68
4.4 Settings for the machine........................................................................................................69
4.4.1 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)...............................................................69
4.4.2 Switching the unit of measurement........................................................................................70
4.4.3 Setting the zero offset............................................................................................................71
4.5 Zero offsets............................................................................................................................73
4.5.1 Zero offsets............................................................................................................................73
4.5.2 Display active zero offset.......................................................................................................75
4.5.3 Displaying the zero offset "overview".....................................................................................76
4.5.4 Displaying and editing base zero offset.................................................................................77
4.5.5 Displaying and editing settable zero offset.............................................................................77
4.5.6 Displaying and editing seat-related fine offset.......................................................................78
4.5.7 Displaying and editing details of the zero offsets...................................................................79
4.5.8 Deleting a zero offset.............................................................................................................81
4.5.9 Deleting seat-related fine offsets............................................................................................81
4.6 Measuring a tool.....................................................................................................................82
4.6.1 Cylindrical grinding.................................................................................................................82
4.6.1.1 Overview................................................................................................................................82
4.6.1.2 Measure grinding tool manually with the work piece reference point.....................................83
4.6.1.3 Measure grinding tool manually with the dresser reference point..........................................84
4.6.1.4 Measuring the dressing tool manually with the grinding tool reference point.........................85
4.6.2 Surface grinding.....................................................................................................................87
4.6.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................87
4.6.2.2 Measure grinding tool manually with the work piece reference point.....................................87
4.6.2.3 Measure grinding tool manually with the dresser reference point..........................................89
4.6.2.4 Measuring the dressing tool manually with the grinding tool reference point.........................90
4.7 Measuring the workpiece zero...............................................................................................91
4.7.1 Cylindrical grinding.................................................................................................................91
4.7.1.1 Measuring the workpiece zero...............................................................................................91
4.7.2 Surface grinding.....................................................................................................................93
4.7.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................93
4.7.2.2 Setting the edge.....................................................................................................................93
4.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data............................................................................................94
4.8.1 Specify working area limitations.............................................................................................94
4.8.2 Editing spindle data................................................................................................................95
4.8.3 Spindle chuck data.................................................................................................................96
4.8.3.1 Defining spindle chuck data...................................................................................................96
4.8.3.2 Parameters, spindle chuck data.............................................................................................98
4.8.4 Entering cylinder error compensation (only rotary grinding machine)....................................98
4.9 Displaying setting data lists..................................................................................................100
4.10 Handwheel assignment........................................................................................................100
4.11 MDI.......................................................................................................................................102
4.11.1 Working in MDA...................................................................................................................102
4.11.2 Loading an MDA program from the Program Manager........................................................102
4.11.3 Saving an MDA program......................................................................................................103
4.11.4 Editing/executing a MDI program.........................................................................................104
Grinding
Table of contents
4.11.5 Deleting an MDA program....................................................................................................104

5 Working in the manual mode....................................................................................................................107
5.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................107
5.2 Selecting a tool and spindle.................................................................................................107
5.2.1 T,S,M window.......................................................................................................................107
5.2.2 Selecting a tool.....................................................................................................................109
5.2.3 Starting and stopping the spindle manually.........................................................................109
5.2.4 Positioning the spindle.........................................................................................................110
5.3 Traversing axes....................................................................................................................111
5.3.1 Traversing the axes..............................................................................................................111
5.3.2 Traverse axes by a defined increment.................................................................................111
5.3.3 Traversing axes by a variable increment.............................................................................112
5.4 Positioning axes...................................................................................................................112
5.5 Default settings for manual mode........................................................................................113
6 Machining the workpiece..........................................................................................................................115
6.1 Starting and stopping machining..........................................................................................115
6.2 Selecting a program.............................................................................................................116
6.3 Executing a trial program run...............................................................................................117
6.4 Displaying the current program block...................................................................................118
6.4.1 Current block display............................................................................................................118
6.4.2 Displaying a basic block ......................................................................................................120
6.4.3 Display program level...........................................................................................................120
6.5 Correcting a program...........................................................................................................121
6.6 Repositioning axes...............................................................................................................122
6.7 Starting execution at a specific point....................................................................................123
6.7.1 Use block search..................................................................................................................123
6.7.2 Continuing program from search target...............................................................................125
6.7.3 Simple search target definition.............................................................................................125
6.7.4 Defining an interruption point as search target....................................................................126
6.7.5 Parameters for block search in the search pointer...............................................................127
6.7.6 Block search mode...............................................................................................................127
6.8 Controlling the program run.................................................................................................129
6.8.1 Program control....................................................................................................................129
6.8.2 Skip blocks...........................................................................................................................130
6.9 Overstore.............................................................................................................................131
6.10 Editing a program.................................................................................................................133
6.10.1 Processing a program (editor)..............................................................................................133
6.10.2 Searching in programs.........................................................................................................133
6.10.3 Replacing program text........................................................................................................135
6.10.4 Copying/pasting/deleting program blocks............................................................................136
6.10.5 Renumbering a program......................................................................................................137
6.10.6 Creating a program block.....................................................................................................138
6.10.7 Editor settings......................................................................................................................140
Grinding
Table of contents
6.11 Working with DXF files.........................................................................................................142

6.11.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................142
6.11.2 Displaying CAD drawings.....................................................................................................143
6.11.2.1 Open a DXF file....................................................................................................................143
6.11.2.2 Cleaning a DXF file..............................................................................................................143
6.11.2.3 Enlarging or reducing the CAD drawing...............................................................................144
6.11.2.4 Modifying the section...........................................................................................................144
6.11.2.5 Rotating the view..................................................................................................................145
6.11.2.6 Displaying/editing information for the geometric data..........................................................146
6.11.3 Importing and editing a DXF file...........................................................................................146
6.11.3.1 General procedure...............................................................................................................146
6.11.3.2 Setting the tolerance............................................................................................................147
6.11.3.3 Specifying a reference point.................................................................................................147
6.11.3.4 Accepting contours...............................................................................................................148
6.12 Display and edit user variables ...........................................................................................150
6.12.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................150
6.12.2 R parameters.......................................................................................................................151
6.12.3 Displaying global user data (GUD).......................................................................................152
6.12.4 Displaying channel GUDs....................................................................................................153
6.12.5 Displaying local user data (LUD)..........................................................................................154
6.12.6 Displaying program user data (PUD)...................................................................................155
6.12.7 Searching for user variables................................................................................................156
6.13 Display G and auxiliary functions.........................................................................................157
6.13.1 Selected G functions............................................................................................................157
6.13.2 All G functions......................................................................................................................159
6.13.3 G functions for mold making................................................................................................160
6.13.4 Auxiliary functions................................................................................................................161
6.14 Displaying superimpositions.................................................................................................162
6.15 Displaying status of synchronized actions...........................................................................162
6.16 Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces...................................................164
6.17 Settings for the automatic mode..........................................................................................166
7 Machining simultaneous recording...........................................................................................................169
7.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................169
7.2 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece................................................170
7.2.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................170
7.2.2 Starting simultaneous recording...........................................................................................171
7.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece................................................171
7.4 Different views of a workpiece.............................................................................................172
7.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................172
7.4.2 Plan view..............................................................................................................................172
7.4.3 Side view..............................................................................................................................173
7.5 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic...........................................................................173
7.5.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation.............................................................173
7.5.2 Panning a graphical representation.....................................................................................174
7.5.3 Modifying the viewport.........................................................................................................174
Grinding
Table of contents
8 Generating a G-code program..................................................................................................................177

8.1 Graphical programming........................................................................................................177
8.2 Program views.....................................................................................................................177
8.3 Program structure................................................................................................................179
8.4 Basic principles....................................................................................................................179
8.4.1 Machining planes.................................................................................................................179
8.4.2 Programming a tool (T)........................................................................................................180
8.5 Generating a G code program.............................................................................................180
8.6 Selection of the cycles via softkey.......................................................................................181
9 Programming technology functions..........................................................................................................183
9.1 Programming contours.........................................................................................................183
9.1.1 Representation of the contour..............................................................................................183
9.1.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................................184
9.1.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................................186
9.1.3.1 Entering a contour element..................................................................................................188
9.1.3.2 Cylindrical grinding...............................................................................................................189
9.1.3.3 Surface grinding...................................................................................................................190
9.1.4 Changing the contour...........................................................................................................193
9.1.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................193
9.1.4.2 Modifying a contour element................................................................................................193
9.1.5 Contour call (CYCLE62).......................................................................................................194
9.1.5.1 Function...............................................................................................................................194
9.1.5.2 Calling the cycle...................................................................................................................195
9.1.5.3 Parameter............................................................................................................................195
9.2 Form-truing (CYCLE495).....................................................................................................195
9.3 Calculating the dressing tool position (CYCLE435).............................................................199
9.3.1 Note regarding the dressing tool position.............................................................................199
9.3.2 Function...............................................................................................................................200
9.4 Oscillating cycles (CYCLE4071 ... CYCLE4079).................................................................201
9.4.1 Note regarding oscillating cycles..........................................................................................201
9.4.2 CYCLE4071 - longitudinal grinding with infeed at the reversal point...................................201
9.4.3 CYCLE4072 - longitudinal grinding with infeed at the reversal point and cancel signal. .....202
9.4.4 CYCLE4073 - longitudinal grinding with continuous infeed.................................................206
9.4.5 CYCLE4074 - longitudinal grinding with continuous infeed and cancel signal.....................207
9.4.6 CYCLE4075 - surface grinding with infeed at the reversal point..........................................210
9.4.7 CYCLE4077 - surface grinding with infeed at the reversal point and cancel signal.............213
9.4.8 CYCLE4078 - surface grinding with continuous infeed........................................................216
9.4.9 CYCLE4079 - surface grinding with intermittent infeed.......................................................218
9.5 Aligning a grinding wheel (CYCLE400)................................................................................220
9.5.1 Function...............................................................................................................................220
9.5.2 Calling the cycle...................................................................................................................221
10 Grinding with a B axis (only for cylindrical grinding machines).................................................................223
10.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................223
10.2 T, S, M window for set-up B axis..........................................................................................225
Grinding
Table of contents
10.3 Measuring in JOG................................................................................................................226

10.3.1 Grinding wheel alignment for grinding..................................................................................226
10.3.2 Manually measuring the grinding tool (with B axis)..............................................................227
10.3.3 Manually measuring the dresser (with B axis).....................................................................228
10.3.4 Calibrating the swivel axis....................................................................................................230
11 Collision avoidance (only 840D sl)...........................................................................................................231
11.1 Activating collision avoidance..............................................................................................231
11.2 Set collision avoidance.........................................................................................................232
12 Multi-channel view....................................................................................................................................235
12.1 Multi-channel view................................................................................................................235
12.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area............................................................235
12.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels.......................................................................237
12.4 Setting the multi-channel view.............................................................................................239
13 Manage tools............................................................................................................................................241
13.1 Lists for the tool management..............................................................................................241
13.2 Magazine management........................................................................................................242
13.3 Tool types.............................................................................................................................242
13.4 Tool dimensioning................................................................................................................244
13.5 Tool list.................................................................................................................................246
13.5.1 Tool list.................................................................................................................................246
13.5.2 Additional data.....................................................................................................................248
13.5.3 Creating a new tool..............................................................................................................249
13.5.4 Measuring a tool - tool list....................................................................................................251
13.5.5 Managing several cutting edges..........................................................................................251
13.5.6 Deleting a tool......................................................................................................................252
13.5.7 Loading and unloading tools................................................................................................253
13.5.8 Selecting a magazine...........................................................................................................254
13.5.9 Code carrier connection (only 840D sl)................................................................................255
13.5.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................255
13.5.9.2 Managing tools on a code carrier.........................................................................................256
13.5.10 Managing a tool in a file.......................................................................................................258
13.6 Tool wear.............................................................................................................................260
13.6.1 Tool wear ............................................................................................................................260
13.6.2 Reactivating a tool................................................................................................................263
13.7 Tool data OEM.....................................................................................................................264
13.8 Magazine..............................................................................................................................265
13.8.1 Positioning a magazine........................................................................................................267
13.8.2 Relocating a tool..................................................................................................................268
13.8.3 Unload/load/relocate all tools...............................................................................................269
13.9 Sorting tool management lists..............................................................................................270
13.10 Filtering the tool management lists......................................................................................270
13.11 Specific search in the tool management lists.......................................................................272
Grinding
Table of contents
13.12 Tool details...........................................................................................................................273

13.12.1 Displaying tool details..........................................................................................................273
13.12.2 Tool data..............................................................................................................................274
13.12.3 Grinding data........................................................................................................................275
13.12.4 Cutting edge data.................................................................................................................276
13.12.5 Monitoring data....................................................................................................................276
13.13 Changing a tool type............................................................................................................277
13.14 Settings for tool lists.............................................................................................................278
14 Managing programs..................................................................................................................................281
14.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................281
14.1.1 NC memory..........................................................................................................................284
14.1.2 Local drive............................................................................................................................284
14.1.3 Creating an NC directory on the local drive.........................................................................285
14.1.4 USB drives...........................................................................................................................285
14.1.5 FTP drive..............................................................................................................................286
14.2 Opening and closing the program........................................................................................287
14.3 Executing a program............................................................................................................288
14.4 Creating a directory / program / job list................................................................................290
14.4.1 Creating a new directory......................................................................................................290
14.4.2 Creating a new workpiece....................................................................................................291
14.4.3 Creating a new G code program..........................................................................................291
14.4.4 Creating a new dressing program........................................................................................292
14.4.5 Storing any new file..............................................................................................................293
14.4.6 Creating a job list.................................................................................................................294
14.4.7 Creating a program list.........................................................................................................295
14.5 Creating templates...............................................................................................................296
14.6 Searching directories and files.............................................................................................297
14.7 Displaying the program in the Preview.................................................................................298
14.8 Selecting several directories/programs................................................................................299
14.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program............................................................................300
14.10 Deleting a program/directory................................................................................................302
14.11 Changing file and directory properties.................................................................................303
14.12 Creating drives.....................................................................................................................304
14.12.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................304
14.12.2 Setting up drives..................................................................................................................305
14.13 EXTCALL.............................................................................................................................311
14.14 Execution from external storage (EES)................................................................................313
14.15 Backing up data...................................................................................................................314
14.15.1 Generating an archive in the Program Manager..................................................................314
14.15.2 Generating an archive via the system data..........................................................................315
14.15.3 Reading in an archive in the Program Manager...................................................................317
14.15.4 Read in archive from system data........................................................................................318
Grinding
Table of contents
14.16 Setup data............................................................................................................................319

14.16.1 Backing up setup data..........................................................................................................319
14.16.2 Reading-in set-up data.........................................................................................................321
14.17 V24.......................................................................................................................................322
14.17.1 Reading-in and reading-out archives via a serial interface..................................................322
14.17.2 Setting V24 in the program manager...................................................................................324
15 Alarm, fault, and system messages..........................................................................................................327
15.1 Displaying messages...........................................................................................................327
15.2 Displaying alarms.................................................................................................................327
15.3 Displaying an alarm log........................................................................................................329
15.4 Sorting, alarms, faults and messages.................................................................................330
15.5 Creating screenshots...........................................................................................................330
15.6 PLC and NC variables.........................................................................................................332
15.6.1 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables.....................................................................332
15.6.2 Saving and loading screen forms.........................................................................................335
15.7 Version.................................................................................................................................336
15.7.1 Displaying version data........................................................................................................336
15.7.2 Save information..................................................................................................................337
15.8 Logbook...............................................................................................................................338
15.8.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................338
15.8.2 Displaying and editing the logbook......................................................................................339
15.8.3 Making a logbook entry........................................................................................................339
15.9 Remote diagnostics..............................................................................................................341
15.9.1 Setting remote access..........................................................................................................341
15.9.2 Permit modem......................................................................................................................343
15.9.3 Request remote diagnostics.................................................................................................343
15.9.4 Exit remote diagnostics........................................................................................................344
16 Teaching program....................................................................................................................................345
16.1 Teaching in programs..........................................................................................................345
16.2 General sequence................................................................................................................345
16.3 Inserting a block...................................................................................................................346
16.3.1 Teaching in positions...........................................................................................................346
16.3.2 Input parameters for teach-in blocks....................................................................................347
16.4 Teach-in via Windows..........................................................................................................348
16.4.1 General................................................................................................................................348
16.4.2 Teach in rapid traverse G0...................................................................................................349
16.4.3 Teach in straight G1.............................................................................................................349
16.4.4 Teaching in circle intermediate and circle end point CIP.....................................................350
16.5 Editing a block......................................................................................................................350
16.6 Deleting a block....................................................................................................................351
16.7 Settings for teach-in.............................................................................................................352
Grinding
Table of contents
17 Ctrl-Energy...............................................................................................................................................355
17.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................355
17.2 Displaying energy consumption...........................................................................................355
17.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption...................................................................357
17.4 Displaying measured curves................................................................................................358
17.5 Long-term measurement of the energy consumption..........................................................359
17.6 Using the energy-saving profile............................................................................................360
18 Easy XML.................................................................................................................................................363
18.1 Easy XML.............................................................................................................................363
18.2 Easy Extend (828D only).....................................................................................................364
18.2.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................364
18.2.2 Enabling a device.................................................................................................................365
18.2.3 Activating and deactivating a device....................................................................................366
18.2.4 Initial commissioning of additional devices..........................................................................366
18.2.5 Commissioning Easy Extend...............................................................................................367
18.3 SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens...............................................................................367
19 Service Planner (828D only).....................................................................................................................369
19.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks....................................................................369
20 Easy Message (828D only)......................................................................................................................371
20.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................371
20.2 Activating Easy Message.....................................................................................................372
20.3 Creating/editing a user profile..............................................................................................373
20.4 Setting-up events.................................................................................................................375
20.5 Logging an active user on and off........................................................................................376
20.6 Displaying SMS logs............................................................................................................377
20.7 Making settings for Easy Message......................................................................................378
21 Edit PLC user program (828D only).........................................................................................................379
21.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................379
21.2 Displaying and editing PLC properties.................................................................................379
21.2.1 Displaying PLC properties....................................................................................................379
21.2.2 Resetting the processing time..............................................................................................380
21.2.3 Loading modified PLC user program...................................................................................380
21.3 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables.....................................................................381
21.4 Displaying and editing PLC signals in the status list............................................................385
21.5 View of the program blocks..................................................................................................386
21.5.1 Displaying information on the program blocks.....................................................................386
21.5.2 Structure of the user interface..............................................................................................387
21.5.3 Control options.....................................................................................................................388
21.5.4 Displaying the program status..............................................................................................389
Grinding
Table of contents
21.5.5 Changing the address display..............................................................................................390

21.5.6 Enlarging/reducing the ladder diagram................................................................................390
21.5.7 Program block......................................................................................................................391
21.5.7.1 Displaying and editing the program block............................................................................391
21.5.7.2 Displaying local variable table..............................................................................................392
21.5.7.3 Creating a program block.....................................................................................................392
21.5.7.4 Opening a program block in the window..............................................................................394
21.5.7.5 Displaying/canceling the access protection.........................................................................394
21.5.7.6 Editing block properties subsequently..................................................................................395
21.5.8 Editing the program block with the "Ladder editor"..............................................................395
21.5.8.1 Editing the PLC user program..............................................................................................395
21.5.8.2 Editing a program block.......................................................................................................396
21.5.8.3 Deleting a program block.....................................................................................................398
21.5.8.4 Inserting and editing networks.............................................................................................398
21.5.8.5 Editing network properties....................................................................................................400
21.5.9 Displaying the network symbol information table.................................................................401
21.6 Displaying symbol tables......................................................................................................401
21.7 Displaying cross references.................................................................................................402
21.8 Searching for operands........................................................................................................403
22 HT 8..........................................................................................................................................................405
22.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................405
22.2 Traversing keys....................................................................................................................407
22.3 Machine control panel menu................................................................................................409
22.4 Virtual keyboard...................................................................................................................410
22.5 Calibrating the touch panel..................................................................................................411
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................413
A.1 840D sl / 828D documentation overview..............................................................................413
Index.........................................................................................................................................................415
Grinding
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of death if the safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed in the associated hardware
documentation, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
● Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
● Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.
WARNING
Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed
parameterization
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
● Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures (e.g. EMERGENCY
STOP or EMERGENCY OFF).
1.2 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that
you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also
be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit this address (http://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. For more information, visit this address (http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Grinding
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Industrial security
WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death, severe injuries and/
or material damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address (http://
support.automation.siemens.com).
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
You will find further information at this address (http://www.siemens.com/
industrialsecurity).
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
Grinding
Introduction 2
2.1 Product overview
The SINUMERIK controller is a CNC (Computerized Numerical Controller) for machine tools.
You can use the CNC to implement the following basic functions in conjunction with a machine
tool:
● Creation and adaptation of part programs
● Execution of part programs
● Manual control
● Access to internal and external data media
● Editing of data for programs
● Management of tools, zero points and further user data required in programs
● Diagnostics of controller and machine
Grinding
Introduction
2.2 Operator panel fronts
Operating areas
The basic functions are grouped in the following operating areas in the controller:
2SHUDWLQJDUHDV
([HFXWHSDUWSURJUDPVPDQXDOFRQWURO 0$&+,1(
(GLWLQJRIGDWDIRUSURJUDPV 3$5$0(7(5
7RROPDQDJHPHQW
&UHDWLQJDQGDGDSWLQJRISDUWSURJUDPV 352*5$0
$FFHVVWRLQWHUQDODQGH[WHUQDOGDWDPHGLD 352*5$0
0$1$*(5
$ODUPGLVSOD\6HUYLFHGLVSOD\ ',$*126,6
$GDSWLQJRIWKH1&GDWDWRWKHPDFKLQH 67$5783
V\VWHPVHWWLQJ
2.2.1 Overview
Introduction
The display (screen) and operation (e.g. hardkeys and softkeys) of the SINUMERIK Operate
user interface use the operator panel front.
Grinding
Introduction
In this example, the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate the components that are
available for operating the controller and machine tool.
Operator controls and indicators
1 Alphabetic key group

With the <Shift> key pressed, you activate the special characters on keys with double assign‐
ments, and write in the uppercase.
Note: Depending on the particular configuration of your control system, uppercase letters are
always written
2 Numerical key group
With the <Shift> key pressed, you activate the special characters on keys with double assign‐
ments.
3 Control key group
4 Hotkey group
5 Cursor key group
6 USB interface
7 Menu select key
8 Menu forward button
9 Machine area button
10 Menu back key
11 Softkeys
Figure 2-1 View of OP 010 operator panel front
Grinding
Introduction
References
A more precise description as well as a view of the other operator panel fronts that can be
used may be found in the following reference:
Manual operator components and networking; SINUMERIK 840D sl
2.2.2 Keys of the operator panel

The following keys and key combinations are available for operation of the control and the
machine tool.
Keys and key combinations
Key Function
<ALARM CANCEL>
Cancels alarms and messages that are marked with this icon.
<CHANNEL>
Advances if several channels exist.
<HELP>
Calls the context-sensitive online help for the selected window.
<NEXT WINDOW> *
● Toggles between the windows.
● For a multi-channel view or for a multi-channel functionality,
switches within a channel gap between the upper and lower
window.
● Selects the first entry in selection lists and in selection boxes.
● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a text.
* on USB keyboards use the <Home> or <Pos 1> key
<NEXT WINDOW> + <SHIFT>

● Selects the first entry in selection lists and in selection boxes.
● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a text.
● Selects a contiguous selection from the current cursor position
up to the target position.
up to the beginning of a program block.
<NEXT WINDOW> + <ALT>

● Moves the cursor to the first object.
● Moves the cursor in the first column of a table row.
● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program block.
Grinding
Introduction
<NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL>

● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program.
● Moves the cursor in the first row of the current column.
<NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL> + <SHIFT>

● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program.
● Moves the cursor in the first row of the current column.
up to the target position.
up to the beginning of the program.
<PAGE UP>
Scrolls upwards by one page in a window.
<PAGE UP> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor from the cursor
position, selects directories or program blocks up to the beginning
of the window.
<PAGE UP> + <CTRL>

Positions the cursor to the topmost line of a window.
<PAGE DOWN>
Scrolls downwards by one page in a window.
<PAGE DOWN> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, from the cursor
position, selects directories or program blocks up to the end of the
window.
<PAGE DOWN> + <CTRL>

Positions the cursor to the lowest line of a window.
<Cursor right>
● Editing box
Opens a directory or program (e.g. cycle) in the editor.
● Navigation
Moves the cursor further to the right by one character.
<Cursor right> + <CTRL>

● Editing box
Moves the cursor further to the right by one word.
● Navigation
Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the right.
<Cursor left>
● Editing box
Closes a directory or program (e.g. cycle) in the program editor.
If you have made changes, then these are accepted.
● Navigation
Moves the cursor further to the left by one character.
Grinding
Introduction
<Cursor left> + <CTRL>

● Editing box
Moves the cursor further to the left by one word.
● Navigation
Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the left.
<Cursor up>
● Editing box
Moves the cursor into the next upper field.
● Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell upwards.
– Moves the cursor upwards in a menu screen.
<Cursor up> + <CTRL>

● Moves the cursor in a table to the beginning of the table.
● Moves the cursor to the beginning of a window.
<Cursor up> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a contig‐
uous selection of directories and program blocks.
<Cursor down>
● Editing box
Moves the cursor downwards.
● Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell downwards.
– Moves the cursor in a window downwards.
<Cursor down> + <CTRL>

● Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the end of the table.
– Moves the cursor to the end of a window.
● Simulation
Reduces the override.
<Cursor down> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a contig‐
uous selection of directories and program blocks.
<SELECT>
Switches between several specified options in selection drop-down
list boxes and in selection boxes.
Activates checkboxes.
In the program editor and in the program manager, selects a program
block or a program.
<SELECT> + <CTRL>

When selecting table rows, switches between selected and not se‐
lected.
<SELECT> + <SHIFT>

Selects in selection lists and in selection boxes the previous entry
or the last entry.
Grinding
Introduction
<END>
Moves the cursor to the last entry field in a window, to the end of a
table or a program block.
Selects the last entry in selection lists and in selection boxes.
<END> + <SHIFT>

Moves the cursor to the last entry.
Selects a contiguous selection from the cursor position up to the end
of a program block.
<END> + <CTRL>

Moves the cursor to the last entry in the last line of the current column
or to the end of a program.
<END> + <CTRL> + <SHIFT>

Moves the cursor to the last entry in the last line of the current column
or to the end of a program.
Selects a contiguous selection from the cursor position up to the end
of a program block.
<BACKSPACE>
● Editing box
Deletes a character selected to the left of the cursor.
● Navigation
Deletes all of the selected characters to the left of the cursor.
<BACKSPACE> + <CTRL>

● Editing window
Deletes a word selected to the left of the cursor.
● Navigation
Deletes all of the selected characters to the left of the cursor.
<TAB>
● Indents the cursor by one character in the program editor.
● Moves the cursor to the next entry to the right in the program
manager.
<TAB> + <SHIFT>

● Moves the cursor to the next entry to the left in the program
manager.
<TAB> + <CTRL>

● Moves the cursor to the next entry to the right in the program
manager.
<TAB> + <SHIFT> + <CTRL>

● Moves the cursor to the next entry to the left in the program
manager.
Grinding
Introduction
<CTRL> + <A>
$
Selects all entries (only in the program editor and program manager)
in the current window.
<CTRL> + <C>
&
Copies the selected content.
<CTRL> + <E>
(
Calls the "Ctrl Energy" function.
<CTRL> + <F>
)
Opens the search dialog in the machine data and setting data lists,
when loading and saving in the MDI editor as well as in the program
manager and in the system data.
<CTRL> + <G>
*
Switches in the parameter screen between the help display and the
graphic view.
<CTRL> + <L>
/
Switches the current user interface successively through all installed
languages.
<CTRL> + <SHIFT> + <L>
/
Switches the current user interface through all installed languages
in the inverse sequence.
<CTRL> + <P>
3
Generates a screenshot from the current user interface and saves
it as a file.
<CTRL> + <S>
6
Switches the single block in or out in the simulation.
<CTRL> + <V>
9
● Pastes text from the clipboard at the current cursor position.
● Pastes text from the clipboard at the position of a selected text.
<CTRL> + <X>
;
Cuts out the selected text. The text is contained in the clipboard.
<CTRL> + <Y>
<
Reactivates changes that were undone (only in the program edi‐
tor).
<CTRL> + <Z>
=
Undoes the last action (only in the program editor).
<CTRL> + <ALT> + <C>
&
Creates a complete standard archive (.ARC) on an external data
carrier (USB-FlashDrive) (for 840D sl / 828D).
Note:
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
Grinding
Introduction
<CTRL> + <ALT> + <S>

6
Creates a complete standard archive (.ARC) on an external data
carrier (USB-FlashDrive) (for 840D sl).
Creates a complete Easy Archive (.ARD) on an external data carrier
(USB-FlashDrive) (for 828D).
Note:
<CTRL> + <ALT> + <D>
'
Backs up the log files on the USB-FlashDrive. If a USB-FlashDrive
is not inserted, then the files are backed-up in the manufacturer's
area of the CF card.
<SHIFT> + <ALT> + <D>
'
Backs up the log files on the USB-FlashDrive. If a USB-FlashDrive
is not inserted, then the files are backed-up in the manufacturer's
area of the CF card.
<SHIFT> + <ALT> + <T>
7
Starts "HMI Trace".
<SHIFT> + <ALT> + <T>
7
Exits "HMI Trace".
<ALT> + <S>
6
Opens the editor to enter Asian characters.
<ALT> + <Cursor up>

Moves the block start or block end up in the editor.
<ALT> + <Cursor down>

Moves the block start or block end down in the editor.
<DEL>
● Editing box
Deletes the first character to the right of the cursor.
● Navigation
Deletes all characters.
<DEL> + <CTRL>

● Editing box
Deletes the first word to the right of the cursor.
● Navigation
Deletes all characters.
<Spacebar>
● Editing window
Inserts a space.
● Switches between several specified options in selection drop-
down list boxes and in selection boxes.
<Plus>

● Opens a directory which contains the element.
● Increases the size of the graphic view for simulation and traces.
Grinding
Introduction
<Minus>
● Closes a directory which contains the element.
● Reduces the size of the graphic view for simulation and traces.
<Equals>
Opens the calculator in the entry fields.
<Asterisk>

Opens a directory with all of the subdirectories.
<Tilde>
a
Changes the sign of a number between plus and minus.
<INSERT>
● Opens an editing window in the insert mode. Pressing the key
again, exits the window and the entries are undone.
● Opens a selection box and shows the selection possibilities.
● In the machining step program, enters an empty line for G code.
● Changes into the double editor or into the multi-channel view from
the edit mode into the operating mode. You can return to the edit
mode by pressing the key again.
+ <INSERT> + <SHIFT>
For G code programming, for a cycle call, activates or deactivates
the edit mode.
<INPUT>
● Completes the input of a value in the entry field.
● Opens a directory or a program.
● Inserts an empty program block if the cursor is positioned at the
end of a program block.
● Inserts a character to select a new line, and the program block is
split up into two parts.
● Inserts a new line after the program block in the G code.
● Inserts a new line for G code in the machining step program.
● Changes into the double editor or into the multi-channel view from
the edit mode into the operating mode. You can return to the edit
mode by pressing the key again.
<ALARM> - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Calls the "Diagnosis" operating area.
<PROGRAM> - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Calls the "Program Manager" operating area.
<OFFSET> - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Calls the "Parameter" operating area.
<PROGRAM MANAGER> - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Calls the "Program Manager" operating area.
Grinding
Introduction
2.3 Machine control panels
Menu forward key

Advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar.
Menu back key
Returns to the higher-level menu.
<MACHINE>
Calls the "Machine" operating area.
<MENU SELECT>
Calls the main menu to select the operating area.
2.3.1 Overview
The machine tool can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens or with a specific
machine control panel from the machine manufacturer.
You use the machine control panel to initiate actions on the machine tool such as traversing
an axis or starting the machining of a workpiece.
2.3.2 Controls on the machine control panel

In this example, the MCP 483C IE machine control panel is used to illustrate the operator
controls and displays of a Siemens machine control panel.
Grinding
Introduction
Overview

(1) Emergency Off button

(2) Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm)
(3) RESET
(4) Program control
(5) Operating modes, machine functions
(6) User keys T1 to T15
(7) Traversing axes with rapid traverse override and coordinate switchover
(8) Spindle control with override switch
(9) Feed control with override switch
(10) Keyswitch (four positions)
Figure 2-2 Front view of machine control panel (milling version)
Operator controls
Emergency Off button
Press the button in situations where:

● life is at risk.
● there is the danger of a machine or workpiece being damaged.
All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.
Machine manufacturer
For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button, please refer to the
machine manufacturer's instructions.
Grinding
Introduction
RESET
● Stop processing the current programs.

The NCK control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its initial
state and ready for a new program run.
● Cancel alarm.
Program control
<SINGLE BLOCK>
Single block mode on/off.
<CYCLE START>
The key is also referred to as NC Start.
Execution of a program is started.
<CYCLE STOP>
The key is also referred to as NC Stop.
Execution of a program is stopped.
Operating modes, machine functions
<JOG>
Select "JOG" mode.
<TEACH IN>
Select "Teach In" submode.
<MDI>
Select "MDI" mode.
<AUTO>
Select "AUTO" mode.
<REPOS>
Repositions, re-approaches the contour.
<REF POINT>
Approach reference point.
Inc <VAR>(Incremental Feed Variable)
Incremental mode with variable increment size.
Inc (incremental feed)
Incremental mode with predefined increment size of
1, ..., 10000 increments.
...
A machine data code defines how the increment value is inter‐
preted.
Grinding
Introduction
Traversing axes with rapid traverse override and coordinate switchover
Axis keys
;
Selects an axis.
...

Direction keys
Select the traversing direction.
...

<RAPID>
Traverse axis in rapid traverse while pressing the direction key.
<WCS MCS>
Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) and machine
coordinate system (MCS).
Spindle control with override switch
<SPINDLE STOP>
Stop spindle.
<SPINDLE START>
Spindle is enabled.
Feed control with override switch
<FEED STOP>
Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.
<FEED START>
Enable for program execution in the current block and enable for ramp-up
to the feedrate value specified by the program.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4 User interface
2.4.1 Screen layout
Overview

1 Active operating area and mode

2 Alarm/message line
3 Program name
4 Channel state and program control
5 Channel operational messages
6 Axis position display in actual value window
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
7 Display for
● Active tool T
● Current feedrate F
● Active spindle with current status (S)
● Spindle utilization rate in percent
8 Operating window with program block display
9 Display of active G functions, all G functions, H functions and input window for different functions (for example, skip
blocks, program control)
10 Dialog line to provide additional user notes
11 Horizontal softkey bar
12 Vertical softkey bar
Figure 2-3 Grinding user interface
2.4.2 Status display

The status display includes the most important information about the current machine status
and the status of the NCK. It also shows alarms as well as NC and PLC messages.
Depending on your operating area, the status display is made up of several lines:
● Large status display
The status display is made up of three lines in the "Machine" operating area.
● Small status display
In the "Parameter", "Program", "Program Manager", "Diagnosis" and "Start-up" operating
areas, the status display consists of the first line from the large display.
Status display of "Machine" operating area
First line
Ctrl-Energy - Power rating display
Display Description
The machine is not productive.
The machine is productive and energy is being consumed.
The machine is feeding energy back into the grid.
The power rating display must be switched on in the status line.

Note
Information about configuration is available in the following reference:
System Manual "Ctrl-Energy", SINUMERIK 840D sl / 828D
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Active operating area
Display Description
"Machine" operating area
With touch operation, you can change the operating area here.
"Parameter" operating area
"Program" operating area
"Program manager" operating area
"Diagnosis" operating area
"Start-up" operating area
Active mode or submode
Display Description
"Jog" mode
"MDA" mode
"Auto" mode
"Teach In" submode
"Repos" submode
"Ref Point" submode
Alarms and messages
Display Description
Alarm display
The alarm numbers are displayed in white lettering on a red
background. The associated alarm text is shown in red lettering.
An arrow indicates that several alarms are active.
An acknowledgment symbol indicates that the alarm can be ac‐
knowledged or canceled.
NC or PLC message
Message numbers and texts are shown in black lettering.
An arrow indicates that several messages are active.
Messages from NC programs do not have numbers and appear
in green lettering.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Second line
Display Description
Program path and program name
The displays in the second line can be configured.
Third line
Display Description
Display of channel status.
If several channels are present on the machine, the channel
name is also displayed.
If only one channel is available, only the "Reset" channel status
is displayed.
With touch operation, you can change the channel here.
Display of channel status:
The program was aborted with "Reset".
The program is started.
The program has been interrupted with "Stop".
Display of active program controls:
PRT: no axis motion
DRY: Dry run feedrate
RG0: reduced rapid traverse
M01: programmed stop 1
M101: programmed stop 2 (name varies)
SB1: Single block, coarse (program stops only after blocks which
perform a machine function)
SB2: Data block (program stops after each block)
SB3: Single block, fine (program also only stops after blocks
which perform a machine function in cycles)
Channel operational messages:
Stop: An operator action is usually required.
Wait: No operator action is required.
The machine manufacturer settings determine which program controls are displayed.
2.4.3 Actual value window

The actual values of the axes and their positions are displayed.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Work/Machine
The displayed coordinates are based on either the machine coordinate system or the
workpiece coordinate system. The machine coordinate system (Machine), in contrast to the
workpiece coordinate system (Work), does not take any work offsets into consideration.
You can use the "Machine actual values" softkey to toggle between the machine coordinate
system and the workpiece coordinate system.
The actual value display of the positions can also refer to the SZS coordinate system (settable
zero system). However the positions are still output in the Work.
The ENS coordinate system corresponds to the Work coordinate system, reduced by certain
components ($P_TRAFRAME, $P_PFRAME, $P_ISO4FRAME, $P_CYCFRAME), which are
set by the system when machining and are then reset again. By using the ENS coordinate
system, jumps into the actual value display are avoided that would otherwise be caused by
the additional components.
Maximize display
Press the ">>" and "Zoom act. val." softkeys.
Display overview
Display Meaning
Header columns
Work/Machine Display of axes in selected coordinate system.
Position Position of displayed axes.
Display of distance-to-go The distance-to-go for the current NC block is displayed while the
program is running.
Feed/override The feed acting on the axes, as well as the override, are displayed
in the full-screen version.
Repos offset The distances traversed in manual mode are displayed.
This information is only displayed when you are in the "Repos" sub‐
mode.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Display Meaning
Collision monitoring Collision avoidance is activated for the JOG and MDA or
(only 840D sl) AUTOMATIC modes.
Note:
The $MN_JOG_MODE_MASK machine data can be set
to suppress the display of the symbol.
Collision avoidance is deactivated for the JOG and MDA
or AUTOMATIC modes.
Footer Display of active work offsets and transformations.
The T, F, S values are also displayed in the full-screen version.
2.4.4 T,F,S window

The most important data concerning the current tool, the feedrate (path feed or axis feed in
JOG) and the spindle is displayed in the "T, F, S" window.
The "T, S, F" window displays several spindles with a maximum of two utilization indicators.
The grinding power display is integrated in the spindle speed display. The power bar is located
in the Z plane behind the speed value.
The following applies to the spindle display:
● The master spindle is always displayed
● The PLC specifies which tool spindle should be displayed
● The spindle number entered in the tool data is also the active tool spindle if the value is not
zero
Tool data
Display Meaning
T
Tool name Name of the current tool.
Location Location number of the current tool.
D Cutting edge of the current tool.
The tool is displayed with the associated tool type icon corresponding to the
actual coordinate system in the selected cutting edge position.
If the tool is swiveled, then this is taken into account in the display of the
cutting edge position.
In DIN-ISO mode, the H number is displayed instead of the cutting edge
number.
H H number (tool offset data record for DIN-ISO mode).
If there is a valid D number, this is also displayed.
Ø Diameter of the current tool.
R Radius of the current tool.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Display Meaning
Z Z value of the current tool.
X X value of the current tool.
Feed data
Display Meaning
F
Feed disable
Actual feed value

If several axes traverse, it is displayed for:
● "JOG" mode: Axis feed for the traversing axis
● "MDA" and "AUTO" mode: Programmed axis feed
Rapid traverse G0 is active
0.000 No feed is active
Override Display as a percentage
Spindle data
Display Meaning
S
S1 Spindle selection, identification with spindle number and main spindle
Speed Actual value (when spindle turns, display increases)
Setpoint (always displayed, also during positioning)
Icon Spindle status
Spindle not enabled
Spindle is turning clockwise
Spindle is turning counterclockwise
Spindle is stationary
Override Display as a percentage
Spindle utilization Display between 0 and 100%
rate The upper limit value can be greater than 100%.
See machine manufacturer's specifications.
Note
Display of logical spindles
If the spindle converter is active, logical spindles are displayed in the workpiece coordinate
system. When switching over to the machine coordinate system, the physical spindles are
displayed.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4.5 Current block display

The window of the current block display shows the program blocks currently being executed.
Display of current program

The following information is displayed in the running program:
● The workpiece name or program name is entered in the header line.
● The program block which is just being processed appears colored.
Display of the machining times

If you set that the machining times are to be recorded in the settings for automatic mode, the
measured times are shown at the end of the line as follows:
Display Meaning
Light green background Measured machining time of the program block (automatic mode)
Green background Measured machining time of the program block (automatic mode)
Light blue background Estimated machining time of the program block (simulation)
Blue background Estimated machining time of the program block (simulation)
Yellow background Wait time (automatic mode or simulation)
Highlighting of selected G code commands or keywords

In the program editor settings, you can specify whether selected G code commands are to be
highlighted in color. The following colors are used as standard:
Display Meaning
Blue font D, S, F, T, M and H functions
Red font "G0" motion command
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Display Meaning
Green font "G1" motion command
Blue-green font "G2" or "G3" motion command
Gray font Comment
You can define further highlight colors in the "sleditorwidget.ini" configuration file.
Editing a program directly

In the Reset state, you can edit the current program directly.
1. Press the <INSERT> key.
2. Place the cursor at the relevant position and edit the program block.
Direct editing is only possible for G code blocks in the NC memory, not
for external execution.
3. Press the <INSERT> key to exit the program and the edit mode again.
See also
Settings for the automatic mode (Page 166)
2.4.6 Operation via softkeys and buttons

Operating areas/operating modes
The user interface consists of different windows featuring eight horizontal and eight vertical
softkeys.
You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the softkey bars.
You can display a new window or execute functions using the softkeys.
The operating software is sub-divided into six operating areas (machine, parameter, program,
program manager, diagnosis, startup) and five operating modes or submodes (JOG, MDA,
AUTO, TEACH IN, REF POINT, REPOS).
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Changing the operating area
Press the <MENU SELECT> key and select the desired operating area using
the horizontal softkey bar.
You can call the "Machine" operating area directly using the key on the operator panel.
Press the <MACHINE> key to select the "machine" operating area.
Changing the operating mode

You can select a mode or submode directly using the keys on the machine control panel or
using the vertical softkeys in the main menu.
General keys and softkeys
When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the user inter‐
face, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an operating area. To do
so, press the menu forward key.
The symbol indicates that you are in the expanded softkey bar.
Pressing the key again will take you back to the original horizontal softkey bar.
Use the ">>" softkey to open a new vertical softkey bar.
Use the "<<" softkey to return to the previous vertical softkey bar.
Use the "Return" softkey to close an open window.
Use the "Cancel" softkey to exit a window without accepting the entered values
and return to the next highest window.
When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parameter screen
form correctly, you can close the window and save the parameters using the
"Accept" softkey. The values you entered are applied to a program.
Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename or delete
a program.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4.7 Entering or selecting parameters

When setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter various parameter
values in the entry fields. The background color of the fields provides information on the status
of the entry field.
Orange background The input field is selected

Light orange background The input field is in edit mode
Pink background The entered value is incorrect
Selecting parameters
Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in the input field. Fields of
this type do not allow you to type in a value.
The selection symbol is displayed in the tooltip:
Associated selection fields

There are selection fields for various parameters:
● Selection of units
● Changeover between absolute and incremental dimensions
Procedure
1. Keep pressing the <SELECT> key until the required setting or unit is se‐
lected.
The <SELECT> key only works if there are several selection options
available.
- OR -
Press the <INSERT> key.
The selection options are displayed in a list.
2. Select the required setting using the <Cursor down> and <Cursor up>
keys.
3. If required, enter a value in the associated input field.

4. Press the <INPUT> key to complete the parameter input.
Changing or calculating parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather than overwriting the
entire entry, switch to insertion mode.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
In this mode, you can also enter simple calculation expressions, without having to explicitly
call the calculator. You can execute the four basic calculation types, work with expressions in
brackets as well as generate square roots and squares.
Note
Generating square roots and squares
The extract roots and generate square functions is not available in the parameter screens of
the cycles and functions in the "Program" operating area.

The insert mode is activated.
You can navigate within the input field using the <Cursor left> and <Cursor
right> keys.
Use the <BACKSPACE> and <DEL> key to delete individual characters.
+ <*> Enter the multiplication characters using the <SHIFT> + <*> keys.
+ </> Enter the division character using the <SHIFT> + </> keys.
Enter bracket expressions using the <SHIFT> + <(> and <SHIFT> + <)>
keys.
+ <)>
+ <number> Enter "r" or "R" as well as the number x from which you would like to extract
5 the root.
+ <number> Enter "s" or "S" as well as the number x for which you would like to gen‐
6 erate the square.
Close the value entry using the <INPUT> key and the result is transferred
into the field.
Accepting parameters
When you have correctly entered all necessary parameters, you can close the window and
save your settings.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. In this case,
you can see from the dialog line which parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly.
Press the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
Press the "Accept" softkey.
2.4.8 Pocket calculator
Procedure
1. Position the cursor on the desired entry field.

2. Press the <=> key.
The calculator is displayed.

3. Input the arithmetic statement.
You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.
4. Press the equals symbol on the calculator.
- OR -
Press the "Calculate" softkey.
- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.
The new value is calculated and displayed in the entry field of the calcu‐
lator.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The calculated value is accepted and displayed in the entry field of the
window.
Note
Input order for functions
When using the square root or squaring functions, make sure to press the "R" or "S" function
keys, respectively, before entering a number.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4.9 Context menu

When you right-click, the context menu opens and provides the following functions:
● Cut
Cut Ctrl+X
● Copy
Copy Ctrl+C
● Paste
Paste Ctrl+V
Program editor
Additional functions are available in the editor
● Undo the last change
Undo Ctrl+Z
● Redo the changes that were undone
Redo Ctrl+Y
Up to 50 changes can be undone.
2.4.10 Touch operation

If you have an operator panel with a touch screen, you can perform the following functions
with touch operation:
Operating area switchover
You can display the operating area menu by touching the display symbol for the
active operating area in the status display.
Channel switchover
You can switch over to the next channel by touching the channel display
in the status display.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4.11 Changing the user interface language
Procedure
1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.
2. Press the "Change language" softkey.

The "Language selection" window opens. The language set last is selec‐
ted.
3. Position the cursor on the desired language.
4. Press the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
The user interface changes to the selected language.
Note
Changing the language directly on the input screens
You can switch between the user interface languages available on the controller directly on
the user interface by pressing the key combination <CTRL + L>.
2.4.12 Entering Chinese characters
Using the input editor IME (input method editor), you can select Asian characters where you
enter the phonetic notation. These characters are transferred into the user interface.
Note
Call the input editor with <Alt + S>
The input editor can only be called there where it is permissible to enter Asian characters.
The editor is available for the following Asian languages:

● Simplified Chinese
● Traditional Chinese
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Input types
Input type Description

Pinyin input Latin letters are combined phonetically to denote the sound of the character.
The editor lists all of the characters from the dictionary that can be selected.
Zhuyin input Non-Latin letters are combined phonetically to denote the sound of the character.
(only traditional Chinese) The editor lists all of the characters from the dictionary that can be selected.
Entering Latin letters The characters that are entered are directly transferred into the input field, from where
the editor was called.
Structure of the editor
3KRQHWLFQRWDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ /HDUQLQJIXQFWLRQRIWKHGLFWLRQDU\ )XQFWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

IURPGLFWLRQDU\
&KDUDFWHUVOLVWHG 3KRQHWLFQRWDWLRQLQSXW
Figure 2-4 Example: Pinyin input
3KRQHWLFQRWDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ &KDUDFWHUVOLVWHG )XQFWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

IURPGLFWLRQDU\ IRUWKHLQSXWILHOG
&KDUDFWHUVOLVWHGIRUWKHSKRQHWLFQRWDWLRQLQSXW 3KRQHWLFQRWDWLRQLQSXW
Figure 2-5 Example: Zhuyin input
Functions
Pinyin input
Entering Latin letters
Editing the dictionary
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Dictionaries
The simplified Chinese and traditional Chinese dictionaries that are supplied can be expanded:
● If you enter new phonetic notations, the editor creates a new line. The entered phonetic
notation is broken down into known phonetic notations. Select the associated character for
each component. The compiled characters are displayed in the additional line. Accept the
new word into the dictionary and into the input field by pressing the <Input> key.
● Using any Unicode editor, you can enter new phonetic notations into a text file. These
phonetic notations are imported into the dictionary the next time that the input editor is
started.
2.4.12.1 Entering Asian characters
Precondition
The control has been switched over to Chinese.
Procedure
Editing characters using the Pinyin method

1. Open the screen form and position the cursor on the input field.
$
Press the <Alt +S> keys.
The editor is displayed.
+
2. Enter the desired phonetic notation using Latin letters. Use the upper
input field for traditional Chinese.
3. Press the <Cursor down> key to reach the dictionary.
4. Keeping the <Cursor down> key pressed, displays all the entered pho‐
netic notations and the associated selection characters.
5. Press the <BACKSPACE> softkey to delete entered phonetic notations.
6. Press the number key to insert the associated character.

When a character is selected, the editor records the frequency with which
it is selected for a specific phonetic notation and offers this character at
the top of the list when the editor is next opened.
Editing characters using the Zhuyin method (only traditional Chinese)
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
$
+
2. Enter the desired phonetic notation using the numerical block.

Each number is assigned a certain number of letters that can be selected
by pressing the numeric key one or several times.
3. Press the <Cursor down> key to reach the dictionary.
4. Keeping the <Cursor down> key pressed, displays all the entered pho‐
netic notations and the associated selection characters.
5. Press the <BACKSPACE> softkey to delete entered phonetic notations.
6. To select the associated character, press the <cursor right> or <cursor

left> keys.
7. Press the <input> key to enter the character.
2.4.12.2 Editing the dictionary
Learning function of the input editor
Requirement:
The control has been switched over to Chinese.
An unknown phonetic notation has been entered into the input editor.
1. The editor provides a further line in which the combined characters and
phonetic notations are displayed.
The first part of the phonetic notation is displayed in the field for selecting
the phonetic notation from the dictionary. Various characters are listed
for this particular phonetic notation.
2. Press the number key to insert the associated character into the addi‐
tional line.
The next part of the phonetic notation is displayed in the field for selecting
the phonetic notation from the dictionary.
3. Repeat step 2 until the complete phonetic notation has been compiled.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Press the <TAB> key to toggle between the compiled phonetic notation
field and the phonetic notation input.
Compiled characters are deleted using the <BACKSPACE> key.
4. Press the <input> key to transfer the compiled phonetic notation to the
dictionary and the input field.
Importing a dictionary
A dictionary can now be generated using any Unicode editor by attaching the corresponding
Chinese characters to the pinyin phonetic spelling. If the phonetic spelling contains several
Chinese characters, then the line must not contain any additional match. If there are several
matches for one phonetic spelling, then these must be specified in the dictionary line by line.
Otherwise, several characters can be specified for each line.
The generated file should be saved in the UTF8 format under the name dictchs.txt (simplified
Chinese) or dictcht.txt (traditional Chinese).
Line structure:
Pinyin phonetic spelling <TAB> Chinese characters <LF>
OR
Pinyin phonetic spelling <TAB> Chinese character1<TAB> Chinese character2 <TAB> …
<LF>
<TAB> - tab key
<LF> - line break
Store the created dictionary in one of the following paths:
../user/sinumerik/hmi/ime/
../oem/sinumerik/hmi/ime/
When the Chinese editor is called the next time, it enters the content of the dictionary into the
system dictionary.
Example:
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2.4.13 Entering Korean characters

You can enter Korean characters in the input fields using the input editor IME (Input Method
Editor).
Note
You require a special keyboard to enter Korean characters. If this is not available, then you
can enter the characters using a matrix.
Korean keyboard
To enter Korean characters, you will need a keyboard with the keyboard assignment shown
below. In terms of key layout, this keyboard is the equivalent of an English QWERTY keyboard
and individual events must be grouped together to form syllables.
Structure of the editor
Functions
Editing characters using a matrix

Editing characters using the keyboard
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Entering Korean characters

Entering Latin letters
Precondition
The control has been switched over to Korean.
Procedure
Editing characters using the keyboard

$
+
2. Switch to the "Keyboard - Matrix" selection box.
3. Select the keyboard.
4. Switch to the function selection box.
5. Select Korean character input.
6. Enter the required characters.

7. Press the <input> key to enter the character into the input field.
Editing characters using a matrix

$
+
2. Switch to the "Keyboard - Matrix" selection box.
3. Select the "matrix".
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
4. Switch to the function selection box.
5. Select Korean character input.
6. Enter the number of the line in which the required character is located.
The line is highlighted in color.
7. Enter the number of the column in which the required character is located.
The character will be briefly highlighted in color and then transferred to
the Character field.
Press the <BACKSPACE> softkey to delete entered phonetic notations.
8. Press the <input> key to enter the character into the input field.
2.4.14 Protection levels

The input and modification of data in the control system is protected by passwords at sensitive
places.
Access protection via protection levels

The input or modification of data for the following functions depends on the protection level
setting:
● Tool offsets
● Work offsets
● Setting data
● Program creation / program editing
Note
Configuring access levels for softkeys
You have the option of providing softkeys with protection levels or completely hiding them.
References
For additional information, please refer to the following documentation:
SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl Commissioning Manual
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Softkeys
Machine operating area Protection level

End user
(protection level 3)
Parameters operating area Protection level

Tool management lists
Keyswitch 3
Diagnostics operating area Protection level

Keyswitch 3
User
User
Manufacturer
User
Service
Start-up operating area Protection levels

End user
Keyswitch 3
Keyswitch 3
Keyswitch 3
Keyswitch 3
End user
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Start-up operating area Protection levels

End user
End user
2.4.15 Online help in SINUMERIK Operate

A comprehensive context-sensitive online help is stored in the control system.
● A brief description is provided for each window and, if required, step-by-step instructions
for the operating sequences.
● A detailed help is provided in the editor for every entered G code. You can also display all
G functions and take over a selected command directly from the help into the editor.
● A help page with all parameters is provided on the input screen in the cycle programming.
● Lists of the machine data
● Lists of the setting data
● Lists of the drive parameters
● List of all alarms
Procedure
Calling context-sensitive online help

1. You are in an arbitrary window of an operating area.
2. Press the <HELP> key or on an MF2 keyboard, the <F12> key.
The help page of the currently selected window is opened in a subscreen.
3. Press the "Full screen" softkey to use the entire user interface for the
display of the online help.
Press the "Full screen" softkey again to return to the subscreen.
4. If further helps are offered for the function or associated topics, position
the cursor on the desired link and press the "Follow reference" softkey.
The selected help page is displayed.
5. Press the "Back to reference" softkey to jump back to the previous help.
Calling a topic in the table of contents

1. Press the "Table of contents" softkey.
Depending on which technology you are using, the Operating Manuals
"Operator control Milling", "Operator control Turning" or "Operator control
Universal" as well as the "Programming" Programming Manual are dis‐
played.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
2. Select the desired manual with the <Cursor down> and <Cursor up> keys.
3 Press the <Cursor right> or <INPUT> key or double-click to open the

manual and the section.
4. Navigate to the desired topic with the "Cursor down" key.
5. Press the <Follow reference> softkey or the <INPUT> key to display the
help page for the selected topic.
6. Press the "Current topic" softkey to return to the original help.
Searching for a topic

1. Press the "Search" softkey.
The "Search in Help for:" window is opened.
2. Activate the "Full text " checkbox to search in all help pages.
If the checkbox is not activated, a search is performed in the table of
contents and in the index.
3. Enter the desired keyword in the "Text" field and press the "OK" softkey.
If you enter the search term on the operator panel, replace an umlaut
(accented character) by an asterisk (*) as dummy.
All entered terms and sentences are sought with an AND operation. In
this way, only documents and entries that satisfy all the search criteria
are displayed.
4. Press the "Keyword index" softkey if you only want to display the index
of the operating and programming manual.
Displaying alarm descriptions and machine data

1. If messages or alarms are pending in the "Alarms", "Messages" or "Alarm
Log" window, position the cursor at the appropriate display and press the
<HELP> or the <F12> key.
The associated alarm description is displayed.
2. If you are in the "Start-up" operating area in the windows for the display
of the machine, setting and drive data, position the cursor on the desired
machine data or drive parameter and press the <HELP> or the <F12>
key.
The associated data description is displayed.
Grinding
Introduction
2.4 User interface
Displaying and inserting a G code command in the editor

1. A program is opened in the editor.
Position the cursor on the desired G code command and press the
<HELP> or the <F12> key.
The associated G code description is displayed.
2. Press the "Display all G functions" softkey.
3. With the aid of the search function, select, for example, the desired G
code command.
4. Press the "Transfer to editor" softkey.
The selected G function is taken into the program at the cursor position.
5. Press the "Exit help" softkey again to close the help.
Grinding
Operating with gestures (840D sl) 3
3.1 Overview
The operation of SINUMERIK Operate on a multitouch panel is faster when finger gestures
are used. All actions are performed with finger gestures.
Software option
You require the "SINUMERIK extended touch" option for operating the multitouch panel.
Multitouch panels
Operation with gestures is possible for the following operator panel fronts:
● SINUMERIK OP 015 black
● SINUMERIK OP 019 black
Use of gloves
If possible, do not wear thick gloves when operating the touch-sensitive glass user interface.
Wear thin gloves made of cotton or gloves for touch-sensitive glass user interfaces with
capacitive touch function.
You can wear the following gloves for operating the touch-sensitive glass user interface of the
operator panel:
● Dermatril L
● Camatril Velours type 730
● Uvex Profas Profi ENB 20A
● Comasec PU 900 (4342)
● Camapur Comfort type 619
● Camapur Comfort Antistatic type 625
● KCL Men at Work type 301
● Carex type 1505 / k (leather)
● Thermoplus KCL type 955
● Reusable gloves, medium, white, cotton: BM Polyco (RS order number 562-952)
Grinding
Operating with gestures (840D sl)
3.2 Finger gestures
Note
Operation with thick gloves
The list of the recommended gloves also includes thicker work gloves.
To operate the touch panel with work gloves, apply somewhat more pressure.
Reference
Please refer to the following references for further information about the operation of multitouch
panels:
Operator panel front manual: OP 015 black or operator panel front manual: OP 019 black;
SINUMERIK 840D sl
3.2 Finger gestures
Tap
● Select window
● Select object (e.g. NC block)
● Activate entry field
– Enter or overwrite value
– Tap again to change the value
Flick vertically with one finger

● Scroll in lists (e.g. programs, tools, zero points)
● Scroll in files (e.g. NC programs)
Flick vertically with two fingers

● Page-scroll in lists (e.g. NPV)
● Page-scroll in files (e.g. NC programs)
Grinding
3.2 Finger gestures
Flick vertically with three fingers

● Scroll to the start or end of lists
● Scroll to the start or end of files
Flick horizontally with one finger

● Scroll in lists with many columns
Spread
● Zoom-out graphic contents (e.g. simulation, mold making
view)
Pinch
● Zoom-in graphic contents (e.g. simulation, mold making
view)
Pan with one finger

● Move graphic contents (e.g. simulation, mold making view)
● Move list contents
Pan with two fingers

● Turn graphic contents (e.g. simulation, mold making view)
Grinding
3.2 Finger gestures
Tap and press

● Open object for changing (e.g. NC block)
Tap with two fingers

● Call shortcut menu (e.g. copy, paste)
Tap with two index fingers

● Tap simultaneously with two fingers in the right- and left-
hand corner to open the TCU menu
Grinding
Setting up the machine 4
4.1 Switching on and switching off
Start-up
When the control starts up, the main screen opens according to the operating mode specified
by the machine manufacturer. In general, this is the main screen for the "REF POINT"
submode.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Grinding
Setting up the machine
4.2 Approaching a reference point
4.2.1 Referencing axes

Your machine tool can be equipped with an absolute or incremental path measuring system.
An axis with incremental path measuring system must be referenced after the controller has
been switched on – however, an absolute path measuring system does not have to be
referenced.
For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes must therefore first approach
a reference point, the coordinates of which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.
Sequence
Prior to the approach, the axes must be in a position from where they can approach the
reference point without a collision.
The axes can also all approach the reference point simultaneously, depending on the
manufacturer’s settings.
NOTICE
Risk of collision
If the axes are not in a collision-free position, you must first traverse them to safe positions
in "JOG" or "MDI" mode.
You must follow the axis motions directly on the machine!
Ignore the actual value display until the axes have been referenced!
The software limit switches are not active!
Procedure
1. Press the <JOG> key.
2. Press the <REF. POINT> key.
3. Select the axis to be traversed.

;
Grinding

4. Press the <-> or <+> key.
The selected axis moves to the reference point.
If you have pressed the wrong direction key, the action is not accepted
and the axes do not move.
A symbol is shown next to the axis if it has been referenced.
The axis is referenced as soon as the reference point is reached. The actual value display is
set to the reference point value.
From now on, path limits, such as software limit switches, are active.
End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating mode "AUTO" or "JOG".
4.2.2 User agreement

If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need to confirm that the current
displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when you
reference an axis. Your confirmation is the requirement for the availability of other Safety
Integrated functions.
You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has approached the reference
point.
The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (Machine).
Option
User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software option.
Procedure
1. Select the "Machine" operating area.
2. Press the <REF POINT> key.

;
Grinding
4.3 Operating modes

4. Press the <-> or <+> key.
The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordi‐
nate of the reference point is displayed.
The axis is marked with .
5. Press the "User enable" softkey.

The "User Agreement" window opens.
It shows a list of all machine axes with their current position and SI
position.
5. Position the cursor in the "Acknowledgement" field for the axis in ques‐
tion.
6. Activate the acknowledgement with the <SELECT> key.
The selected axis is marked with an "x" meaning "safely referenced" in

the "Acknowledgement" column.
By pressing the <SELECT> key again, you deactivate the acknowl‐
edgement again.
4.3 Operating modes
4.3.1 Operating modes

You can work in three different operating modes.
"JOG" mode
"JOG" mode is used for the following preparatory actions:
● Approach reference point, i.e. the machine axis is referenced
● Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools,
measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program
● Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
● Positioning axes
Select "JOG"
Press the <JOG> key.
Grinding
4.3 Operating modes
"REF POINT" operating mode

The "REF POINT" operating mode is used to synchronize the control and the machine. For
this purpose, you approach the reference point in "JOG" mode.
Selecting "REF POINT"
Press the <REF POINT> key.
"REPOS" operating mode

The "REPOS" operating mode is used for repositioning to a defined position. After a program
interruption (e.g. to correct tool wear values) move the tool away from the contour in "JOG"
mode.
The distances traversed in "JOG" mode are displayed in the actual value window as the
"Repos" offset.
"REPOS" offsets can be displayed in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece
coordinate system (WCS).
Selecting "Repos"
Press the <REPOS> key.
"MDI" mode (Manual Data Input)

In "MDI" mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-modally to set up the
machine or to perform a single action.
Selecting "MDI"
Press the <MDI> key.
"AUTO" mode
In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially.
Select "AUTO"
Press the <AUTO> key.
"TEACH IN" operating mode

"TEACH IN" is available in the "AUTO" and "MDI" operating modes.
Grinding
4.3 Operating modes
There you may create, edit and execute part programs (main programs or subroutines) for
motional sequences or simple workpieces by approaching and saving positions.
Selecting "Teach In"
Press the <TEACH IN> key.
4.3.2 Modes groups and channels

Every channel behaves like an independent NC. A maximum of one part program can be
processed per channel.
● Control with 1channel
One mode group exists.
● Control with several channels
Channels can be grouped to form several "mode groups."
Example
Control with 4 channels, where machining is carried out in 2 channels and 2 other channels
are used to control the transport of the new workpieces.
Mode group 1 channel 1 (machining)
Channel 2 (transport)
Mode group 2 channel 3 (machining)
Channel 4 (transport)
Mode groups (MGs)

Technologically-related channels can be combined to form a mode group.
Axes and spindles of the same mode group can be controlled by one or more channels.
An operating mode group is in one of "Automatic", "JOG" or "MDI" operating modes, i.e.,
several channels of an operating mode group can never assume different operating modes.
4.3.3 Channel switchover

It is possible to switch between channels when several are in use. Since individual channels
may be assigned to different mode groups, a channel switchover command is also an implicit
mode switchover command.
When a channel menu is available, all of the channels are displayed on softkeys and can be
switched over.
Grinding
4.4 Settings for the machine
Changing the channel
Press the <CHANNEL> key.
The channel changes over to the next channel.

- OR -
If the channel menu is available, a softkey bar is displayed. The active
channel is highlighted.
Another channel can be selected by pressing one of the other softkeys.
References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl
Channel switchover via touch operation

On the HT 8 and when using a touch screen operator panel, you can switch to the next channel
or display the channel menu via touch operation in the status display.
4.4.1 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)

The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the machine coordinate system
or the workpiece coordinate system.
By default, the workpiece coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value
display.
The machine coordinate system (MCS), in contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS),
does not take into account any zero offsets, tool offsets and coordinate rotation.
Procedure
2. Press the <JOG> or <AUTO> key.
Grinding
3. Press the "Act.vls. MCS" softkey.
The machine coordinate system is selected.

The title of the actual value window changes in the MCS.
The softkey to changeover the coordinate system can be hidden. Please refer to the
machine manufacturer's specifications.
4.4.2 Switching the unit of measurement

You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measurement. Switching the unit of
measurement always applies to the entire machine. All required information is automatically
converted to the new unit of measurement, for example:
● Positions
● Tool offsets
● Work offsets
Proceed as follows
1. Select <JOG> or <AUTO> mode in the "Machine" operating area.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.
3. Press the "Switch to inch" softkey.

A prompt asks you whether you really want to switch over the unit of
measurement.
Grinding
The softkey label changes to "Switch to metric".

The unit of measurement applies to the entire machine.
5. Press the "Switch to metric" softkey to set the unit of measurement of the
machine to metric again.
See also
Default settings for manual mode (Page 113)
4.4.3 Setting the zero offset

You can enter a new position value in the actual value display for individual axes when a
settable zero offset is active.
The difference between the position value in the machine coordinate system MCS and the
new position value in the workpiece coordinate system WCS is saved permanently in the
currently active zero offset (e.g. G54).
Relative actual value

Further, you also have the possibility of entering position values in the relative coordinate
system.
Note
The new actual value is only displayed. The relative actual value has no effect on the axis
positions and the active zero offset.
Resetting the relative actual value
Press the "Delete REL" softkey.
The actual values are deleted.

The softkeys to set the zero point in the relative coordinate system are only available if the
corresponding machine data is set.
Precondition
The controller is in the workpiece coordinate system.
Grinding
The actual value is set in the reset state.
Note
Setting the ZO in the Stop state
If you enter the new actual value in the Stop state, the changes made are only visible and only
take effect when the program is continued.
Procedure
1. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.
2. Press the "Set ZO" softkey.
- OR -
Press the ">>", "REL act. vals" and "Set REL" softkeys to set position
values in the relative coordinate system.
3. Enter the new required position value for X, Y or Z directly in the actual
value display (you can toggle between the axes with the cursor keys) and
press the "Input" key to confirm the entries.
- OR -
Press softkeys "X=0","Y=0" or "Z=0" to set the relevant position to zero.
...
- OR -
Press softkey "X=Y=Z=0" to set all axis positions to zero simultaneously.
Resetting the actual value
Press the "Delete active ZO" softkey.

The offset is deleted permanently.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
Note
Irreversible active zero offset
The current active zero offset is irreversibly deleted by this action.
4.5 Zero offsets
4.5.1 Zero offsets

After reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is based on
the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (Machine). The program for machining
the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate
system (Work). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The
distance between the machine zero and the workpiece zero depends on the workpiece type
and how it is clamped. This zero offset is taken into account during execution of the program
and can be a combination of different offsets.
After reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is based on
the machine zero of the machine coordinate system (Machine).
The actual value display of the positions can also refer to the SZS coordinate system (settable
zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
7RWDORIIVHW
: :&6
&RRUGLQDWHWUDQVIRUPDWLRQ
6=6
3B722/)5$0(
3B:3)5$0(
3B*)5$0(
3B,)5$0(
:RUNRIIVHWILQH
%DVLF]HURV\VWHP%=6
=HURSRLQWRIIVHWURXJK
%DVHRIIVHW 0&6
Figure 4-1 Zero offsets
When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least one offset (base offset
or zero offset) exists in which the position of the workpiece zero is saved.
Base offset
The base offset is a zero offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset, its
value will be zero. The base offset is specified in the "Zero Offset - Base" window.
Settable zero system (SZS)

The SZS (Settable Zero System) corresponds to the WCS transformed by the programmable
frame (e.g. $P_PFRAME, $PCYCFRAME, $P_TOOLFRAME and $P_WPFRAME).
Basic zero system (BZS)

The BZS (Basic Zero System) includes not only the frames of the ENS, but also the current
settable frame ($P_IFRAME and $P_GFRAME).
Coarse and fine offsets

Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset.
You can call the zero offsets from any program (coarse and fine offsets are added together).
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset
that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero
in the fine offset.
Note
Deselect fine offset (only 840D sl)
You have the option of deselecting the fine offset using machine data MD18600
$MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS
4.5.2 Display active zero offset

The following work offsets are displayed in the "Zero Offset - Active" window:
● Work offsets, for which active offsets are included, or for which values are entered.
● Settable work offsets
● Seat-related fine offsets
● Total work offset
This window is generally used only for monitoring.
The availability of the offsets depends on the setting.
Procedure
1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.
2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

The "Work Offset - Active" window is opened.
Note
Further details on work offsets
If you would like to see further details about the specified offsets or if you would like to change
values for the rotation, scaling or mirroring, press the "Details" softkey.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
4.5.3 Displaying the zero offset "overview"

The active offsets or system offsets are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work Offset -
Overview" window.
In addition to the offset (course and fine), the rotation, scaling and mirroring defined using this
are also displayed.
This window is generally used only for monitoring.
Display of active work offsets
Work offsets
DRF Displays the handwheel axis offset.
Rotary table reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $ P_PART‐
FRAME.
Basic reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_SETFRAME.
Access to the system offsets is protected via a keyswitch.
External WO frame Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_EXTFRAME.
Total base WO Displays all effective basis offsets.
G500 Displays the work offsets activated with G54 - G599.
Under certain circumstances, you can change the data using "Set WO",
i.e. you can correct a zero point that has been set.
Tool reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_TOOLFRAME.
Workpiece reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_WPFRAME.
Programmed WO Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_PFRAME.
Cycle reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_CYCFRAME.
GFRAME0 (seat-related Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_GFRAME.
work offset)
Total WO Displays the active work offset, resulting from the total of all work offsets.
Procedure
2. Press the "Work offset" and "Overview" softkeys.

The "Work offset - Overview" window opens.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
4.5.4 Displaying and editing base zero offset

The defined channel-specific and global base offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are
displayed for all set-up axes in the "Zero offset - Base" window.
Procedure
2. Press the "Zero offset" softkey.
3. Press the "Base" softkey.

The "Zero Offset - Base" window is opened.
4. You can edit the values directly in the table.
Note
Activate base offsets
The offsets specified here are immediately active.
4.5.5 Displaying and editing settable zero offset

All settable offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed in the "Zero Offset -
G54..G599" window.
Rotation, scaling and mirroring are displayed.
Procedure
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
3. Press the "G54…G599" softkey.

The "Zero Offset - G54..G599" window is opened.
Note
The labeling of the softkeys for the settable zero offsets varies, i.e. the
settable zero offsets configured on the machine are displayed (examples:
G54…G57, G54…G505, G54…G599).
Please observe the machine manufacturer's specifications.
Note
Activate settable zero offsets
The settable zero offsets must first be selected in the program before they have an impact.
4.5.6 Displaying and editing seat-related fine offset

In the window "Work offset - GFrame1 ... GFrame..." all position-related offset values (seat
offsets) are displayed.
Translatory and rotary offsets are displayed.
Procedure
3. Press softkey "GFrame1...GFrame2".

Window "Work offset - GFrame1 ... GFrame2" is opened.
Note:
The labeling of the softkeys for the seat-related fine offsets varies, i.e. the
seat-dependent work offsets configured at the machine are displayed
(examples: GFRAME1…GFRAME1, GFRAME1…GFRAME2,
GFRAME1…GFRAME100).
Here, please observe the information provided by the machine manufac‐
turer.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
Note
Activating seat-related fine offsets
The seat-related work offsets must first be selected in the program before they are activated.
4.5.7 Displaying and editing details of the zero offsets

For each zero offset, you can display and edit all data for all axes. You can also delete zero
offsets.
For every axis, values for the following data will be displayed:
● Coarse and fine offsets
● Rotation
● Scaling
● Mirroring
Note
Settings for rotation, scaling and mirroring are specified here and can only be changed here.
Tool details
You can display the following details for the tool and wear data for tools:
● TC
● Adapter dimension
● Length / length wear
● EC setup correction
● SC sum correction
● Total length
● Radius / radius wear
You can also change the display of the tool correction values between the Ma‐
chine Coordinate System and the Workpiece Coordinate System.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
Procedure
3. Press the "Active", "Base" or "G54…G599" softkey.

The corresponding window opens.
4. Place the cursor on the desired zero offset to view its details.
5. Press the "Details" softkey.
A window opens, depending on the selected zero offset, e.g. "Zero Offset
- Details: G54 to G599".
- OR -
Press the "Clear offset" softkey to reset all entered values.
Press the "ZO +" or "ZO -" softkey to select the next or previous offset,
respectively, within the selected area ("Active", "Base", "G54 to G599")
without first having to switch to the overview window.
...
If you have reached the end of the range (e.g. G599), you will switch
automatically to the beginning of the range (e.g. G54).
These value changes are available in the part program immediately or after "Reset".
Press the "Back" softkey to close the window.
Grinding
4.5 Zero offsets
4.5.8 Deleting a zero offset

You have the option of deleting work offsets. This resets the entered values.
Procedure
3. Press the "Overview", "Basis" or "G54…G599" softkey.
...
5. Position the cursor on the work offset you would like to delete.
6. Press the "Clear offset" softkey.
A confirmation prompt is displayed as to whether you really want to delete
the work offset.
7. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm that you wish to delete the work offset.
4.5.9 Deleting seat-related fine offsets

You have the option of deleting seat-dependent fine offsets after you have changed a tool.
The values that have been entered are then set to zero.
Procedure
Grinding
4.6 Measuring a tool
3. Press softkey "GFrame1...G-Frame2".

Note:
The labeling of the softkeys for the seat-related fine offsets varies, i.e. the
seat-dependent work offsets configured at the machine are displayed
(examples: GFRAME1…GFRAME1, GFRAME1…GFRAME2,
GFRAME1…GFRAME100).
Here, please observe the information provided by the machine manufac‐
turer.
4. In the "Work offset - GFrame1 ... GFrame2" window in the table, set all
values of the seat-related fine offsets to zero.
- OR -
Press the "Delete all" softkey.
A confirmation prompt is displayed as to whether you really want to delete
the seat-related fine offsets.
Note:
The "Delete all" softkey is only available if seat-related work offsets have
been set up.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm that you wish to delete the work offset.
4.6.1 Cylindrical grinding
4.6.1.1 Overview
The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when executing a part
program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time the tool is called, the
control considers the tool offset data.
When programming the part program, you only need to enter the workpiece dimensions from
the production drawing. The control then independently calculates the individual tool path.
Measuring grinding wheels and dressers

You determine the tool offset data, i.e. the lengths or the positions of the tools, by making
manual measurements (scratching).
When measuring manually, traverse the tool manually to a selected reference point in order
to determine the tool dimensions and positions in the X and Z directions. The control then
calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool carrier reference point and the
approached reference point.
Grinding
Measuring the reference points for the grinding wheel

For manual measurements of a grinding tool, you have the option of selecting the following
reference points:
● Workpiece (with zero offset)
● Dresser (with zero offset as dressing tool)
Measuring the reference points for the dresser

Use the grinding wheel as reference point for manually measuring a dresser.
4.6.1.2 Measure grinding tool manually with the work piece reference point
Reference point
The workpiece edge serves as reference point when measuring length X and length Z.
You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the measurement.
Procedure
1. Select "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.
2. Press the "Meas. tool" softkey.
3. Press the "Measure wheel" softkey.
4. Press the "Select tool" softkey.

The "Tool Selection" window opens.
5. In the "Tool Selection" window, select the grinding tool that you want to
measure and press the "OK" softkey.
The cutting edge location must be entered in the tool list.
- OR -
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the grinding tool that
you want to measure and press the "In manual" softkey.
The tool is transferred to the "Measure: "Grinding Wheel" window.
Grinding
6. Select the "Workpiece" entry in the "Reference point" selection field.
7. Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to
measure.
8. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 and Z0.

If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual value
display.
9. Scratch the required edge using the tool.
10. Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. The
cutting edge location is considered automatically.
Note
Active grinding tool
Tool measurement is possible only with an active grinding tool.
4.6.1.3 Measure grinding tool manually with the dresser reference point
Reference point
A dresser serves as reference point for the measurement of length X or Z.
The reference point of the dresser can be represented by a zero offset or a dressing tool. This
setting is permanently stored in the machine data and specified by the machine manufacturer.
Procedure
Grinding

- OR -

6. Select the "Dresser" entry in the "Reference point" selection field.
7. Position the cursor in the "TR" field, press the "Select dresser" softkey,
select the dresser for measuring the tool length and press the "OK" soft‐
key.
- OR -
Position the cursor in the "Zero offset" field and press the "Select ZO"
softkey.
Select in the "Zero Offset - G54 ... G509" window the desired zero offset
and press the "In manual" softkey.
measure.
9. Scratch the dresser using the tool.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
The cutting edge location is considered automatically.
Note
4.6.1.4 Measuring the dressing tool manually with the grinding tool reference point
Reference point
A grinding wheel serves as reference point for the measurement of length X or Z.
Grinding
Procedure
3. Press the "Measure dresser" softkey.
4. Press the "Select dresser" softkey.

5. In the "Tool Selection" window, select the dressing tool that you want to
- OR -
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the dressing tool that
The tool is transferred to the "Measure: Dresser" window.

- OR -
Position the cursor to the "Zero offset" field and press the "Select ZO"
softkey.
6. Position the cursor in the "TR" field, press the "Select grinding wheel"
softkey, select the grinding wheel to be used as reference point and press
the "OK" softkey.
measure.

Grinding
4.6.2 Surface grinding
4.6.2.1 Overview
The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when executing a part
program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time the tool is called, the
control considers the tool offset data.
When programming the part program, you only need to enter the workpiece dimensions from
the production drawing. The control then independently calculates the individual tool path.
Measuring grinding wheels and dressers

You determine the tool offset data, i.e. the lengths or the positions of the tools, by making
manual measurements (scratching).
When measuring manually, traverse the tool manually to a defined reference point in order to
determine the tool dimensions and positions in the Y and Z directions. The control then
calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool carrier reference point and the
reference point.
Reference points for grinding wheels

For manual measurements of a grinding tool, you have the option of selecting the following
reference points:
● Workpiece (with zero offset)
● Dresser (with zero offset as dressing tool)
Reference points for dressers

Use the grinding wheel as reference point for manually measuring a dresser.
4.6.2.2 Measure grinding tool manually with the work piece reference point
Reference point
The workpiece edge serves as reference point when measuring length X and length Z.
You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the measurement.
Grinding
Procedure

- OR -
The tool is transferred to the "Measure: Grinding Wheel" window.

6. Select the "Workpiece" entry in the "Reference point" selection field.
7. Press the "Y" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to
measure.
8. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in Y0 or Z0.

If no value is entered for Y0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual value
display.
Note
Grinding
4.6.2.3 Measure grinding tool manually with the dresser reference point
Reference point
A dresser serves as reference point for the measurement of length Y or Z.
Procedure

- OR -

key.
The tool is transferred to the "Measure: Length Manual" window.
- OR -
Grinding
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the dressing tool for
measuring the tool length and press the "In manual" softkey.

8. Press the "Y" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length of the dresser
tool to be measured.

Note
4.6.2.4 Measuring the dressing tool manually with the grinding tool reference point
Reference point
A grinding wheel serves as reference point for the measurement of length X, Y or Z.
Procedure

5. In the "Tool Selection" window, select the dressing tool to be measured
and press the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
Grinding
4.7 Measuring the workpiece zero
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the dressing tool to be
measured and press the "In manual" softkey.

softkey.
Select the grinding wheel for measuring the tool length and press the
"OK" softkey
- OR -
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the grinding wheel for
measuring the tool length and press the "In manual" softkey.
The tool is transferred into the "Measure: Dresser" window.

7. Press the "X", "Y" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length of the
dresser tool to be measured.
...

Note
Active dressing tool
Tool measurement is possible only with an active dressing tool.
4.7.1 Cylindrical grinding
4.7.1.1 Measuring the workpiece zero

The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece zero. To determine
this zero point, measure the length or the diameter of the workpiece and save it in a zero offset.
This means that the position is stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset
are deleted.
Grinding
Calculation
When the workpiece zero / zero offset is calculated, the tool length is automatically taken into
account.
Requirement
The requirement for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known lengths is in the
machining position.
Procedure
2. Press the "Workpiece zero" softkey.

The "Measure: Edge" window opens.
3. Select "Measuring only" if you only wish to display the measured values.
- OR -
Select in the "Zero offset" field the desired zero offset in which you want
to store the zero point (e.g. basis reference).
- OR -
Press the "Select ZO" softkey and select the zero offset in which the zero
point is to be saved in the "Zero offset – G54 … G599" window and press
the "In manual" softkey.
You return to the "Measure: Edge" window.
4. Traverse the tool in the X or Z direction and scratch the workpiece.

5. Enter the position setpoint of the workpiece edge X0 or Z0 and press the
"Set ZO" softkey.
Note
Settable zero offsets
The labeling of the softkeys for the settable zero offsets varies, i.e. the settable zero offsets
configured on the machine are displayed (examples: G54…G57, G54…G505, G54…G599).
Grinding
4.7.2 Surface grinding
4.7.2.1 Overview
The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece zero. The workpiece
zero is determined on the workpiece edge.
Manual measurement
To measure the zero point manually, you need to traverse your tool manually up to the
workpiece. Alternatively, you can also deploy a grinding tool with known length.
4.7.2.2 Setting the edge

The workpiece lies parallel to the coordinate system on the work table. You measure one
reference point in one of the axes (X, Y, Z).
Requirement
A grinding tool is deployed for scratching when you measure the workpiece zero manually.
Procedure
1. Select the "Machine" operating area and press the <JOG> key.
2. Press the "Workpiece zero" and "Set edge" softkeys.

The "Measure: Edge" window opens.
3. Select "Measuring only" if you only wish to display the measured values.
- OR -
4. In the selection box, select the desired zero offset in which you want to
store the zero point.
- OR -
Grinding
4.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data
Press the "Select ZO" softkey to select a settable zero offset.

In the "Zero Offset – G54 ... G599" window, select a zero offset, in which
the zero point should be saved.
Press the "In manual" softkey.
You return to the measurement window.
5. Use the softkeys to select in which axis direction you want to approach
the workpiece first.
...
6. In X0, Y0, or Z0, specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge.
The setpoint position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension specifications of
the workpiece edge from the workpiece drawing.
Note
Settable zero offsets
The labeling of the softkeys for the settable zero offsets varies, i.e. the settable zero offsets
configured on the machine are displayed (examples: G54…G57, G54…G505, G54…G599).
4.8.1 Specify working area limitations

The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the range within which a tool can
traverse in all channel axes. These commands allow you to set up protection zones in the
working area which are out of bounds for tool movements.
In this way, you are able to restrict the traversing range of the axes in addition to the limit
switches.
Requirements
You can only make changes in "AUTO" mode when in the RESET condition. These changes
are then immediate.
You can make changes in "JOG" mode at any time. These changes, however, only become
active at the start of a new motion.
Grinding
Procedure
2. Press the "Setting data" softkey.
The "Working Area Limitation" window appears.
3. Place the cursor in the required field and enter the new values via the
numeric keyboard.
The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according to your
inputs.
4. Click the "active" checkbox to activate the protection zone.
Note
You will find all of the setting data in the "Start-up" operating area under "Machine data" via
the menu forward key.
4.8.2 Editing spindle data

The speed limits set for the spindles that must not be under- or overshot are displayed in the
"Spindles" window.
You can limit the spindle speeds in fields "Minimum" and "Maximum" within the limit values
defined in the relevant machine data.
Spindle speed limitation at constant cutting rate

In field "Spindle speed limitation at G96", the programmed spindle speed limitation at constant
cutting speed is displayed together with the permanently active limitations.
This speed limitation, for example, prevents the spindle from accelerating to the max. spindle
speed of the current gear stage (G96) when performing tapping operations or machining very
small diameters.
Note
The "Spindle data" softkey only appears if a spindle is configured.
Grinding
Procedure
2. Press the "Setting data" and "Spindle data" softkeys.

The "Spindles" window opens.
3. If you want to change the spindle speed, place the cursor on the "Maxi‐
mum", "Minimum", or "Spindle speed limitation at G96" and enter a new
value.
4.8.3 Spindle chuck data
4.8.3.1 Defining spindle chuck data

You store the chuck dimensions of the spindles at your machine in the "Spindle Chuck Data"
window.
Manually measuring a tool

If you want to use the chuck of the main or counter-spindle as a reference point during manual
measuring, specify the chuck dimension ZC.
Main spindle
6WRSHGJH
)URQWHGJH
6WRSHGJH
)URQWHGJH
=6
=& =6 =& =(
Dimensions, main spindle jaw type Dimensions, main spindle jaw type 2
1
Grinding
Counter-spindle
You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-spindle. The forward
edge or stop edge automatically serves as the valid reference point when traversing the
counter-spindle. This is especially important when gripping the workpiece using the counter-
spindle.
)URQWHGJH 6WRSHGJH
6WRSHGJH )URQWHGJH
=6
=6 =& =( =&
Dimensions, counter-spindle jaw type 1 Dimensions, counter-spindle jaw type 2
Tailstock
;5 ;5
=5 =5
Dimensioning the main spindle tailstock Dimensioning the counter-spindle tailstock
Procedure
2. Press the "Setting data" and "Spindle chuck data" softkeys.

The "Spindle Chuck Data" window opens.
Grinding
3. Enter the desired parameter.

The settings become active immediately.
4.8.3.2 Parameters, spindle chuck data
Parameter Description Unit

Main spindle
Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge
● Jaw type 1
● Jaw type 2
ZC1 Main spindle chuck dimensions (inc) mm
ZS1 Main spindle stop dimensions (inc) mm
ZE1 Jaw dimension, main spindle (inc) - only for "Jaw type 2" mm
XR Tailstock diameter - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm
ZR Tailstock length - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm
Counter-spindle
Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge
● Jaw type 1
● Jaw type 2
ZC3 Chuck dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been mm
set-up
ZS3 Stop dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been set- mm
up
ZE3 Jaw dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been set- mm
up and "Jaw type 2"
XR Tailstock diameter - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm
ZR Tailstock length - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm
4.8.4 Entering cylinder error compensation (only rotary grinding machine)

The "Cylinder error compensation" function allows you to correct cylinder errors that have
occurred when clamping the workpiece. The maximum compensation value is 1 mm (for 828D)
or 10 mm (for 840D sl).
Software option
You require the "SINUMERIK_GRINDING_ADVANCED" software option in order to
use this function.
Grinding
References
More detailed information on cylinder error compensation can be found in the following
reference:
Extension Functions (FB2sl) Function Manual:
● Chapter: "Compensations (K3)"
Precondition
● The option is set
● A compensation table for sag compensation (CEC) has been set up.
Procedure
2. Press the "Setting data" and "Cylinder error compensation" softkeys.

The "Cylinder Error compensation" window opens.
3. Select the desired data set in the "Compensation" selection field.
4. For measuring points P1 and P2, enter the basis value (ZM) and com‐
pensation value (XM).
The "Set comp." softkey can be used after entering the compensation
values.
5. Press the "Set comp.” softkey.
The compensation is applied.
- OR -
Press the "Delete comp." softkey if you wish to delete the compensation
values.
The cylinder error compensation is deleted.
Grinding
4.10 Handwheel assignment
4.9 Displaying setting data lists

You can display lists with configured setting data.
Procedure
2. Press the "Setting data" and "Data lists" softkeys.

The "Setting Data Lists" window opens.
3. Press the "Select data list" softkey and in the "View" list, select the re‐
quired list with setting data.

You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (Machine) or in the workpiece
coordinate system (Work) via the handwheel.
Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the handwheel offset
(only for 828D).
All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment:
● Geometry axes
When traversing, the geometry axes taken into account the actual machine status (e.g.
rotations, transformations). All channel machine axes, which are currently assigned to the
geometry axis, are in this case simultaneously traversed.
● Channel machine axes
Channel machine axes are assigned to the particular channel. They can only be individually
traversed, i.e. the actual machine state has no influence.
The also applies to channel machine axes, that are declared as geometry axes.
Grinding
Procedure
Press the <JOG>, <AUTO> or <MDI> key.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Handwheel" softkey.

The "Handwheel" window appears.
A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected handwheel.
3. Position the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish
to assign the axis (e.g. No. 1).
4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired axis (e.g. "X").
- OR
Open the "Axis" selection box using the <INSERT> key, navigate to the
desired axis, and press the <INPUT> key.
Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to
handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).
5. Press the "Handwheel" softkey again.
- OR -
Press the "Back" softkey.
The "Handwheel" window closes.
Deactivate handwheel
1. Position the cursor on the handwheel whose assignment you wish to

cancel (e.g. No. 1).
2. Press the softkey for the assigned axis again (e.g. "X").
- OR -
Open the "Axis" selection box using the <INSERT> key, navigate to the
empty field, and press the <INPUT> key.
Clearing an axis selection also clears the handwheel selection (e.g., "X"
is cleared for handwheel no. 1 and is no longer active).
Grinding
4.11 MDI
4.11 MDI
4.11.1 Working in MDA

In "MDI" mode (Manual Data Input mode), you can enter G-code commands or standard cycles
block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine.
You have the option of loading an MDI program or a standard program with the standard cycles
directly into the MDI buffer from the program manager; you can subsequently then edit it.
You can save programs, generated or modified in the MDI working window, in the program
manager, e.g. in a directory specifically created for the purpose.
Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option to load and save MDI
programs (for 828D).
4.11.2 Loading an MDA program from the Program Manager
Procedure
2. Press the <MDI> key.
The MDI editor opens.

3. Press the "Load MDI" softkey.
A changeover is made into the Program Manager.

The "Load in MDI" window opens. It shows you a view of the program
manager.
4. Position the cursor to the corresponding storage location, press the
"Search" softkey and enter the required search term in the search dialog
if you wish to search for a specific file.
Note: The place holders "*" (replaces any character string) and "?" (re‐
places any character) make it easier for you to perform a search.
5. Select the program that you would like to edit or execute in the MDI win‐
dow.
The window closes and the program is ready for operation.
Grinding
4.11 MDI
4.11.3 Saving an MDA program
Procedure

3. Create the MDI program by entering the G-code commands using the
operator's keyboard.
4. Press the "Store MDI" softkey.
The "Save from MDI: Select storage location" window opens. It shows
you a view of the program manager.
5. Select the drive to which you want to save the MDI program you created,
and place the cursor on the directory in which the program is to be stored.
- OR -
Position the cursor to the required storage location, press the "Search"
softkey and enter the required search term in the search dialog if you wish
to search for a specific directory or subdirectory.
When you place the cursor on a folder, a window opens which prompts
you to assign a name.
- OR -
When you place the cursor on a program, you are asked whether the file
should be overwritten.
7. Enter the name for the rendered program and press the "OK" softkey.
The program will be saved under the specified name in the selected di‐
rectory.
Grinding
4.11 MDI
4.11.4 Editing/executing a MDI program
Procedure

3. Enter the desired G-code commands using the operator’s keyboard.
- OR -
Enter a standard cycle, e.g. CYCLE62 ().
Editing G-code commands/program blocks
4. Edit G-code commands directly in the "MDI" window.
- OR -
Select the required program block (e.g. CYCLE62) and press the <cursor
right> key, enter the required value and press "OK".
When editing a cycle, either the help screen or the graphic view can be
displayed.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The control executes the input blocks.

When executing G-code commands and standard cycles, you have the option of controlling
the sequence as follows:
● Executing the program block-by-block
● Testing the program
Settings under program control
● Setting the test-run feedrate
Settings under program control
4.11.5 Deleting an MDA program
Precondition
The MDA editor contains a program that you created in the MDI window or loaded from the
program manager.
Grinding
4.11 MDI
Procedure
Press the "Delete blocks" softkey.
The program blocks displayed in the program window are deleted.
Grinding
4.11 MDI
Grinding
Working in the manual mode 5
5.1 Overview
Always use "JOG" mode when you want to set up the machine for the execution of a program
or to carry out simple traversing movements on the machine:
● Synchronize the measuring system of the controller with the machine (reference point
approach)
● Set up the machine, i.e. activate manually-controlled motions on the machine using the
keys and handwheels provided on the machine control panel.
● You can activate manually controlled motions on the machine using the keys and
handwheels provided on the machine control panel while a part program is interrupted.
5.2 Selecting a tool and spindle
5.2.1 T,S,M window

For the preparatory actions in manual mode, tool selection and spindle control are both
performed centrally in a screen form.
In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2) for powered tools.
Your turning machine can also be equipped with a counter-spindle (S3).
In manual mode, you can select a tool on the basis of either its name or its revolver location
number. If you enter a number, a search is performed for a name first, followed by a location
number. This means that if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists,
the tool is selected from location number "5".
Note
Using the revolver location number, you can also swing around an empty space into the
machining position and then comfortably install a new tool.
Display Meaning
T Input of the tool (name or location number)
You can select a tool from the tool list using the "Select tool" softkey.
D Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9)
Grinding
Working in the manual mode
Display Meaning
DL Number for additive and setup offset
ST Sister tool (for replacement tool strategy)
Spindles 1 and 2 (e.g. S1) Spindle selection for master spindle and identification with spindle num‐
ber
Spindle M function
Spindle off: Spindle is stopped
CCW rotation: Spindle rotates counterclockwise
CW rotation: Spindle rotates clockwise
Spindle positioning: Spindle is moved to the desired position.

Other M functions Input of machine functions
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between
the meaning and number of the function.
G zero offset Selection of the zero offset (basic reference, G54 - 57)
You can select zero offsets from the tool list of settable zero offsets via
the "Zero offset" softkey.
Measurement unit Selection of the unit of measurement (inch, mm).
The setting made here has an effect on the programming.
Machining plane Selection of the machining plane (G17(XY), G18 (ZX), G19 (YZ))
Gear stage Specification of the gear stage (auto, I - V)
Stop position Input of the spindle position in degrees
Note
Spindle positioning
You can use this function to position the spindle at a specific angle, e.g. during a tool change.
● A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
● A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.
Grinding
5.2.2 Selecting a tool
Procedure
1. Select the "JOG" operating mode.
2. Press the "T, S, M" softkey.
- OR -
3. Enter the name or the number of the tool T.

- OR -
Press the "Select tool" softkey to open the tool list, position the cursor on
the desired tool and press the "In Manual" softkey.
The tool is transferred to the "T, S, M... window" and displayed in the field
of tool parameter "T".
4. Select tool edge D or enter the number directly in field "D".

5. Press the "CYCLE START" key.
The tool is loaded into the spindle.
5.2.3 Starting and stopping the spindle manually
Procedure
1. Select the "T,S,M" softkey in the "JOG" mode.
- OR -
2. Select the desired spindle (e.g. S1) and enter the desired spindle speed
or cutting speed in the right-hand entry field.
3. If the machine has a gearbox for the spindle, set the gearing step.
Grinding
4 Select a spindle direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) in

the "Spindle M function" field.

The spindle rotates.
6. Select the "Stop" setting in the "Spindle M function" field.
Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The spindle stops.
Note
Changing the spindle speed
If you enter the speed in the "Spindle" field while the spindle is rotating, the new speed is
applied.
5.2.4 Positioning the spindle
Procedure
1. Select the "T,S,M" softkey in the "JOG" mode.
- OR -
2. Select the "Stop Pos." setting in the "Spindle M function" field.

The "Stop Pos." entry field appears.
3. Enter the desired spindle stop position.
The spindle position is specified in degrees.
The spindle is moved to the desired position.
Note
● A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.
Grinding
5.3 Traversing axes
5.3 Traversing axes
5.3.1 Traversing the axes

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment or Axis keys or handwheels.
During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves at the programmed
setup feedrate. During an incremental traverse, the selected axis traverses a specified
increment.
Set the default feedrate

Specify the feedrate to be used for axis traversal in the set-up, in the "Settings for Manual
Operation" window.
5.3.2 Traverse axes by a defined increment

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis keys or handwheels.
Procedure
3. Press keys 1, 10, etc. up to 10000 in order to move the axis in a defined
increment.
The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in micrometers or
microinches.
Example: Press the "100" button for a desired increment of 100 μm (=
0.1 mm).
;

5. Press the <+> or <-> key.
Each time you press the key the selected axis is traversed by the defined
increment.
Feedrate and rapid traverse override switches can be operative.
Grinding
5.4 Positioning axes
Note
When the controller is switched on, the axes can be traversed right up to the limits of the
machine as the reference points have not yet been approached and the axes referenced.
Emergency limit switches might be triggered as a result.
The software limit switches and the working area limitation are not yet operative!
The feed enable signal must be set.
5.3.3 Traversing axes by a variable increment
Procedure
Press the <JOG> key.
2. Press the "Settings" softkey.

The "Settings for Manual Operation" window is opened.
3. Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter.
Example: Enter 500 for a desired increment of 500 μm (0.5 mm).
4. Press the <Inc VAR> key.

6. Press the <+> or <-> key.
Each time you press the key the selected axis is traversed by the set
increment.
Feedrate and rapid traverse override switches can be operative.
5.4 Positioning axes

In order to implement simple machining sequences, you can traverse the axes to certain
positions in manual mode.
Grinding
5.5 Default settings for manual mode
The feedrate / rapid traverse override is active during traversing.
Procedure
1. If required, select a tool.

3. Press the "Positions" softkey.
4. Enter the target position or target angle for the axis or axes to be traversed.
5. Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.
- OR -
Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey.
The rapid traverse is displayed in field "F".
The axis is traversed to the specified target position.
If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed
simultaneously.

Specify the configurations for manual mode in the "Settings for manual operation" window.
Presettings
Settings Description
Type of feedrate Here, you select the type of feedrate.
● G94: Axis feedrate/linear feedrate
● G95: Rev. feedrate
Default feedrate G94 Enter the desired feedrate in mm/min.
Default feedrate G95 Enter the desired feedrate in mm/r.
Variable increment Enter the desired increment for axis traversal by variable increments.
Spindle speed Enter the desired spindle speed in rpm.
Grinding
Proceed as follows

The "Settings for manual operation" window is opened.
See also
Switching the unit of measurement (Page 70)
Grinding
Machining the workpiece 6
6.1 Starting and stopping machining
During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in accordance with the programming
on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is
performed automatically.
Preconditions
The following requirements must be met before executing a program:
● The measuring system of the controller is referenced with the machine.
● The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered.
● The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine manufacturer are activated.
General sequence
1. Use the Program manager to select the desired program.
2. Select under "NC", "Local. Drive", "USB" or set-up network drives the
desired program.
3. Press the "Select" softkey.

The program is selected for execution and automatically switched to the
"Machine" operating area.
The program is started and executed.
Note
Starting the program in any operating area
If the controller is in "AUTO" mode, you can also start the selected program when you are in
any operating area.
Grinding
Machining the workpiece
6.2 Selecting a program
Stopping machining
Press the <CYCLE STOP> key.

Machining stops immediately. Individual program blocks are not
executed to the end. On the next start, machining is resumed
from the point where it left off.
Canceling machining
Press the <RESET> key.

Execution of the program is interrupted. On the next start, machining will
start from the beginning.
6.2 Selecting a program
Procedure
1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

The directory overview is opened.
2. Select the location where the program is archived (e.g. "NC")

3. Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want
to select.
4. Press the <INPUT> key
- OR -
Press the <Cursor right> key.
The directory contents are displayed.

5. Place the cursor on the desired program.
The program is selected.
When the program has been successfully selected, an automatic change‐
over to the "Machine" operating area occurs.
Grinding
6.3 Executing a trial program run
6.3 Executing a trial program run

When testing a program, the system can interrupt the machining of the workpiece after each
program block, which triggers a movement or auxiliary function on the machine. In this way,
you can control the machining result block-by-block during the initial execution of a program
on the machine.
Note
Settings for the automatic mode
Rapid traverse reduction and dry run feed rate are available to run-in or to test a program.
Move by single block

In "Program control" you may select from among several types of block processing:
SB mode Scope
SB1 Single block, The machining stops after every machine block (except for cycles)
coarse
SB2 Data block The machining stops after every block, i.e. also for data blocks (except for cy‐
cles)
SB3 Single block, The machining stops after every machine block (also in cycles)
fine
Precondition
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" or "MDA" mode.
Procedure
1. Press the "Prog. ctrl." softkey and select the desired variant in the "SBL"
field.
2. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key.

Depending on the execution variant, the first block will be executed. Then
the machining stops.
In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended"
appears.
Depending on the mode, the program will continue executing until the
next stop.
Grinding
6.4 Displaying the current program block
5. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key again, if the machining is not supposed
to run block-by-block.
The key is deselected again.
If you now press the <CYCLE START> key again, the program is execu‐
ted to the end without interruption.
6.4.1 Current block display

The window of the current block display shows the program blocks currently being executed.
Display of current program

The following information is displayed in the running program:
● The workpiece name or program name is entered in the header line.
● The program block which is just being processed appears colored.
Display of the machining times

If you set that the machining times are to be recorded in the settings for automatic mode, the
measured times are shown at the end of the line as follows:
Display Meaning
Grinding
Highlighting of selected G code commands or keywords

In the program editor settings, you can specify whether selected G code commands are to be
highlighted in color. The following colors are used as standard:
Display Meaning
Blue font D, S, F, T, M and H functions
Red font "G0" motion command
Green font "G1" motion command
Blue-green font "G2" or "G3" motion command
Gray font Comment
You can define further highlight colors in the "sleditorwidget.ini" configuration file.
Editing a program directly

In the Reset state, you can edit the current program directly.
1. Press the <INSERT> key.
2. Place the cursor at the relevant position and edit the program block.
Direct editing is only possible for G code blocks in the NC memory, not
for external execution.
3. Press the <INSERT> key to exit the program and the edit mode again.
See also
Settings for the automatic mode (Page 166)
Grinding
6.4.2 Displaying a basic block

If you want precise information about axis positions and important G functions during testing
or program execution, you can call up the basic block display. This is how you can check, when
using cycles, for example, whether the machine is actually traversing.
Positions programmed by means of variables or R parameters are resolved in the basic block
display and replaced by the variable value.
You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when machining the workpiece on
the machine. All G code commands that initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the
"Basic Blocks" window for the currently active program block:
● Absolute axis positions
● G functions for the first G group
● Other modal G functions
● Other programmed addresses
● M functions
Procedure
1. A program is selected for execution and has been opened in the "Ma‐
chine" operating area.
2. Press the "Basic blocks" softkey.
The "Basic Blocks" window opens.
3. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key if you wish to execute the program
block-by-block.
4. Press the <CYCLE START> key to start the program execution.

The axis positions to be approached, modal G functions, etc., are dis‐
played in the "Basic Blocks" window for the currently active program block.
5. Press the "Basic blocks" softkey once again to hide the window again.
6.4.3 Display program level

You can display the current program level during the execution of a large program with several
subprograms.
Several program run throughs

If you have programmed several program run throughs, i.e. subprograms are run through
several times one after the other by specifying the additional parameter P, then during
processing, the program runs still to be executed are displayed in the "Program Levels"
window.
Grinding
6.5 Correcting a program
Program example
N10 subprogram P25
If, in at least one program level, a program is run through several times, a horizontal scroll bar
is displayed that allows the run through counter P to be viewed in the righthand window section.
The scroll bar disappears if multiple run-through is no longer applicable.
Display of program level

The following information will be displayed:
● Level number
● Program name
● Block number, or line number
● Remain program run throughs (only for several program run throughs)
Precondition
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" mode.
Procedure
Press the "Program levels" softkey.

The "Program levels" window appears.
6.5 Correcting a program

As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the controller, program execution
is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the alarm line.
Correction possibilities
Depending on the state of the control system, you can make the following corrections using
the Program editing function.
● Stop mode
Only program lines that have not yet been executed can be edited.
● Reset mode
All program lines can be edited.
Note
The "program correction" function is also available for execute from external; however,
when making program changes, the NC channel must be brought into the reset state.
Grinding
6.6 Repositioning axes
Requirement
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" mode.
Procedure
1. The program to be corrected is in the Stop or Reset mode.

2. Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey
The program is opened in the editor.
The program preprocessing and the current block are displayed. The
current block is also updated in the running program, but not the displayed
program section, i.e. the current block moves out of the displayed pro‐
gram section.
If a subprogram is executed, it is not opened automatically.
3. Make the necessary corrections.
4. Press the "NC Execute" softkey.
The system switches back to the "Machine" operating area and selects
"AUTO" mode.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key to resume program execution.
Note
Exit the editor using the "Close" softkey to return to the "Program manager" operating area.
6.6 Repositioning axes

After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool breaks) you can move the tool
away from the contour in manual mode.
The coordinates of the interrupt position will be saved. The distances traversed in manual
mode are displayed in the actual value window. This path difference is called "Repos-offset".
Resuming program execution

Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in order to continue executing
the program.
You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the control system.
Grinding
6.7 Starting execution at a specific point
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect.
NOTICE
Risk of collision
When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate and linear interpolation,
i.e. in a straight line from the current position to the interrupt point. Therefore, you must first
move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions.
If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the axes in manual mode after
a program interrupt, the control automatically moves the axes during the switch to automatic
mode and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line back to the point
of interruption.
Precondition
The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes:
● The program execution was interrupted using <CYCLE STOP>.
● The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in manual mode.
Procedure
1. Press the <REPOS> key.
2. Select the axes to be traversed one after the other.

;

3. Press the <+> or <-> key for the relevant direction.
The axes are moved to the interrupt position.
6.7.1 Use block search

If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the machine, then you need
not start the program from the beginning. You can also start the program from a specified
program block.
Grinding
Applications
● Stopping or interrupting program execution
● Specify a target position, e.g. during remachining
Determining a search target

● User-friendly search target definition (search positions)
– Direct specification of the search target by positioning the cursor in the selected program
(main program)
– Search target via text search
– The search target is the interruption point (main program and subprogram)
The function is only available if there is an interruption point. After a program interruption
(CYCLE STOP, RESET or power off), the controller saves the coordinates of the
interruption point.
– The search target is the higher program level of the interruption point (main program
and subprogram)
The level can only be changed if it was previously possible to select an interruption point
in a subprogram. It is then possible to change the program level up to the main program
level and back to the level of the interruption point.
● Search pointer
– Direct entry of the program path
Note
You can search for a specific point in subprograms with the search pointer if there is no
interruption point.
Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the "Search pointer"
function (only for 828D).
Cascaded search
You can start another search from the "Search target found" state. The cascading can be
continued any number of times after every search target found.
Note
Another cascaded block search can be started from the stopped program execution only if the
search target has been found.
References
Function Manual Basic Functions; Block Search
Grinding
Preconditions
● You have selected the desired program.
● The controller is in the reset state.
● The desired search mode is selected.
NOTICE
Risk of collision
Pay attention to a collision-free start position and appropriate active tools and other
technological values.
If necessary, manually approach a collision-free start position. Select the target block
considering the selected block search type.
Toggling between search pointer and search positions
Press the "Search pointer" softkey again to exit the "Search Pointer" win‐
dow and return to the "Program" window to define search positions.
- OR -
Press the "Back" softkey.
You have now exited the block search function.
6.7.2 Continuing program from search target

To continue the program at the desired position, press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
● The first CYCLE START outputs the auxiliary functions collected during the search. The
program is then in the Stop state.
● Before the second CYCLE START, you can use the "Overstore" function to create states
that are required, but not yet available, for the further program execution.
By changing to the JOG REPOS mode, you can also manually traverse the tool from the
current position to the setpoint position, if the setpoint position is not to be automatically
approached after the program start
6.7.3 Simple search target definition
Requirement
The program is selected and the controller is in Reset mode.
Grinding
Procedure
1. Press the "Block search" softkey.
2. Place the cursor on a particular program block.

- OR -
Press the "Find text" softkey, select the search direction, enter the
search text and confirm with "OK".
3. Press the "Start search" softkey.
The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into ac‐
count.
The current block will be displayed in the "Program" window as soon
as the target is found.
4. If the located target (for example, when searching via text) does not
correspond to the program block, press the "Start search" softkey again
until you find your target.
Press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
Processing is continued from the defined position.
6.7.4 Defining an interruption point as search target
Requirement
A program was selected in "AUTO" mode and interrupted during execution through CYCLE
STOP or RESET.
Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option (only for 828D).
Procedure
1. Press the "Block search" softkey.
2. Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.

The interruption point is loaded.
Grinding
3. If the "Higher level" and "Lower level" softkeys are available, use these
to change the program level.
4. Press the "Start search" softkey.
The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into account.
The search screen closes.
The current block will be displayed in the "Program" window as soon as
the target is found.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
The execution will continue from the interruption point.
6.7.5 Parameters for block search in the search pointer
Parameter Meaning
Number of program level
Program: The name of the main program is automatically entered
Ext: File extension
P: Number of subprogram repetitions
If a subprogram is performed several times, you can enter the number of the
pass here at which processing is to be continued
Line: Is automatically filled for an interruption point
Type " " search target is ignored on this level
N no. Block number
Label Jump label
Text string
Subprg. Subprogram call
Line Line number
Search target Point in the program at which machining is to start
6.7.6 Block search mode

Set the desired search variant in the "Search Mode" window.
The set mode is retained when the the controller is shut down. When you activate the "Search"
function after restarting the controller, the current search mode is displayed in the title row.
Grinding
Search variants
Block search mode Meaning

With calculation It is used in order to be able to approach a target position in any circumstance
- without approach (e.g. tool change position).
The end position of the target block or the next programmed position is ap‐
proached using the type of interpolation valid in the target block. Only the
axes programmed in the target block are moved.
Note:
If machine data 11450.1=1 is set, the rotary axes of the active swivel data
record are pre-positioned after the block search.
With calculation It is used to be able to approach the contour in any circumstance.
- with approach The end position of the block prior to the target block is found with <CYCLE
START>. The program runs in the same way as in normal program process‐
ing.
With calculation This is used to speed-up a search with calculation when using EXTCALL
- skip extcall programs: EXTCALL programs are not taken into account.
Notice: Important information, e.g. modal functions, which are located in the
EXTCALL program, are not taken into account. In this case, after the search
target has been found, the program is not able to be executed. Information
such as this should be programmed in the main program.
Without calculation For a quick search in the main program.
Calculations will not be performed during the block search, i.e. the calculation
is skipped up to the target block.
All settings required for execution have to be programmed from the target
block (e.g. feedrate, spindle speed, etc.).
With program test Multi-channel block search with calculation (SERUPRO).
All blocks are calculated during the block search. Absolutely no axis motion
is executed, however, all auxiliary functions are output.
The NC starts the selected program in the program test mode. If the NC
reaches the specified target block in the actual channel, it stops at the begin‐
ning of the target block and deselects program test mode again. After con‐
tinuing the program with NC start (after REPOS motion) the auxiliary func‐
tions of the target block are output.
For single-channel systems, the coordination is supported with events run‐
ning in parallel, e.g. synchronized actions.
Note
The search speed depends on MD settings.
References
Grinding
6.8 Controlling the program run
6.8.1 Program control

You can change the program sequence in the "AUTO" and "MDI" modes.
Abbreviation/program con‐ Mode of operation

trol
PRT The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this
No axis motion mode, the axes are not traversed.
The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way.
Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry run
feedrate".
DRY The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced
Dry run feedrate by a defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also applies instead of the programmed
revolutional feedrate.
Caution: Workpieces must not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active because the
altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the work‐
piece or machine tool could be damaged.
RG0 In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage value
Reduced rapid traverse entered in RG0.
Note: You define the reduced rapid traverse in the settings for automatic operation.
M01 The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function M01 is
Programmed stop 1 programmed. In this way you can check the already obtained result during the processing of a
workpiece.
Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the <CYCLE START> key again.
Programmed stop 2 The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed
(e.g. M101) (e.g. with M101).
Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the <CYCLE START> key again.
Note: The display can be changed. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
DRF Enables an additional incremental work offset while processing in automatic mode with an
Handwheel offset electronic handwheel.
This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block.
Note: You require the "Extended operator functions" option to use the handwheel offset (for
828D).
SB Individual blocks are configured as follows.
Single block, coarse: The program stops only after blocks which perform a machine function.
Data block: The program stops after each block.
Single block, fine: The program also stops only after blocks which perform a machine function
in cycles.
Select the desired setting using the <SELECT> key.
SKP Skip blocks are skipped during machining.
GCC When executing a jobshop program, it is converted into a G-code program.
MRD In the program, the measurement results screen display is activated while machining.
Grinding
Activating program control

You can control the program sequence however you wish by selecting and clearing the relevant
checkboxes.
Display / response of active program controls

If a program control is activated, the abbreviation of the corresponding function appears in the
status display as response.
Procedure
2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDI> key.
3. Press the "Prog. ctrl.” softkey.

The "Program Control" window opens.
6.8.2 Skip blocks

It is possible to skip program blocks, which are not to be executed every time the program
runs.
The skip blocks are identified by placing a "/" (forward slash) or "/x (x = number of skip level)
character in front of the block number. Several consecutive blocks can also be skipped.
The statements in the skipped blocks are not executed, i.e. the program continues with the
next block, which is not skipped.
The number of skip levels that can be used depends on a machine datum.
Software option
In order to have more than two skip levels, for 828D you require the "Extended
operator functions" option.
Grinding
6.9 Overstore
Skip levels, activate

Select the corresponding checkbox to activate the desired skip level.
Note
The "Program Control - Skip Blocks" window is only available when more than one skip level
is set up.
Procedure
2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.
3 Press the "Prog. ctrl." and "Skip blocks" softkeys.

The "Program Control" window appears and shows a list of skip levels.
6.9 Overstore
With overstore, you have the option of executing technological parameters (for example,
auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) before the
program is actually started. The program instructions act as if they are located in a normal part
program. These program instructions are, however, only valid for one program run. The part
program is not permanently changed. When next started, the program will be executed as
originally programmed.
Grinding
6.9 Overstore
After a block search, the machine can be brought into another state with overstore (e.g. M
function, tool, feed, speed, axis positions etc.), in which the normal part program can be
successfully continued.
Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the overstore function
(for 828D).
Precondition
The program to be corrected is in the Stop or Reset mode.
Procedure
1. Open the program in the "AUTO" mode.
2. Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window opens.
3. Enter the required data and NC block.
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in
the "Overstore" window.
After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks
again.
You cannot change the operating mode while you are in overstore mode.
5. Press the "Back" softkey.
The "Overstore" window closes.
6. Press the <CYCLE START> key again.
The program selected before overstoring continues to run.
Note
Block-by-block execution
The <SINGLE BLOCK> key is also active in the overstore mode. If several blocks are entered
in the overstore buffer, then these are executed block-by-block after each NC start
Grinding
6.10 Editing a program
Deleting blocks
Press the "Delete blocks" softkey to delete program blocks you have en‐
tered.
6.10.1 Processing a program (editor)

With the editor, you are able to render, supplement, or change part programs.
Note
Maximum block length
The maximum block length is 512 characters.
Calling the editor

● The editor is started via the "Program correction" softkey in the "Machine" operating area.
You can directly change the program by pressing the <INSERT> key.
● The editor is called via the "Open" softkey as well as with the <INPUT> or <Cursor right>
key in the "Program manager" operating area.
● The editor opens in the "Program" operating area with the last executed part program, if
this was not explicitly exited via the "Close" softkey.
Note
● Please note that the changes to programs saved in the NC memory take immediate
effect.
● If you are editing on a local drive or external drives, you can also exit the editor without
saving, depending on the setting. Programs in the NC memory are always automatically
saved.
● Exit the program correction mode using the "Close" softkey to return to the "Program
manager" operating area.
6.10.2 Searching in programs

You can use the search function to quickly arrive at points where you would like to make
changes, e.g. in very large programs.
Various search options are available that enable selective searching.
Grinding
Search options
● Whole words
Activate this option and enter a search term if you want to search for texts/terms that are
present as words in precisely this form.
If, for example, you enter the search term "Finishing tool", only single "Finishing tool" terms
are displayed. Word combinations such as "Finishing tool_10" are not found.
● Exact expression
Activate this option if you wish to search for terms with characters, which can also be used
as place holders for other characters, e.g. "?" and "*".
Note
Search with place holders
When searching for specific program locations, you have the option of using place holders:
● "*": Replaces any character string
● "?": Replaces any character
Precondition
The desired program is opened in the editor.
Procedure

The "Search" window opens at the same time.
2. Enter the desired search term in the "Text" field.
3. Select "Whole words" if you want to search for whole words only.
- OR -
Activate the "Exact expression" checkbox if, for example, you want to
search for place holders ("*", "?") in program lines.
4. Position the cursor in the "Direction" field and choose the search direction
(forward, backward) with the <SELECT> key.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.
If the text you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is high‐
lighted.
6. Press the "Continue search" softkey if the text located during the search
does not correspond to the point you are looking for.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey when you want to cancel the search.
Grinding
Further search options
Softkey Function
The cursor is set to the first character in the program.
The cursor is set to the last character in the program.
6.10.3 Replacing program text

You can find and replace text in one step.
Precondition
The desired program is opened in the editor.
Procedure

2. Press the "Find and replace" softkey.
The "Find and Replace" window appears.
3. In the "Text" field, enter the term you are looking for and in the "Replace
with" field, enter the text you would like to insert automatically during the
search.
4. Position the cursor in the "Direction" field and choose the search direction
(forward, backward) with the <SELECT> key.

If the text you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is high‐
lighted.
6. Press the "Replace" softkey to replace the text.
- OR -
Press the "Replace all" softkey to replace all text in the file that corre‐
sponds to the search term.
- OR -
Press the "Continue search" softkey if the text located during the search
should not be replaced.
- OR -
Grinding
Note
Replacing texts
● Read-only lines (;*RO*)
If hits are found, the texts are not replaced.
● Contour lines (;*GP*)
If hits are found, the texts are replaced as long as the lines are not read-only.
● Hidden lines (;*HD*)
If hidden lines are displayed in the editor and hits are found, the texts are replaced as long
as the lines are not read-only. Hidden lines that are not displayed, are not replaced.
6.10.4 Copying/pasting/deleting program blocks
Precondition
Procedure
1. Press the "Mark" softkey.
- OR -
Press the <SELECT> key.
2. Select the desired program blocks with the cursor or mouse.

3. Press the "Copy" softkey in order to copy the selection to the buffer mem‐
ory.
4. Place the cursor on the desired insertion point in the program and press
the "Paste" softkey.
The content of the buffer memory is pasted.
- OR -
Press the "Cut" softkey to delete the selected program blocks and to copy
them into the buffer memory.
Note: When editing a program, you cannot copy or cut more than 1024
lines. While a program that is not on the NC is opened (progress display
less than 100%), you cannot copy or cut more than 10 lines or insert more
than 1024 characters.
Numbering the program blocks
Grinding
If you have selected the "Automatic numbering" option for the editor, then
the newly added program blocks are allocated a block number (N num‐
ber).
The following rules apply:
● When creating a new program, the first line is allocated the "first block
number".
● If, up until now, the program had no N number, then the program block
inserted is allocated the starting block number defined in the "First
block number" input field.
● If N numbers already exist before and after the insertion point of a new
program block, then the N number before the insertion point is
incremented by 1.
● If there are no N numbers before or after the insertion point, then the
maximum N number in the program is increased by the "increment"
defined in the settings.
Note:
After exiting the program, you have the option of renumbering the pro‐
gram blocks.
Note
The buffer memory contents are retained even after the editor is closed, enabling you to paste
the contents in another program.
Note
Copy/cut current line
To copy and cut the current line where the cursor is positioned, it is not necessary to mark or
select it. You have the option of making the "Cut" softkey only operable for marked program
sections via editor settings.
6.10.5 Renumbering a program

You can modify the block numbering of programs opened in the editor at a later point in time.
Precondition
Procedure
1. Press the ">>" softkey.

2. Press the "Renumber" softkey.
The "Renumbering" window appears.
Grinding
3. Enter the values for the first block number and the increment to be used
for numbering.
The program is renumbered.
Note
● If you only want to renumber a section, before the function call, select the program blocks
whose block numbering you want to edit.
● When you enter a value of "0" for the increment size, then all of the existing block numbers
are deleted from the program and/or from the selected range.
6.10.6 Creating a program block

In order to structure programs to achieve a higher degree of transparency, you have the option
of combining several G-code blocks to form program blocks.
Program blocks can be created in two stages. This means that you can form additional blocks
within a block (nesting).
You then have the option of opening and closing these blocks depending on your requirement.
Settings for a program block
Display Meaning
Text ● Block designation
Spindle ● Selecting the spindle
Defines at which spindle a program block is to be executed.
Addit. run-in code ● Yes
For the case that the block is not executed, as the specified spindle should
not be processed, then it is possible to temporarily activate a so-called
"Addit. run-in code".
● No
Automat. Retraction ● Yes
Block start and block end are moved to the tool change point, i.e. the tool
is brought into a safe range.
● No
Grinding
Procedure
1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.
2. Select the storage location and create a program or open a program.

The program editor opens.
3. Select the required program blocks that you wish to combine to form a
block.
4. Press the "Build block" softkey.
The "Build Block" window opens.
5. Enter a designation for the block, assign the spindle, if required, select
the additional run-in code and the automatic retraction and then press
the "OK" softkey.
Opening and closing blocks
6. Press the ">>" and "View" softkeys.
7. Press the "Open blocks" softkey if you wish to display the program with
all blocks.
8. Press the "Close blocks" softkey if you wish to display the program again
in a structured form.
Remove block
9. Open the block.
10. Position the cursor at the end of the block.
11. Press the "Remove block" softkey.
Note
You can also open and close blocks with the mouse or using the cursor keys:
● <Cursor right> opens the block where the cursor is positioned
● <Cursor left> closes the block if the cursor is positioned at the beginning or end of the block
● <ALT> and <Cursor left> closes the block if the cursor is located within the block
Note
DEF statements in program blocks or block generation in the DEF part of a part program /
cycle are not permitted.
Grinding
6.10.7 Editor settings

Enter the default settings in the "Settings" window that are to take effect automatically when
the editor is opened.
Defaults
Setting Meaning
Number automatical‐ ● Yes: A new block number will automatically be assigned after every line
ly change. In this case, the specifications provided under "First block number"
and "Increment" are applicable.
● No: No automatic numbering
First block number Specifies the starting block number of a newly created program.
The field is only visible when "Yes" is displayed under "Number automatically".
Increment Defines the increment used for the block numbers.
The field is only visible when "Yes" is displayed under "Number automatically".
Display hidden lines ● Yes: Hidden lines marked with "*HD" (hidden) will be displayed.
● No: Lines marked with ";*HD*" will not be displayed.
Note:
Only visible program lines are taken into account with the "Search" and "Search
and Replace" functions.
Display block end as The "LF" (line feed) symbol ¶ is displayed at the block end.
symbol
Line break ● Yes: Long lines are broken and wrapped around.
● No: If the program includes long lines, then a horizontal scrollbar is
displayed. You can move the section of the screen horizontally to the end
of the line.
Line break also in ● Yes: If the line of a cycle call becomes too long, then it is displayed over
standard cycles several lines.
● No: The cycle call is truncated.
The field is only visible when "Yes" is displayed under "Line break".
Visible programs ● 1 - 10
Select how many programs can be displayed next to one another in the
editor.
● Auto
Specifies that the number of programs entered in a job list or up to ten
selected programs will be displayed next to each other.
Width of the program Here, you enter the width of the program that has the input focus in the editor
with focus as a percentage of the window width.
Automatic save (only ● Yes: The changes are saved automatically when you change to another
local and external operating area.
drives)
● No: You are prompted to save when changing to another operating area.
Save or reject the changes with the "Yes" and "No" softkeys.
Grinding
Setting Meaning
Cut only after select‐ ● Yes: The cutting of program sections is possible only when program lines
ing have been selected, i.e. the "Cut" softkey only then is active.
● No: The program line, in which the cursor is positioned, can be cut out
without having to select it.
Determine machin‐ Defines which program runtimes are determined in the simulation:
ing times ● Off
● Block-by-block: The runtimes are determined for each program block.
● Non-modal: The runtimes are determined at the NC block level.
After the simulation, the required machining times are displayed in the editor.
Saving machining Specifies how the machining times determined are processed.
times ● Yes
A subdirectory with the name "GEN_DATA.WPD" is created in the directory
of the part program. There, the machining times determined are saved in
an ini file together with the name of the program.
● No
The machining times that have been determined are only displayed in the
editor.
Display cycles as ma‐ ● Yes: The cycle calls in the G code programs are displayed as plain text.
chining step ● No: The cycle calls in the G code programs are displayed in the NC syntax.
Highlight selected G Defines the display of G code commands.
code commands ● No
All G code commands are displayed in the standard color.
● Yes
Selected G code commands or keywords are highlighted in color. Define
the rules for the color assignment in the sleditorwidget.ini configuration file.
Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
Note
This setting also has an effect on the current block display.
Font size Defines the font size for the editor and the display of the program sequence.
Note
This setting also has an effect on the current block display.
Note
All entries that you make here are effective immediately.
Requirement
You have opened a program in the editor.
Grinding
6.11 Working with DXF files
Procedure
1. Select the "Program" operating area.
Press the "Edit" softkey.
2. Press the ">>" and "Settings" softkeys.

The "Settings" window opens.
3. Make the desired changes and press the "OK" softkey to confirm your
settings.
6.11.1 Overview
The "DXF-Reader" function allows you to open files created in SINUMERIK Operate directly
in a CAD system and accept and store contours directly in G-code.
The DXF file can be displayed in the Program Manager.
Software option
You require the "DXF-Reader" software option in order to use this function.
Grinding
6.11.2 Displaying CAD drawings
6.11.2.1 Open a DXF file
Procedure
2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the DFX
file that you want to display.
3. Press the "Open" softkey.
The selected CAD drawing will be displayed with all its layers, i.e. with all
graphic levels.
4. Press the "Close" softkey to close the CAD drawing and to return to the
Program Manager.
6.11.2.2 Cleaning a DXF file

All contained layers are shown when a DXF file is opened.
Layers that do not contain any contour- or position-relevant data can be shown or hidden.
Procedure
1. The DXF file is opened in the Program Manager or in the editor.

2. Press the "Clean" and "Layer selection" softkeys if you want to hide spe‐
cific layers.
The "Layer Selection" window opens.
3. Deactivate the required layers and press the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
Grinding
6. Press the "Clean automat." softkey to hide all non-relevant layers.
7. Press the "Clean automat." softkey to redisplay the layers.
6.11.2.3 Enlarging or reducing the CAD drawing
Precondition
The DXF file is opened in the Program Manager.
Procedure
Press the "Details" and "Zoom +" softkeys if you wish to enlarge the size
of the segment.
- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Zoom -" softkeys if you wish to reduce the size of
the segment.
- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Auto zoom" softkeys if you wish to automatically
adapt the segment to the size of the window.
6.11.2.4 Modifying the section

If you want to move or change the size of a section of the drawing, for example, to view details
or redisplay the complete drawing later, use the magnifying glass.
You can use the magnifying glass to determine the section and then change its size.
Precondition
The DXF file is opened in the Program Manager or in the editor.
Grinding
Procedure
1. Press the "Details" and "Magnifying glass" softkeys.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.
2. Press the <+> key to enlarge the frame.

- OR -
Press the <-> key to reduce the frame.
- OR -
Press a cursor key to move the frame up, down, left or right.
3. Press the "OK" softkey to accept the section.
6.11.2.5 Rotating the view

You can change the orientation of the drawing.
Precondition
Procedure
1. Press the "Details" and "Rotate figure" softkeys.
2. Press the "Arrow right", "Arrow left", "Arrow up", "Arrow down", "Arrow
clockwise" and "Arrow counter-clockwise" softkeys to change the position
... of the drawing.
Grinding
6.11.2.6 Displaying/editing information for the geometric data
Precondition
Procedure
1. Press the "Details" and "Geometry info" softkeys.

The cursor takes the form of a question mark.
2. Position the cursor on the element for which you want to display its geo‐
metric data and press the "Element info" softkey.
If, for example, you have selected a straight line, the following window
opens, "Straight line on layer: ...". You are shown the coordinates appro‐
priate for the current zero point in the selected layer: Start point for X and
Y, end point for X and Y as well as the length.
4. If you are currently in the editor, press the "Element edit" softkey.
The coordinate values can be edited.
3. Press the "Back" softkey to close the display window.
Note
Editing a geometric element
You can use this function to make smaller changes to the geometry, e.g. for missing
intersections.
You should make larger changes in the input screen of the editor.
Changes that you make with "Element edit" cannot be undone.
6.11.3 Importing and editing a DXF file
6.11.3.1 General procedure

● Creating/opening a G code program
● Call the "Contour" cycle and create a "New contour"
● Import the DXF file
● Select the contour in the DXF file or CAD drawing and click "OK" to accept the cycle
● Add program record with "Accept" to the G code program
Grinding
6.11.3.2 Setting the tolerance

To allow even inaccurately created drawings to be used, i.e. to compensate for gaps in the
geometry, you can enter a snap radius in millimeters. This relates elements.
Note
Large snap radius
The larger that the snap radius is set, the larger the number of available following elements.
Procedure
1. The DXF file is opened in the editor.

2. Press the "Details" and "Tolerance" softkeys.
The "Tolerance Input" window opens.
3. Enter the desired value and press the "OK" softkey.
6.11.3.3 Specifying a reference point

Because the zero point of the DXF file normally differs from the zero point of the CAD drawing,
specify a reference point.
Procedure
1. The DXF file is opened in the editor.

2. Press the ">>" and "Specify reference point" softkeys.
3. Press the "Element start" softkey to place the zero point at the start of the
selected element.
- OR -
Press the "Element center" softkey to place the zero point at the center
of the selected element.
- OR -
Press the "Element end" softkey to place the zero point at the end of the
selected element.
- OR -
Press the "Arc center" softkey to place the zero point at the center of an
arc.
- OR -
Grinding
Press the "Cursor" softkey to define the zero point at any cursor position.
- OR -
Press the "Free input" softkey to open the "Reference Point Input" window
and enter the values for the positions (X, Y) there.
6.11.3.4 Accepting contours
Procedure
1. The part program to be processed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Contour" softkey.
3. Press the "New contour" softkey.
Select contour
The start and end point are specified for the contour line.
The start point and the direction are selected on a selected element. Beginning at the start
point, the automatic contour line takes all subsequent elements of a contour until there are no
following elements or intersections with other elements.
Note
If a contour includes more elements than can be processed, you will be offered the option of
transferring the contour to the program as pure G code.
This contour then can no longer be edited in the editor.
Procedure
Opening a DXF file

1. Enter the desired name in the "New Contour" window.
2. Press the "From DXF file" and "Accept" softkeys.
The "Open DXF File" window opens.
3. Select a storage location and place the cursor on the relevant DXF file.
You can, for example, use the search function to search directly for a DXF
file in comprehensive folders and directories.
The CAD drawing opens and can be edited for contour selection.
The cursor takes the form of a cross.
Grinding
Specifying a reference point

5. If required, specify a zero point.
Contour line
6. Press the ">>" and "Automatic" softkeys if you want to accept the largest
possible number of contour elements.
This makes it fast to accept contours that consist of many individual ele‐
ments.
- OR -
Press "Only until first cut" if you do not want to accept the complete contour
elements at once.
The contour will be followed to the first cut of the contour element.
Defining the start point
7. Press the "Select element" softkey to select the desired element.
8. Press the "Accept element" softkey.
9. Press the "Element start point" softkey to place the contour start at the start
point of the element.
- OR -
Press the "Element end point" softkey to place the contour start at the end
point of the element.
- OR -
Press the "Element center" softkey to place the contour start at the center
of the element.
- OR -
Press the "Cursor" softkey to define the start of the element with the cursor
at any position.
9. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm your selection.
10. Press the "Accept element" softkey to accept the offered elements.
The softkey can be operated while elements are still available to be accep‐
ted.
Specifying the end point
11. Press the ">>" and "Specify end point" softkeys if you do not want to accept
the end point of the selected element.
12. Press the "Current position" softkey if you want to set the currently selected
position as end point.
- OR -
Press the "Element center" softkey to place the contour end at the center
of the element.
- OR -
Grinding
6.12 Display and edit user variables
Press the "Element center" softkey to place the contour end at the end of
the element.
- OR -
Press the "Cursor" softkey to define the start of the element with the cursor
at any position.
Transferring the contour to the cycle and to the program
The selected contour is transferred to the contour input screen of the editor.
The program record is transferred to the program.
Operation with mouse and keyboard

In addition to operation using softkeys, you can also operate the functions with the keyboard
and with the mouse.
6.12.1 Overview
The defined user data may be displayed in lists.
The following variables can be defined:
● Data parameters (R parameters)
● Global user data (GUD) is valid in all programs
● Local user variables (LUD) are valid in the program where they have been defined.
● Program-global user variables (PUD) are valid in the program in which they have been
defined, as well as in all of the subprograms called by this program
Channel-specific user data can be defined with a different value for each channel.
Entering and displaying parameter values

Up to 15 positions (including decimal places) are evaluated. If you enter a number with more
than 15 places, it will be written in exponential notation (15 places + EXXX).
LUD or PUD
Only local or program-global user data can be displayed at one time.
Whether the user data are available as LUD or PUD depends on the current control
configuration.
Grinding
Note
Reading and writing variables protected
Reading and writing of user data are protected via a keyswitch and protection levels.
Searching for user data

You may search for user data within the lists using any character string.
Refer to the "Defining and activating user data" section to learn how to edit displayed user data.
6.12.2 R parameters
R parameters (arithmetic parameters) are channel-specific variables that you can use within
a G code program. G code programs can read and write R parameters.
These values are retained after the controller is switched off.
Number of channel-specific R parameters

The number of channel-specific R parameters is defined in a machine data element.
Range: R0-R999 (dependent on machine data).
There are no gaps in the numbering within the range.
Procedure
2. Press the "User variable" softkey.
3. Press the "R variables" softkey.

The "R Parameters" window appears.
Grinding
Delete R variables
1. Press the ">>" and "Delete" softkeys.

The "Delete R parameters" window appears.
2. Enter the R parameter(s) whose channel-specific values you would like

to delete and press the "OK" softkey.
A value of 0 is assigned to the selected R parameters or to all R param‐
eters.
6.12.3 Displaying global user data (GUD)
Global user variables

Global GUDs are NC global user data (Global User Data) that remains available after switching
the machine off.
GUDs apply in all programs.
Definition
A GUD variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Range of validity NCK
● Data type (INT, REAL, ….)
● Variable names
● Value assignment (optional)
Example
DEF NCK INT ZAEHLER1 = 10
GUDs are defined in files with the ending DEF. The following file names are reserved for this
purpose:
File name Meaning

MGUD.DEF Definitions for global machine manufacturer data
UGUD.DEF Definitions for global user data
GUD4.DEF User-definable data
GUD8.DEF, GUD9.DEF User-definable data
Grinding
Procedure
3. Press the "Global GUD" softkeys.
The "Global User Variables" window is displayed. A list of the defined

UGUD variables will be displayed.
- OR -
Press the "GUD selection" softkey and the "SGUD" to "GUD6" softkeys
if you wish to display SGUD, MGUD, UGUD as well as GUD4 to GUD 6
of the global user variables.
- OR -
Press the "GUD selection" and ">>" softkeys as well as the "GUD7" to
"GUD9" softkeys if you want to display GUD 7 to GUD 9 of the global
user variables.
Note
After each start-up, a list with the defined UGUD variables is displayed in the "Global User
Variables" window.
6.12.4 Displaying channel GUDs
Channel-specific user variables

Like the GUDs, channel-specific user variables are applicable in all programs for each channel.
However, unlike GUDs, they have specific values.
Definition
A channel-specific GUD variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Range of validity CHAN
Grinding
● Data type
● Variable names
Example
DEF CHAN REAL X_POS = 100.5
Procedure
3. Press the "Channel GUD" and "GUD selection" softkeys.

4. Press the "SGUD" ... "GUD6" softkeys if you want to display the SGUD,
MGUD, UGUD as well as GUD4 to GUD 6 of the channel-specific user
variables.
- OR -
Press the "Continue" softkey and the "GUD7" to "GUD9" softkeys if you
want to display GUD 7 to GUD 9 of the channel-specific user variables.
6.12.5 Displaying local user data (LUD)
Local user variables

LUDs are only valid in the program or subprogram in which they were defined.
The controller displays the LUDs after the start of program processing. The display is available
until the end of program processing.
Grinding
Definition
A local user variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Data type
● Variable names
Procedure
3. Press the "Local LUD" softkey.
6.12.6 Displaying program user data (PUD)
Program-global user variables

PUDs are global part program variables (Program User Data). PUDs are valid in all main
programs and subprograms, where they can also be written and read.
Procedure
3. Press the "Program PUD" softkey.
Grinding
6.12.7 Searching for user variables

You can search for R parameters and user variables.
Procedure
2. Press the "R parameters", "Global GUD", "Channel GUD", "Local GUD"
or "Program PUD" softkeys to select the list in which you would like to
search for user variables.

The "Search for R Parameters" or "Search for User Variables" window
opens.
4. Enter the desired search term and press "OK".
The cursor is automatically positioned on the R parameter or user varia‐

bles you are searching for, if they exist.
By editing a DEF/MAC file, you can alter or delete existing definition/macro files or add new
ones.
Procedure
2. Press the "System data" softkey.
3. In the data tree, select the "NC data" folder and then open the "Definitions"
folder.
4. Select the file you want to edit.
5. Double-click the file.
- OR -
Press the "Open" softkey.
- OR -
- OR -
Grinding
6.13 Display G and auxiliary functions

The selected file is opened in the editor and can be edited there.
6. Define the desired user variable.
7. Press the "Exit" softkey to close the editor.
Activating user variables
1. Press the "Activate" softkey.
A prompt is displayed.
2. Select whether the current values in the definition files should be retained
- OR -
Select whether the current values in the definition files should be deleted.
This will overwrite the definition files with the initial values.
3. Press the "OK" softkey to continue the process.
6.13.1 Selected G functions

16 selected G groups are displayed in the "G Function" window.
Within a G group, the G function currently active in the controller is displayed.
Some G codes (e.g. G17, G18, G19) are immediately active after switching the machine control
on.
Which G codes are always active depends on the settings.
G groups displayed by default
Group Meaning
G group 1 Modally active motion commands (e.g. G0, G1, G2, G3)
G group 2 Non-modally active motion commands, dwell time (e.g. G4, G74, G75)
G group 3 Programmable offsets, working area limitations and pole programming (e.g.
TRANS, ROT, G25, G110)
G group 6 Plane selection (e.g. G17, G18)
G group 7 Tool radius compensation (e.g. G40, G42)
Grinding
Group Meaning
G group 8 Settable work offset (e.g. G54, G57, G500)
G group 9 Offset suppression (e.g. SUPA, G53)
G group 10 Exact stop - continuous-path mode (e.g. G60, G641)
G group 13 Workpiece dimensioning inches/metric (e.g. G70, G700)
G group 14 Workpiece dimensioning absolute/incremental (G90)
G group 15 Feedrate type (e.g. G93, G961, G972)
G group 16 Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature (e.g. CFC)
G group 21 Acceleration profile (e.g. SOFT, DRIVE)
G group 22 Tool offset types (e.g. CUT2D, CUT2DF)
G group 29 Radius/diameter programming (e.g. DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF)
G group 30 Compressor ON/OFF (e.g. COMPOF)
G groups displayed by default (ISO code)
Group Meaning
G group 1 Modally active motion commands (e.g. G0, G1, G2, G3)
G group 2 Non-modally active motion commands, dwell time (e.g. G4, G74, G75)
G group 3 Programmable offsets, working area limitations and pole programming (e.g.
TRANS, ROT, G25, G110)
G group 6 Plane selection (e.g. G17, G18)
G group 7 Tool radius compensation (e.g. G40, G42)
G group 8 Settable work offset (e.g. G54, G57, G500)
G group 9 Offset suppression (e.g. SUPA, G53)
G group 10 Exact stop - continuous-path mode (e.g. G60, G641)
G group 13 Workpiece dimensioning inches/metric (e.g. G70, G700)
G group 14 Workpiece dimensioning absolute/incremental (G90)
G group 15 Feedrate type (e.g. G93, G961, G972)
G group 16 Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature (e.g. CFC)
G group 21 Acceleration profile (e.g. SOFT, DRIVE)
G group 22 Tool offset types (e.g. CUT2D, CUT2DF)
G group 29 Radius/diameter programming (e.g. DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF)
G group 30 Compressor ON/OFF (e.g. COMPOF)
Grinding
Procedure
2. Press the <JOG>, <MDA> or <AUTO> key.
...
3. Press the "G functions" softkey.

The "G Functions" window is opened.
4. Press the "G functions" softkey again to hide the window.
The G groups selection displayed in the "G Functions" window may differ.
References
For more information about configuring the displayed G groups, refer to the following document:
6.13.2 All G functions

All G groups and their group numbers are listed in the "G Functions" window.
Within a G group, only the G function currently active in the controller is displayed.
Additional information in the footer

The following additional information is displayed in the footer:
● Actual transformations
Display Meaning
TRANSMIT Polar transformation active
TRACYL Cylinder surface transformation active
TRAORI Orientation transformation active
Grinding
Display Meaning
TRAANG Inclined axis transformation active
TRACON Cascaded transformation active
For TRACON, two transformations (TRAANG and TRACYL or TRAANG and
TRANSMIT) are activated in succession.
● Current work offsets

● Spindle speed
● Path feedrate
● Active tool
6.13.3 G functions for mold making

In the window "G functions", important information for machining free-form surfaces can be
displayed using the "High Speed Settings" function (CYCLE832).
Software option
You require the "Advanced Surface" software option in order to use this function.
High-speed cutting information

In addition to the information that is provided in the "All G functions" window, the following
programmed values of the following specific information is also displayed:
● CTOL
● OTOL
● STOLF
The tolerances for G0 are only displayed if they are active.
Particularly important G groups are highlighted.
You have the option to configure which G functions are highlighted.
References
● Additional information is available in the following references:
Function Manual, Basic Functions; Chapter, "Contour/orientation tolerance"
● For information about configuring the displayed G groups, refer to the following document:
Grinding
Procedure
1. Select the "Machine" operating area
2. Press the <JOG>, <MDI> or <AUTO> key.
3. Press the ">>" and "All G functions" softkeys.

The "G Functions" window is opened.
6.13.4 Auxiliary functions

Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the machine manufacturer,
which transfer parameters to the PLC to trigger reactions defined by the manufacturer.
Displayed auxiliary functions

Up to five current M functions and three H functions are displayed in the "Auxiliary Functions"
window.
Procedure
2. Press the <JOG>, <MDA> or <AUTO> key.
...
3. Press the "H functions" softkey.

The "Auxiliary Functions" window opens.
4. Press the "H functions" softkey again to hide the window again.
Grinding
6.15 Displaying status of synchronized actions
6.14 Displaying superimpositions

You can display handwheel axis offsets or programmed superimposed movements in the
"Superimpositions" window.
Input field Meaning

Tool Current superimposition in the tool direction
Min Minimum value for superimposition in the tool direction
Max Maximum value for superimposition in the tool direction
DRF Displays the handwheel axis offset
The selection of values displayed in the "Superimposition" window may differ.
Procedure
2. Press the <AUTO>, <MDI> or <JOG> key.
...
3. Press the ">>" and "Superimposition" softkeys.

The "Superimposition" window opens.
4. Enter the required new minimum and maximum values for superimposi‐
tion and press the "Input" key to confirm your entries.
Note: You can only change the superimposition values in "JOG" mode.
5. Press the "Superimposition" softkey again to hide the window.

You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in the "Synchronized
Actions" window.
You get a list with all currently active synchronized actions.
Grinding
In this list, the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same form as in the part
program.
References
Programming Guide Job Planning (PGA) Chapter: Motion-synchronous actions
Status of synchronized actions

You can see the status of the synchronized actions in the "Status" column.
● Waiting
● Active
● Blocked
Non-modal synchronized actions can only be identified by their status display. They are only
displayed during execution.
Synchronization types
Synchronization types Meaning

ID=n Modal synchronized actions in the automatic mode up to the end of pro‐
gram, local to program; n = 1... 254
IDS=n Static synchronized actions, modally effective in every operating type, also
beyond the end of program; n = 1... 254
Without ID/IDS Non-modal synchronized actions in automatic mode
Note
Numbers ranging from 1 to 254 can only be assigned once, irrespective of the identification
number.
Display of synchronized actions

Using softkeys, you have the option of restricting the display to activated synchronized actions.
Procedure
2. Press the <AUTO>, <MDA> or <JOG> key.
Grinding
6.16 Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces
3. Press the menu forward key and the "Synchron." softkey.

The "Synchronized Actions" window appears.
You obtain a display of all activated synchronized actions.
4. Press the "ID" softkey if you wish to hide the modal synchronized actions
in the automatic mode.
- AND / OR -
Press the "IDS" softkey if you wish to hide static synchronized actions.
- AND / OR -
Press the "Blockwise" softkey if you wish to hide the non-modal synchron‐
ized actions in the automatic mode.
5. Press the "ID", "IDS" or "Blockwise" softkeys to re-display the corre‐
sponding synchronized actions.
...

To gain an overview of the program runtime and the number of machined workpieces, open
the "Times, Counter" window.
Grinding
Displayed times
● Program
Pressing the softkey the first time shows how long the program has already been running.
At every further start of the program, the time required to run the entire program the first
time is displayed.
If the program or the feedrate is changed, the new program runtime is corrected after the
first run.
● Program remainder
Here you can see how long the current program still has to run. In addition, you can
track how much of the current program has been completed as a percentage by using the
progress bar.
The display only appears when the program is run a second time.
If you are executing the program from an external location, the program loading progress
is displayed here.
● Influencing the time measurement
The time measurement is started with the start of the program and ends with the end of the
program (M30) or with an agreed M function.
When the program is running, the time measurement is interrupted with CYCLE STOP and
continued with CYCLE START.
The time measurement starts at the beginning with RESET and subsequent CYCLE
START.
The time measurement stops with CYCLE STOP or a feedrate override = 0.
Counting workpieces
You can also display program repetitions and the number of completed workpieces. For the
worpiece count, enter the actual and planned workpiece numbers.
Workpiece count
Completed workpieces can be counted via the end of program command (M30) or an M
command.
Procedure
2. Press the <AUTO> key.
3. Press the "Times, Counter" softkey.

The "Times, Counter" window opens.
Grinding
6.17 Settings for the automatic mode
4. Select "Yes" under "Count workpieces" if you want to count completed

workpieces.
5. Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired workpieces" field.

The number of workpieces already finished is displayed in "Actual work‐
pieces". This value can be corrected if necessary.
After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current workpie‐
ces display is automatically reset to zero.

Before machining a workpiece, you can test the program in order to identify programming
errors at an early stage. Use the dry run feedrate for this purpose.
In addition, you have the option of additionally limiting the traversing speed for rapid traverse
so that when running-in a new program with rapid traverse, no undesirable high traversing
speeds occur.
Dry run feedrate

The feedrate defined here replaces the programmed feedrate during execution if you have
selected "DRY run feedrate" under program control.
Reduced rapid traverse

The value entered here reduces the rapid traverse to the entered percentage value if you
selected "RG0 reduced rapid traverse" under program control.
Recording machining times

To provide support when creating and optimizing a program, you have the option of displaying
the machining times.
You define whether the time determination function is activated while the workpiece is being
machined.
● Off
The time determination function is deactivated while machining a workpiece, i.e. the
machining times are not determined.
● Non-modal
The machining times are determined for each traversing block of a main program.
● Block-by-block
Machining times are determined for all blocks.
Note
Utilization of resources
The more machining times are displayed, the more resources are utilized.
More machining times are determined and saved with the non-modal setting as with the block-
by-block setting.
Grinding
Saving machining times

Here, you specify how the determined machining times are processed.
● Yes
A subdirectory with the name "GEN_DATA.WPD" is created in the directory of the part
program. The determined machining times are saved there in an ini file together with the
name of the program.
● No
The determined machining times are displayed only in the program block display.
Procedure

The "Settings for Automatic Operation" window opens.
4. In "DRY run feedrate," enter the desired dry run speed.

5. Enter the desired percentage in the "Reduced rapid traverse RG0" field.
RG0 has not effect if you do not change the specified amount of 100%.
6. Select the required entry in the "Record machining times" and where
relevant, in the "Save machining times" field.
See also
Current block display (Page 40)
Grinding
Grinding
Machining simultaneous recording 7
7.1 Overview
For the simultaneous recording, the traversing paths, i.e. the programmed tool paths are
displayed
Note
Tool representation for simultaneous recording
In order that workpiece simulation is also possible for tools that have either not been measured
or have been incompletely entered, certain assumptions are made regarding the tool geometry.
For instance, the length of a grinding wheel or a dressing tool is set to a value proportional to
the tool radius so that cutting can be simulated.
Display variants
You can choose between two variants of graphical display:
● Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display how the
program will be executed during the program test and dry run feedrate. The machine axes
do not move if you have selected "no axis motion".
● Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
You can follow machining of the workpiece on the screen while the program is being
executed on the machine.
Views
The following views are available for both variants:
● Top view
● Side views
Status display
The current axis coordinates, the override, the current tool with cutting edge, the current
program block, the feedrate and the machining time are displayed.
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The machining time is displayed
in hours, minutes and seconds. It is approximately equal to the time that the program requires
for processing including the tool change.
Software options
You require the option "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)" for the
"Simultaneous recording" function.
Grinding
Machining simultaneous recording
7.2 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece
Determining the program runtime

The program runtime is determined when executing the simulation. The program runtime is
displayed in the editor untíl the next program change at the end of the program.
Simultaneous recording properties
Traversing paths
For the simultaneous recording, the displayed traversing paths are saved in a ring buffer. If
this buffer is full, then the oldest traversing path is deleted with each new traversing path.
Starting position
The simultaneous recording starts at the position at which the machine is currently located.
Restrictions
● Traori: 5-axis motion is linearly interpolated. More complex motion cannot be displayed.
● Referencing: G74 from a program run does not function.
● Alarm 15110 "REORG block not possible" is not displayed.
● Compile cycles are only partly supported.
● No PLC support.
● Axis containers are not supported.
Supplementary conditions
● All of the existing data records (Toolcarrier / TRAORI, TRACYL) are evaluated and must
be correctly commissioned for correct simulation.
● Transformations with swiveled linear axis (TRAORI 64 - 69) as well as OEM transformations
(TRAORI 4096 - 4098) are not supported.
● Changes to the toolcarrier or transformation data only become effective after Power On.
● Transformation change and swivel data record change are supported. However, a real
kinematic change is not supported, where a swivel head is physically changed.
7.2 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece
7.2.1 Overview
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of
the program on the screen to monitor the result of the programming.
Software option
simultaneous recording.
Grinding
7.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate to influence the speed of
execution and select the program test to disable axis motion.
If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of the graphical display, you
can switch to the program view.
7.2.2 Starting simultaneous recording
Procedure
1. Load a program in the "AUTO" mode.

2. Press the "Prog. ctrl." softkey and activate the checkboxes "PRT no axis
movement" and "DRY run feedrate".
The program is executed without axis movement. The programmed fee‐
drate is replaced by a dry run feedrate.
3. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey.
- OR -

The program execution is displayed graphically.
5. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey again to stop the recording.
- OR -
7.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while the workpiece is being
machined, you can also track the program execution.
Software option
simultaneous recording.
Procedure
1. Load a program in the "AUTO" mode.

- OR
Grinding
7.4 Different views of a workpiece

The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed.
- OR
4. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey again to stop the recording.
Note
Display of the traversing paths
● If you switch-off simultaneous recording during machining and then switch-on the function
again at a later time, then the traversing paths generated in the intermediate time will not
be displayed.
7.4 Different views of a workpiece
7.4.1 Overview
The following views are available:
● Top view
● Side views
7.4.2 Plan view
1. Start simultaneous recording.

2. Press the "Top view" softkey.
You receive a view from the top.
Changing the display

You can enlarge or reduce the graphic and move it, as well as change the segment.
Grinding
7.5 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic
7.4.3 Side view
1. Start simultaneous recording.

2. Press the "Other views" softkey.
3. Press the "From the front" softkey if you wish to view from the front.
- OR -
Press the "From the rear" softkey if you wish to view from the rear.
- OR -
Press the "From the left" softkey if you wish to view from the left.
- OR -
Press the "From the right" softkey if you wish to view from the right.
Changing the display

You can enlarge or reduce the graphic and move it, as well as change the segment.
7.5.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation
Requirement
Simultaneous recording is started.
Procedure
1. Press the <+> and <-> keys if you wish to enlarge or reduce the graphic
display.
The graphic display is enlarged or reduced from the center.
...
- OR -
Grinding
Press the "Details" and "Zoom +" softkeys if you wish to increase the size
of the segment.
- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Zoom -" softkeys if you wish to decrease the size
of the segment.
- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Auto zoom" softkeys if you wish to automatically
adapt the segment to the size of the window.
The automatic scaling function "Fit to size" takes account of the largest
expansion of the workpiece in the individual axes.
Note
Selected section
The selected sections and size changes are kept as long as the program is selected.
7.5.2 Panning a graphical representation
Requirement
Procedure
1. Press a cursor key if you wish to move the graphic up, down, left, or right.
7.5.3 Modifying the viewport

If you would like to move, increase or decrease the size of the graphical display segment, e.g.
to view details or display the complete view, use the magnifying glass.
With the magnifying glass, you can define your own segment and then increase or decrease
its size.
Grinding
Requirement
Procedure
2. Press the "Magnifying glass" softkey.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.
3. Press the "Magnify +" or <+> softkey to enlarge the frame.
- OR -
Press the "Magnify -" or <-> softkey to reduce the frame.
- OR -
Press one of the cursor keys to move the frame up, down, left or right.
4. Press the "Accept" softkey to accept the selected segment.
Grinding
Grinding
Generating a G-code program 8
8.1 Graphical programming
Functions
The following functionality is available:
● Context-sensitive online help for every input window
● Support with contour input (geometry processor)
Call and return conditions

● The G functions active before the cycle call and the programmable frame remain active
beyond the cycle.
● The starting position must be approached in the higher-level program before the cycle is
called. The coordinates are programmed in a clockwise coordinate system.
8.2 Program views

You can display a G code program in various ways.
● Program view
● Parameter screen, either with help screen or graphic view
Note
Help screens / animations
Please note that not all the conceivable kinematics can be displayed in help screens and
animations of the cyclic support.
Grinding
Generating a G-code program
8.2 Program views
Figure 8-1 Program view of a G code program
Representation of the machining times
Representation Meaning
See also
Editor settings (Page 140)
Grinding
8.4 Basic principles
8.3 Program structure

G-code programs can always be freely programmed. The most important commands that are
normally included are:
● Set a machining plane
● Call a tool (T and D)
● Call a zero offset
● Technology values such as feedrate (F), feedrate type (G94, G95,....), speed and direction
of rotation of the spindle (S and M)
● Positions and calls, technology functions (cycles)
● End of program
For G-code programs, before calling cycles, a tool must be selected and the required
technology values F, S programmed.
A blank can be specified for simultaneous recording.
8.4 Basic principles
8.4.1 Machining planes

A plane is defined by means of two coordinate axes. The third coordinate axis (tool axis) is
perpendicular to this plane and determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2½-D
machining).
When programming, it is necessary to specify the working plane so that the control system
can calculate the tool offset values correctly. The plane is also relevant to certain types of
circular programming and polar coordinates.
=
<
=
<

*
=
;
*

;
* <

Working planes
Working planes are defined as follows:
Plane Tool axis

X/Y G17 Z
Grinding
8.5 Generating a G code program
Z/X G18 Y
Y/Z G19 X
8.4.2 Programming a tool (T)
Calling a tool
1. You are in a part program
3. Position the cursor on the desired tool and press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is loaded into the G-code editor. Text such as the fol‐
lowing is displayed at the current cursor position in the G-code editor:
T="WHEEL100"
- OR -
4. Press the "Tool list" and "New tool" softkeys.
5. Then select the required tool using the softkeys on the vertical softkey
bar, parameterize it and then press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is loaded into the G-code editor.
6. Then program the tool change (M6), the spindle direction (M3/M4), the
spindle speed (S...), the feedrate (F), the feedrate type (G94, G95,...), the
coolant (M7/M8) and, if required, further tool-specific functions.
8.5 Generating a G code program

Create a separate program for each new workpiece that you would like to produce. The
program contains the individual machining steps that must be performed to produce the
workpiece.
Part programs in the G code can be created under the "Workpieces" folder or under the "Part
programs" folder.
Procedure
2. Select the required archiving location.
Creating a new part program
Grinding
8.6 Selection of the cycles via softkey
3. Position the cursor on the folder "Part programs" and press the "New"
softkey.
The "New G Code Program" window opens.
4. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.

The name can contain up to 28 characters (name + dot + 3-character
extension). You can use any letters (except accented), digits or the un‐
derscore symbol (_).
The program type (MPF) is set by default.
The project is created and opened in the Editor.
Creating a new part program for a workpiece
5. Position the cursor on the folder "Workpieces" and press the "New" soft‐
key.
The "New G Code Program" window opens.
6. Select the file type (MPF or SPF), enter the desired name of the program
The project is created and opened in the Editor.
7. Enter the desired G code commands.
Overview of machining steps

The following softkeys are available to insert machining steps.
Grinding
Grinding
Programming technology functions 9
9.1 Programming contours
Function
The free contour programming allows you to create simple or complex contours. You define
open or closed contours.
A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements
result in a defined contour. Radii, chamfers and tangential transitions are available as contour
transition elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour
elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter
incompletely dimensioned elements.
You must always program the geometry of the contour before you program the technology.
9.1.1 Representation of the contour

G-code program
In the editor, the contour is represented in a program section using individual program blocks.
If you open an individual block, then the contour is opened.
The cycle represents a contour as a program block in the program. If you open this block, the
individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.
Symbolic representation
The individual contour elements are represented by icons adjacent to the graphics window.
They appear in the order in which they were entered.
Contour element Icon Meaning

Starting point Starting point of the contour
Straight line up Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line down Straight line in 90° grid
Straight line left Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line right Straight line in 90° grid
Grinding
Programming technology functions
Contour element Icon Meaning

Straight line in any direction Straight line with any gradient
Arc right Circle

Arc left Circle
Pole Polar coordinates
Finish contour END End of contour definition
The different colors of the icons indicate their status:
Foreground Background Meaning

Black Blue Cursor on new element
Black Orange Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated
when it is selected with the cur‐
sor)
Graphical display
The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour
elements are being entered.
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and
colors:
● Black: Programmed contour
● Orange: Current contour element
● Green dashed: Alternative element
● Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.
9.1.2 Creating a new contour
Function
You must create a new contour for each contour that you want to create.
Grinding
The contours are saved at that position in the program where they are defined.
Note
Ensure that the contours are positioned after the program end identification!
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point. Enter the contour element. The
contour processor then automatically defines the end of the contour.
If you alter the machining plane, the cycle will automatically adjust the associated starting point
axes. You can enter any additional commands (max. 40 characters) in G-code format for the
starting point.
Additional commands
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G-code
commands. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended
parameter screens ("All parameters" softkey). However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore, do not use any
G-code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G-code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
Procedure
1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Contour" and "New contour" softkeys.
The "New Contour" input window opens.
3. Enter a contour name.

The input screen for the starting point of the contour appears. You can
enter Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
Cartesian starting point
1. Select the machining plane and enter the contour starting point.
2. Enter any additional commands in G-code format, as required.
4. Enter the individual contour elements.
Grinding
Polar starting point
1. Select the machining plane and press the "Pole" softkey.
2. Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.

3. Enter the starting point for the contour in Polar coordinates.
4. Enter any additional commands in G-code format, as required.
6. Enter the individual contour elements.

PL Machining plane
Cartesian:
X Starting point X (abs) mm
Y Starting point Y (abs) mm
Polar:
X Position pole (abs) mm
Y Position pole (abs) Degrees
Starting point
L1 Distance to pole, end point (abs) mm
ϕ1 Polar angle to the pole, end point (abs) Degrees
Additional com‐ The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions
mands such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.
If you wish to avoid this, then it is possible to use additional commands when program‐
ming.
Example:
For a contour, first program the X parallel straight line and then enter "G9" (non-modal
exact stop) for the additional command parameter. Then program the Y-parallel straight
line. The corner will be machined exactly, as the feedrate at the end of the X-parallel
straight line is briefly zero.
9.1.3 Creating contour elements
After you have created a new contour and specified the starting point, you can define the
individual elements that make up the contour.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a contour:
● Straight vertical line
● Straight horizontal line
● Diagonal line
● Circle/arc
● Pole
Grinding
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate parameter screen.
The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for
the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and
Polar coordinates. If you wish to enter Polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you
have already defined a pole for the starting point, you can also refer the Polar coordinates to
this pole. Therefore, in this case, you do not have to define an additional pole.
Parameter entry
Parameter entry is supported by various help screens that explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, the geometry processor assumes that the values are unknown
and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour.
In such a case, try to enter fewer parameters and allow the geometry processor to calculate
as many parameters as possible.
Contour transition elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius or a chamfer. The
transition element is always attached at the end of a contour element. The contour transition
element is selected in the parameter screen of the respective contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two
successive elements which can be calculated from the input values. Otherwise you must use
the straight/circle contour elements.
The contour end is an exception. Although there is no intersection to another element, you can
still define a radius or a chamfer as a transition element for the blank.
If the value of the transition element is "NULL", no transition element will be parameterized.
Additional functions
The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:
● Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as tangent.
● Dialog box selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered previously, select the
desired contour.
Confirm the selection.
● Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.
Grinding
9.1.3.1 Entering a contour element

After you have created a new contour and specified the starting point, you can define the
individual elements that make up the contour.
Creating contour elements

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate parameter screen.
The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for
the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc, you can choose between Cartesian and
Polar coordinates.
If you want to enter Polar coordinates, first define a pole. If you have already defined a pole
for the starting point, the Polar coordinates can also refer to this pole. You do not require any
further pole in this case.
1. Open the part program and create a contour with the "Contour" and "New
contour" softkeys.
2. Position the cursor at the desired entry position.
3. Press one of the softkeys to create a contour element.
For a horizontal straight line, the "Straight line (e.g. X or Y)" input window
opens.
- OR -
For a vertical straight line, the "Straight line (e.g. Y or Z)" input window
opens.
- OR -
For a diagonal straight line, the "Straight line (e.g. XY or ZX)" input window
opens.
- OR -
For a circle/arc, the "Circle" input window opens.
- OR
For Polar coordinates, the "Pole input" input window opens.
4. Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the appropriate
input screens (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next
element, angle of lead, etc.).
The contour element is added to the contour.
6. When entering data for a contour element, you can program the transition
to the preceding element as a tangent.
Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey. The "tangential" selection
appears in the parameter α2 entry field.
7. Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
Grinding

The programmed contour is transferred to the program view.
9. If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.
9.1.3.2 Cylindrical grinding

X End point X (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle, e.g. to the X axis (only for information) Degrees
α2 Angle to the predecessor element (only for information) Degrees
Transition to next ele‐ Type of transition
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
Additional commands Additional G-code commands

Z End point Z (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle, e.g. to the Z axis (only for information) Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer
Contour element "Circle"

Direction of rotation
● Clockwise direction of rotation
● Counterclockwise direction of rotation

R Radius mm
e.g. X End point X (abs or inc) mm
e.g. Z End point Z (abs or inc) mm
e.g. I Circle center point I (abs or inc) mm
e.g. J Circle center point J (abs or inc) mm
Grinding

α1 Starting angle to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
β1 End angle to Z axis Degrees
β2 Opening angle Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer

X End point X (abs or inc) mm
L Length mm
α1 Starting angle, e.g. to the X axis Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer
Contour element "Pole"

X Position pole (abs) mm
Z Position pole (abs) mm
Contour element "End"

The data for the transition at the contour end of the previous contour element is displayed in
the "End" parameter screen.
The values cannot be edited.
9.1.3.3 Surface grinding

α1 Starting angle to Z axis (only for information) Degrees
Grinding

ment ● Radius
● Undercut
● Chamfer
Undercut Form E Undercut size
e.g. E1.0x0.4
Form F Undercut size
e.g. F0.6x0.3
DIN thread P Thread pitch mm/rev
α Insertion angle Degrees
Thread Z1 Length Z1 mm
Z2 Length Z2 mm
R1 Radius R1 mm
R2 Radius R2 mm
T Insertion depth mm
CA Grinding allowance mm
● Grinding allowance to right of contour
● Grinding allowance to left of contour

Y End point Y ∅ (abs or end point Y (inc)) mm
α1 Starting angle, e.g. to the Y axis (only for information) Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Undercut
● Chamfer
Undercut Form E Undercut size
e.g. E1.0x0.4
Form F Undercut size
e.g. F0.6x0.3
DIN thread P Thread pitch mm/rev
α Insertion angle Degrees
Thread Z1 Length Z1 mm
Z2 Length Z2 mm
R1 Radius R1 mm
R2 Radius R2 mm
T Insertion depth mm
Grinding


Y End point Z ∅ (abs or end point Z (inc)) mm
α1 Starting angle, e.g. to the Z axis (only for information) Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer
Contour element "Circle"

Direction of rotation ● Clockwise direction of rotation
● Counterclockwise direction of rotation

X End point Y ∅ (abs or end point Y (inc)) mm
K Circle center point K (abs or inc) mm
I Circle center point I ∅ (abs or circle center point I (inc)) mm
α1 Starting angle to the Z axis (only for information) Degrees
β1 End angle to the Z axis (only for information) Degrees
β2 Opening angle Degrees
ment ● Radius
● Chamfer
Grinding

Contour element "Pole"
Parameters Description Unit

Z Position pole (abs) mm
Y Position pole (abs) Degrees
Contour element "End"

The data for the transition at the contour end of the previous contour element is displayed in
the "End" parameter screen.
The values cannot be edited.
9.1.4 Changing the contour
9.1.4.1 Overview
Function
You can change a previously created contour later.
Individual contour elements can be
● added,
● changed,
● inserted or
● deleted.
9.1.4.2 Modifying a contour element
Procedure for changing a contour element
1. Open the part program to be machined.

2. Open the contour.
Grinding
3. With the cursor, select the program block where you want to change the
contour. Open the geometry processor.
The individual contour elements are listed.
4. Position the cursor at the position where a contour element is to be in‐
serted or changed.
5. Select the desired contour element with the cursor.
6. Enter the parameters in the input screen or delete the element and select
a new element.
The desired contour element is inserted in the contour or changed.
Procedure for deleting a contour element
1. Open the part program to be machined.

2. Open the contour.
3. Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.
4. Press the "Delete element" softkey.
5. Press the "Delete" softkey.
Note
Ensure that the complete contour and the transition to the following element remain.
9.1.5 Contour call (CYCLE62)
9.1.5.1 Function
Function
The input creates a reference to the selected contour.
There are four ways to call the contour:
1. Contour name
The contour is in the calling main program.
2. Labels
The contour is in the calling main program and is limited by the labels that have been
entered.
Grinding
9.2 Form-truing (CYCLE495)
3. Subprogram
The contour is located in a subprogram in the same workpiece.
4. Labels in the subprogram
The contour is in a subprogram and is limited by the labels that have been entered.
9.1.5.2 Calling the cycle
Procedure
editor.
2. Press the "Contour" and "Contour call" softkeys.
The "Contour Call" input window opens.
3. Assign parameters to the contour selection.
9.1.5.3 Parameter

Contour selection ● Contour name
● Labels
● Subprogram
● Labels in the subprogram
Contour name CON: Contour name
Labels ● LAB1: Label 1
● LAB2: Label 2
Subprogram PRG: Subprogram
Labels in the subpro‐ ● PRG: Subprogram
gram ● LAB1: Label 1
● LAB2: Label 2

The form-truing cycle is not programmed using an input screen form in SINUMERIK Operate.
Syntax
CYCLE495(<_T>, <_DD>, <_SC>, <_F>, <_VARI>, <_D>, <_DX>, <_DZ>,
<S_PA>, <S_N>, <_DMODE>, <_AMODE>, <S_FW>, <S_HW>)
Grinding
Parameter
No. Parameter Parameter Data type Meaning

mask internal
1 <_T> STRING[20] Tool name of the grinding wheel
2 <_DD> INT Cutting edge number of the grinding wheel
3 <_SC> REAL Lift-off distance for avoiding obstacles, incremental
4 <_F> REAL Form-truing feedrate
5 <_VARI> INT Machining type
UNITS: Form-truing type
1= Parallel to the axis
2= Parallel to the contour
TENS: Machining direction
0= Pulling
Possible with cutting edge posi‐
tions 1 to 4
1= Pushing
tions 1 to 4
2= Alternating
tions 1 to 8
3= Start → end
tions 1 to 8
4= End → start
tions 1 to 8
HUNDREDS: Infeed direction
1= Infeed X for G18 or Y- for G19
2= Infeed X+ for G18 or Y+ for G19
3= Infeed Z- for G18 and for G19
4= Infeed Z+ for G18 and for G19
6 <_D> REAL Dressing value for form-truing type parallel to the axis
7 <_DX> REAL Dressing value X for G18 or Y for G19 for form-truing type parallel to
the contour
8 <_DZ> REAL Dressing value Z for G18 and G19 for form-truing type parallel to the
contour
9 <S_PA> REAL Form-truing allowance
10 <S_N> INT Number of strokes in the form-truing program
Grinding

mask internal
11 <_DMODE> INT Display mode
UNITS: Machining plane G17/G18/G19
0= Compatibility, the plane effective
before the cycle call remains ac‐
tive
1= G17 (only active in the cycle)
12 <_AMODE> INT Alternative mode
UNITS: Form-truing selection, new/continue
1= New
2= Continue
TENS: Select form-truing allowance
0= From the rough contour to the
lowest point of the contour
1= From the rough contour to the
highest point of the contour
13 <S_FW> REAL Clear angle of the dressing tool
14 <S_HW> REAL Holder angle of the dressing tool
Parameter S_N specifies how many strokes are generated in a form-truing program.
Note
Machining direction
For "alternating" machining direction, parameter S_N should be set to 1, so that the direction
changes at each stroke. Otherwise, use values >1, to achieve shorter machining times.
In addition, the following setting data are used:

SD55880 $SCS_GRIND_CONT_RELEASE_ANGLE
SD55881 $SCS_GRIND_CONT_RELEASE_DIST
SD55884 $SCS_GRIND_CONT_BLANK_OFFSET
References
● SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl Commissioning Manual
● SINUMERIK Operate (IH9) / SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual
Function
With the cycle, you form-true grinding wheels using a dressing tool. A dressing tool must be
selected as active tool.
Grinding
The OEM or the end user is responsible for the management of this.
The cycle runs in the active coordinate system, i.e. the cycle does not change any tool offsets
or work offsets.
You program the grinding wheel contour as G code ("free contour"). This can be located in a
subroutine or in the main program between two labels. The contour is transferred to the form-
truing cycle CYCLE495 using contour call cycle CYCLE62. Form-truing is carried out until the
form-truing allowance has been machined.
You have the option of form-truing either parallel with the axis or parallel with the contour:
● For form-truing parallel with the contour, the contour is moved along with each stroke.
Taking into account the unmachined part (blank), contour segments can be omitted while
machining.
● For form-truing in parallel to the axis, the form is established through longitudinal cuts
parallel to the machining axis.
Form-truing can be interrupted, and continued again at the point of interruption. However,
between stopping and continuing, no additional form-truing may be started, no wheel changed
and no power on carried out.
The actual form-truing allowance is saved to the channel-specific GUD variables
S_GC_CONT_R[2] for diagnostic purposes/progress display and for continuing after an
interruption.
Sequence
Main program:
● Selection of the dressing tool coordinate system
– with CYCLE435 (Page 199)(,,,) or
– with OEM or end user cycle
As a consequence, a dressing tool must be selected as active tool.
● Prepositioning, dressing tool
The position of the dressing tool should be selected so that the tool can approach the
grinding wheel for form-truing without any risk of collision.
● Contour call with CYCLE62(,,,) (Page 194)
With the contour call, the form of the grinding wheel is transferred to the form-truing cycle.
● Form-truing with CYCLE495(,,,)
The grinding wheel form is trued using CYCLE495.
● Deselection of the dressing tool coordinate system
– with CYCLE435 (Page 199)(,,,) or
– with OEM or end user cycle
Example
;*Main program
T="WHEEL" D1
CYCLE435("WHEEL",1,"DRESSER_6",1,0,0,10,10,0,0,0)
Grinding
9.3 Calculating the dressing tool position (CYCLE435)
G0 X10
Z-40
CYCLE62("CONTOUR",0,,)
CYCLE495("WHEEL",1,.5,100,131,0.01,,,0.345,100,0,11,90,85)
CYCLE435()
M30
;*
N10 G00 G90
N20 G01 X=2.5 Z=-37 F=100
N30 Z=-23.03906 F=100
N40 G03 X=0 Z=-23 CR=400 RND=0 F=50
N50 G03 X=0 Z=-3 CR=50 F=100
N60 G01 X=0 Z=-2.8
N70 Z=-0.2
N80 X=-1 F=50
N90 Z=2 F=100
N100 M17
9.3.1 Note regarding the dressing tool position

The cycle to calculate the dressing tool position is not programmed using an input screen form
in SINUMERIK Operate.
Syntax
CYCLE435(<_T>, <_DD>, <S_TA>, <S_DA>, <S_AD>, <S_AL>, <S_PVD>,
<S_PVL>, <S_PD>, <S_PL>, <_AMODE>)
Parameter

mask internal
1 <_T> STRING[32] Tool name of the grinding wheel
2 <_DD> INT Cutting edge number of the grinding wheel
3 <S_TA> STRING[32] Dressing tool reference point - dressing tool name
4 <S_DA> INT Cutting edge number of the dressing tool
5 <S_AD> REAL Dressing value, diameter
6 <S_AL> REAL Dressing value, face
7 <S_PVD> REAL Form-truing offset, diameter
8 <S_PVL> REAL Form-truing offset, face
9 <S_PD> REAL Form-truing allowance, diameter
Grinding

mask internal
10 <S_PL> REAL Form-truing allowance, face
11 <_AMODE> INT Alternative mode
UNITS: active tool at the end of the cycle
0= dressing tool active
1= wheel active
9.3.2 Function
The cycle is used to activate a coordinate system for dressing. A decision can be made as to
whether, after the cycle has been called, the transferred dressing tool or the transferred
grinding tool is active. The dimension offsets are already taken into account in the cycle so
that the required form-truing contour can be machined.
After the dressing contour has been machined, the activated coordinate system must be
cleared again by calling the cycle without transfer parameter.
Sequence
In the cycle, the tool data of the tool that is not active is transferred into the cycle frame. This
means that the dressing contour can be subsequently called relative to the geometry
parameters.
After machining the dressing contour, the cycle frame is cleared by calling the cycle without
transfer parameter.
Example
T="WHEEL"D1
CYCLE435(„WHEEL“,1,”DRESSER”,1,0.01,0.01,10,10,0,0,0)
G01 G64 F200
X=10
Z=10
…
;Machining the dressing contour
…
CYCLE435()
In the example, after the cycle, the “DRESSER” tool with cutting edge 1 is active.
Internally, an offset of 0.01 mm is taken into account in X and Z (for G18) and the contour itself
is offset by 10 mm, so that workpiece drawing dimensions can be programmed. A form-truing
allowance that can be taken into account is 0. After this, the dressing contour can be machined.
After machining, the cycle frame is cleared by calling CYCLE435() without transfer parameter.
Grinding
9.4 Oscillating cycles (CYCLE4071 ... CYCLE4079)
9.4.1 Note regarding oscillating cycles

Oscillating cycles are not programmed using input screen forms in SINUMERIK Operate.
9.4.2 CYCLE4071 - longitudinal grinding with infeed at the reversal point
Syntax
CYCLE4071(<S_A>, <S_B>, <S_W>, <S_U>, <S_I>, <S_K>, <S_H>, <S_A1>,
<S_A2>)
Parameters
No. Parameter Data type Meaning

1 <S_A> REAL Infeed depth at the start
2 <S_B> REAL Infeed depth at the end
3 <S_W> REAL Grinding width
4 <S_U> REAL Sparking-out time
5 <S_I> REAL Feedrate for infeed
6 <S_K> REAL Feedrate for transverse infeed
7 <S_H> INT Number of repetitions
8 <S_A1> AXIS Infeed axis (optional) or 1st geometry axis
9 <S_A2> AXIS Oscillating axis (optional) or 2nd geometry axis
Function
The cycle is used for the execution of <S_H> infeeds. The infeed depth at the start and at the
end can be different. There is a tangential motion between the infeeds.
Sequence
1. Start of the cycle at the current position of the oscillating axis.
2. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the start P1 <S_A> with the feedrate for
infeed P5 <S_I>.
3. Sparking out with the sparking-out time P4 <S_U>.
4. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P3 <S_W> as travel path and the
feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_K>.
5. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the end P2 <S_B> with the feedrate for
infeed P5 <S_I>.
Grinding

7. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_A> as travel path to the
starting point and the feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_K>.
The sequence cannot be interrupted with a single block.
The sequence is repeated according to the number of programmed repetitions P7 (<S_H>).
6B$! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B8!
Example
Executing two oscillating motions with the following cycle parameters:
● Infeed depth at the start: 0.02 mm
● Infeed depth at the end: 0.01 mm
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Sparking-out time: 1 s
● Infeed feedrate: 1 mm/min
● Transverse feedrate: 1000 mm/min
● Repetitions: 2
● Oscillating and infeed axes: Standard geometry axes
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4071(0.02,0.01,100,1,1,1000,2)
N30 M30
9.4.3 CYCLE4072 - longitudinal grinding with infeed at the reversal point and cancel
signal
Syntax
CYCLE4072(<S_GAUGE>, <S_A>, <S_B>, <S_W>, <S_U>, <S_I>, <S_K>,
<S_H>, <S_A1>, <S_A2>)
Grinding
Parameters

1 <S_GAUGE> STRING Cancel conditions for infeed:
1. Number of a rapid input
2. Logical expression
6 <S_I> REAL Feedrate for infeed
Function
The cycle is used for the execution of <S_H> infeeds taking into account an external cancel
signal. The infeed depth can be different at the start and at the end. There is a tangential motion
between the infeeds. The depth infeed is cancelled when the cancel condition is satisfied. A
complete stroke is always performed after the cancellation of the depth infeed.
Sequence
2. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the start P2 <S_A> with the feedrate for
infeed P6 <S_I>.
4. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_W> as travel path and the
feedrate for transverse infeed P7 <S_K>.
5. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the end P3 <S_B> with the feedrate for
infeed P6 <S_I>.
7. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_W> as travel path to the
starting point and the feedrate for transverse infeed P7 <S_K>.
8. Without cancellation: The sequence described above is repeated until the number of
programmed repetitions P7 (<S_H>) is reached.
With cancellation: The machining is stopped when the next start point is reached.
The sequence cannot be interrupted by a single block.
Grinding
6B$! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B$! ) 6B,! 6B8!

6B:! ) 6B.!
6B%! ) 6B,!
6B8!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B*$8*(!
6B8!
Figure 9-1 Cancellation of the infeed at the end
6B$! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%! ) 6B,!
6B:! ) 6B.!
6B$! ) 6B,! 6B:! ) 6B.! 6B8!
6B*$8*(!
6B8!
Figure 9-2 Cancellation of the infeed at the start
Resources
As resources, the cycle uses a block-wide synchronized action and a synchronized action
variable. The synchronized action is determined dynamically from the free area of the
synchronized action range (CUS.DIR - 1 ..., CMA.DIR - 1000 ..., CST.DIR – 1199 ...).
SYG_IS[1] is used as the synchronized action variable.
Grinding
Examples
Example 1: Oscillation with two strokes:

Cycle parameters
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Repetitions: 2
Cancel signal Rapid input 1 ($A_IN[1] )
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4072("1",0.02,0.01,100,1,1,1000,2)
N30 M30

Cycle parameters
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Repetitions: 2
Cancel signal Variable $A_DBR[20] < 0.01
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4072("($A_DBR[20]<0.01)",0.02,0.01,100,1,1,1000,2)
N30 M30
Grinding
9.4.4 CYCLE4073 - longitudinal grinding with continuous infeed
Syntax
CYCLE4073(<S_A>, <S_B>, <S_W>, <S_U>, <S_K>, <S_H>, <S_A1>, <S_A2>)
Parameters

Function
The cycle is used for the execution of <S_H> infeeds. The infeed from the start to the end and
from the end to the start can be different.
Sequence
1. Start of the cycle at the current position of the oscillating axis with infeed depth 0
2. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P3 <S_W> as travel path and
feedrate for transverse infeed P5 <S_K> with continuous increase in the infeed depth up
to the infeed depth at the start P1 <S_A>.
starting point and feedrate for transverse infeed P5 <S_K> with continuous increase in the
infeed depth up to the infeed depth at the end P2 <S_B>.
The sequence is repeated according to the number of programmed repetitions P7 (<S_H>).
Grinding
6B$!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8!
Example
Oscillation with two strokes:

Cycle parameters
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Repetitions: 2
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4073(0.02,0.01,100,1,1000,2)
N30 M30
9.4.5 CYCLE4074 - longitudinal grinding with continuous infeed and cancel signal
Syntax
CYCLE4074(<S_GAUGE>, <S_A>, <S_B>, <S_W>, <S_U>, <S_K>, <S_H>,
<S_A1>, <S_A2>)
Grinding
Parameters

1 <S_GAUGE> STRING Cancel conditions for infeed:
1. Number of a rapid input
2. Logical expression
Function
The cycle is used for the execution of <S_H> infeeds taking into account an external cancel
signal, for example. The infeed depth can be different at the start and at the end. The depth
infeed is cancelled when the cancel condition is satisfied. A complete stroke is always
performed after the cancellation of the depth infeed.
Sequence
2. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_W> as travel path and
feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_K> with continuous increase in the infeed depth up
to the infeed depth at the start P2 <S_A>.
starting point and feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_K> with continuous increase in the
infeed depth up to the infeed depth at the end P3 <S_B>.
6. Without cancellation: The sequence described above is repeated until the number of
programmed repetitions P7 (<S_H>) is reached.
With cancellation: The depth infeed is cancelled. The machining is stopped when the next
start point is reached.
Grinding
6B$!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8! 6B$!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%!
6B*$8*(!
Figure 9-3 Cancellation of the infeed from the end to the start
6B$!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8!
6B%!
6B:!) 6B.!
6B8! 6B$!
6B*$8*(!
Figure 9-4 Cancellation of the infeed from the start to the end
Resources
Examples

Cycle parameters
Grinding
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Repetitions: 2
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4074("1",0.02,0.01,100,1,1000,2)
N30 M30

Cycle parameters
● Stroke: 100 mm
● Repetitions: 2
Cancel signal Variable $A_DBR[20] < 0.01
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4074("($A_DBR[20]<0.01)",0.02,0.01,100,1,1000,2)
N30 M30
9.4.6 CYCLE4075 - surface grinding with infeed at the reversal point
Syntax
CYCLE4075(<S_I>, <S_J>, <S_K>, <S_A>, <S_R>, <S_F>, <S_P>, <S_A1>,
<S_A2>)
Parameters

1 <S_I> REAL Infeed depth at the start
2 <S_J> REAL Infeed depth at the end
Grinding

3 <S_K> REAL Total infeed depth
4 <S_A> REAL Grinding width
5 <S_R> REAL Feedrate for infeed
6 <S_F> REAL Feedrate for transverse infeed
7 <S_P> REAL Sparking-out time
8 <S_A1> AXIS Infeed axis (optional)
9 <S_A2> AXIS Oscillating axis (optional)
Function
The cycle is used for machining with a total infeed depth P3 <S_K> in infeed steps. The infeed
depths at the start P1 <S_I> and at the end P2 <S_J> can be different. There is a tangential
motion between the infeeds.
The positional data P1 to P4 can be negative or positive.
The specification of the infeed axis P8 <S_A1> and/or oscillating axis P9 <S_A2> are optional.
If one or both parameters are not specified, the cycle uses the first two geometry axes of the
channel.
If the sum of the infeed depth at the start P1 <S_I> and at the end P2 <S_J> is 0 or the total
infeed depth P3 <S_K> is 0, only a sparking-out stroke is performed.
Sequence
2. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the start P1 <S_I> with the feedrate for
infeed P5 <S_R>.
3. Sparking out with the sparking-out time P7 <S_P>.
4. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_A> as travel path and the
feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_F>.
5. Traversing of the infeed axis to the infeed depth at the end P2 <S_J> with the feedrate for
infeed P5 <S_R>.
starting point and the feedrate for transverse infeed P6 <S_F>.
The sequence is repeated until the total infeed depth P3 <S_K> has been reached. The last
stroke is then distributed unevenly.
Grinding
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B-! ) 6B5!
6B.!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B,! ) 6B5! 6B3!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3! 6B-! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
Figure 9-5 Total infeed depth reached with infeed at the second reversal point
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B.! 6B3! 6B-! ) 6B5!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B,! ) 6B5! 6B$! ) 6B)! 6B3!
6B3! 6B3!
Figure 9-6 Total infeed depth reached with infeed at the first reversal point
Example
Oscillation with:
● 0.02 mm infeed depth at the start
● 0.01mm infeed depth at the end
● Total infeed depth 1 mm
● 100 mm stroke
● Infeed feedrate 1 mm/min
● Transverse feedrate 1000 mm/min
● 1 second sparking-out time
● Standard geometry axes
Grinding
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4075(0.02,0.01,1,100,1,1000,1)
N30 M30
9.4.7 CYCLE4077 - surface grinding with infeed at the reversal point and cancel signal
Syntax
CYCLE4077(<S_GAUGE>, <S_I>, <S_J>, <S_K>, <S_A>, <S_R>, <S_F>,
<S_P>, <S_A1>, <S_A2>)
Parameters

1 <S_GAUGE> STRING Cancel condition for infeed:
● Number of a rapid input
● Logical expression
Function
motion between the infeeds. The depth infeed is cancelled when the cancel signal of the rapid
input is 1 or the cancel condition is satisfied. A complete stroke is performed after the
cancellation.
channel.
Grinding
Sequence
infeed P6 <S_R>.
infeed P6 <S_R>.
8. Without cancellation: The sequence described above is repeated until the total infeed depth
P4 <S_K> has been reached. The last stroke is then distributed unevenly.
With cancellation: The machining is stopped at the start point.
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B-! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B.! 6B,! ) 6B5! 6B3!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3! 6B-! ) 6B5!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B*$8*(!
6B3!
Figure 9-7 Cancellation of the infeed at the end
Grinding
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B-! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B,! ) 6B5! 6B$! ) 6B)!
6B.! 6B3!
6B*$8*(!
6B3!
Figure 9-8 Cancellation of the infeed at the start
Resources
Examples
Example 1
Oscillation with:
● 100 mm stroke
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4077("1",0.02,0.01,1,100,1,1000,1)
N30 M30
Grinding
Example 2
Oscillation with:
● 100 mm stroke
Cancel signal Dual-port RAM variable 20 less than 0.01 ($A_DBR[20] < 0.01)
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4077("($A_DBR[20]<0.01)",0.02,0.01,1,100,1,1000,1)
N30 M30
9.4.8 CYCLE4078 - surface grinding with continuous infeed
Syntax
CYCLE4078(<S_I>, <S_J>, <S_K>, <S_A>, <S_F>, <S_P>, <S_A1>, <S_A2>)
Parameters

1 <S_I> REAL Infeed depth from the start to the end
2 <S_J> REAL Infeed depth from the end to the start
5 <S_F> REAL Feedrate
Function
The cycle is used for machining with a total infeed depth P3 <S_K> by means of continuous
infeed. The infeed depths from the start to the end P1 <S_I> and from the end to the start P2
<S_J> can be different.
Grinding
channel.
If the sum of the infeed depths P1 <S_I> and P2 <S_J> is 0 or the total infeed depth P3
<S_K> is 0, only a sparking-out stroke is performed.
Sequence
2. Traversing of the oscillating axis with the grinding width P4 <S_A> as travel path and
feedrate P5 <S_F> with continuous increase in the infeed depth up to the infeed depth at
the start P1 <S_I>.
starting point and feedrate P5 <S_F> with continuous increase in the infeed depth up to
the infeed depth at the end P2 <S_J>.
starting point and feedrate P5 <S_F>.
6B,!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B-!
6B.!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3! 6B,!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B$! ) 6B)!
Example
Oscillation with:
● 20 mm infeed depth at the start
● 10 mm infeed depth at the end
● 100 mm stroke
Grinding
● Feedrate 1000 mm/min

Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4078(20,10,100,100,1000,1)
N30 M30
9.4.9 CYCLE4079 - surface grinding with intermittent infeed
Syntax
CYCLE4079(<S_I>, <S_J>, <S_K>, <S_A>, <S_R>, <S_F>, <S_P>, <S_A1>,
<S_A2>)
Parameters

Function
motion between the infeeds.
channel.
Grinding
Sequence
infeed P5 <S_R>.
infeed P5 <S_R>.
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
6B-! ) 6B5!
6B.!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B,! ) 6B5! 6B3!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3! 6B-! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B3!
Figure 9-9 Total infeed depth reached with infeed at the second reversal point
Grinding
9.5 Aligning a grinding wheel (CYCLE400)
6B,! ) 6B5!
6B$! ) 6B)!
6B.! 6B3! 6B-! ) 6B5!

6B$! ) 6B)!
6B,! ) 6B5! 6B$! ) 6B)! 6B3!
6B3! 6B3!
Figure 9-10 Total infeed depth reached with infeed at the first reversal point
Example
Oscillation with:
● 100 mm stroke
Program code
N10 T1 D1
N20 CYCLE4079(0.02,0.01,1,100,1,1000,1)
N30 M30
9.5.1 Function
Grinding machines with B axis that can be swiveled are supported using the "Aligning grinding
wheel" functions.
Grinding
The maximum angular range when aligning is limited by the traversing range of the participating
rotary axes. Technological limits are also placed on the angular range depending on the tool
used. After aligning, the cutting-edge position is automatically adapted.
Definition of angle ß
Angle ß – that is independent of the machine – is used to align grinding wheels.
In the initial state of the machine kinematics, a grinding wheel can be oriented according to Z
or X.
Machining the opposite side

It can be selected as to whether the side of the grinding wheel that corresponds to the cutting-
edge position is machined – or the opposite side.
Retraction
Retraction is possible before swiveling the grinding wheel.
9.5.2 Calling the cycle
Procedure
editor.
2. Press the "Various" softkey.
3. Press the "Align grinding wheel" softkey.

The "Align Grinding Wheel" window opens.
Parameter

TC Name of the swivel data set
ß Angle of the tool to the axis of rotation Degrees
Grinding

Machining the opposite ● Yes: Machining opposite the cutting edge position
side ● No: Machining on the cutting edge position side
Retraction ● Yes: Retract prior to swiveling
● No: Do no retract prior to swiveling
Grinding
Grinding with a B axis (only for cylindrical grinding
machines) 10
10.1 Overview
Cylindrical grinding machines with a B axis are supported by means of tool carriers.
([WHUQDOJULQGLQJZKHHO
,QWHUQDOJULQGLQJZKHHO
%D[LV
([WHUQDOJULQGLQJZKHHO )DFHJULQGLQJZKHHO
Figure 10-1 Example: Turret with four grinding spindles
Tool carrier
A separate tool carrier is set up for each grinding spindle. Each tool carrier has head kinematics
with the B axis as first rotary axis. A semiautomatic rotary axis in the direction of the grinding
spindle is set up as second rotary axis (values: 0° or 180°).
The respective basic position is determined via the offset angle of the B axis (e.g. 0°, 90°, 180°,
270°, arbitrary). If a spindle is mechanically at a slightly inclined angle to the 90° direction (e.g.
3°), then the direction vector of the second rotary axis is also entered accordingly (however,
the direction component Y must be 0).
Select the appropriate tool carrier in the "T, S, M" window.
"Beta" alignment angle

You can define a skew angle in relation to the basic position with β.
Grinding
Grinding with a B axis (only for cylindrical grinding machines)
10.1 Overview
%D[LV %D[LV
X β
β
X
Figure 10-2 Beta rotation
Changing the cutting edge position

The second rotary axis is controlled with the aid of the "Machining opposite" selection box, and
the cutting edge position is changed via the CUTMOD function (e.g. internal grinding).
%D[LV %D[LV
0DFKLQLQJRSSRVLWH 1R 0DFKLQLQJRSSRVLWH <HV
Grinding
10.2 T, S, M window for set-up B axis
10.2 T, S, M window for set-up B axis

Alignment of the B axis
Display Meaning
T Input of the tool (name or location number)
You can select a tool from the tool list using the "Select tool" softkey.
D Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9)
ST Sister tool (for replacement tool strategy)
TC Name of the swivel data set
ß Input of the angle for the tool alignment

Machining opposite ● Yes: Machining opposite the cutting edge position
● No: Machining on the cutting edge position side
Spindles 1 and 2 Spindle selection for master spindle and identification with spindle num‐
(e.g. S1) ber
Spindle M function
Spindle off: Spindle is stopped
CCW rotation: Spindle rotates counterclockwise
CW rotation: Spindle rotates clockwise
Spindle positioning: Spindle is moved to the desired position.

Other M functions Input of machine functions
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between
the meaning and number of the function.
G zero offset Selection of the zero offset (basic reference, G54 - 57)
You can select zero offsets from the tool list of settable zero offsets via
the "Zero offset" softkey.
Measurement unit Selection of the unit of measurement (inch, mm).
The setting made here has an effect on the programming.
Machining plane Selection of the machining plane (G17(XY), G18 (ZX), G19 (YZ))
Gear stage Specification of the gear stage (auto, I - V)
Stop position Input of the spindle position in degrees
Note
Spindle positioning
● A rotating spindle is positioned and continues to turn in the same direction.
Grinding
10.3 Measuring in JOG
Procedure
2. Press the "T, S, M" softkey.
3. Enter the name or the number of the tool T.

- OR -
Press the "Select tool" softkey to open the tool list, position the cursor on
the desired tool and press the "In manual" softkey.
The tool is transferred to the "T, S, M... window" and displayed in the field
of tool parameter "T".
4. Enter the desired parameters.

The tool is loaded into the spindle.
Note
Angular alignment and cutting edge position
The "Beta" and "Machining opposite" fields must always be entered together.
Note
Selection of the swivel data set
If only one swivel data set is available, the "TC" selection box is omitted.
10.3.1 Grinding wheel alignment for grinding

The tool measurement screens contain entry fields for aligning the grinding wheel or dresser.
Grinding
Aligning the tools for the B axis

● TC
Name of the swivel data set
Note: If only one swivel data set is available, the "TC" selection field is omitted.
● ß
Input of the angle for the tool alignment
● Machining the opposite side
Yes: Machining opposite the cutting edge position
No: Machining on the cutting edge position side
10.3.2 Manually measuring the grinding tool (with B axis)
Reference point
A dresser serves as reference point for the measurement of length X or Z.
Procedure

- OR -
Grinding

key.
- OR -
Position the cursor to the "Zero offset" field and press the "Select ZO"
softkey.
measure.

Note
10.3.3 Manually measuring the dresser (with B axis)
Reference point
A grinding wheel serves as reference point for measuring length X and length Z.
Grinding
Procedure
Dresser as tool
5. In the "Tool Selection" window, select the dressing tool to be measured
- OR -
Press the "Tool list" softkey, select in the tool list the dressing tool to be
measured and press the "In manual" softkey.

- OR -
Dresser as zero offset
Position the cursor in the "Zero offset" field and press the "Select ZO"
softkey.
softkey.
7. Select the grinding wheel to be used for measuring the dresser length
measure.
9. Scratch the dresser using the grinding tool.

Grinding
10.3.4 Calibrating the swivel axis
Requirement
The grinding wheel must be loaded before the calibration.
Procedure
3. Press the "Swivel axis" softkey.

The "Calibration: Swivel Axis" window opens.
7. Select the required swivel data set in the "TC" selection field, and select
on which side of the cutting edge position the machining is to be performed
with "Yes" or "No" button in the "Machining opposite" selection field.
8. Select the measuring axis (X or Z).
The first β angle is automatically swung in to the fixed default angle of 0°.
10. Then scratch the workpiece and press the "Save β0" softkey.
11. Enter the required angles in the "ß1" and "ß2" fields, scratch the workpiece
and press the corresponding "Save ß1" and "Save ß2" softkeys.
The calculation can be performed when all the measurements have been
made.
12. Press the "Calculate" softkey.

The offset vector L3 (X and Z) of the swivel data set is displayed as meas‐
urement result.
Note
The calibration is possible only with an active tool.
Grinding
Collision avoidance (only 840D sl) 11
11.1 Activating collision avoidance
With the aid of collision avoidance, you can avoid collisions and therefore major damage during
the machining of a workpiece or when creating programs.
Software option
You require the "Collision avoidance (machine, working area)" software option in
order to use this function.
Collision avoidance is based on a machine model. The kinematics of the machine are
described as a kinematic chain. For machine parts to be protected, protection areas are
attached to these chains. The geometry of the protection areas is defined using protection
area elements. The control then knows how they move in the machine coordinate system
depending on the position of the machine axes. You then subsequently define the collision
pairs, i.e. two protection areas which are monitored with respect to one another.
The "Collision avoidance" function regularly calculates the clearance from these protection
areas. When two protection areas approach one another, and a specific safety clearance is
reached, an alarm is displayed and before the corresponding traversing block, the program is
stopped and/or the traversing motion is stopped.
References
More detailed explanations on the collision avoidance can be found in the following reference:
SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl Commissioning Manual;
Function Manual, Special Functions (FB3):
● Section: "Kinematic chain (K7)"
● Section: "Geometric machine modeling (K8)"
● Section: "Collision avoidance (K9)"
● Section: "NC/PLC interface signals (Z3)" > "Collision avoidance (K9)"
Precondition
● Collision avoidance is setup and an active machine model is available.
● The setting "Collision avoidance" has been selected for the AUTO operating mode or for
the JOG and MDA operating modes.
Grinding
Collision avoidance (only 840D sl)
11.2 Set collision avoidance
Procedure
4. Press the "Other views" and "Machine area" softkeys.
An active machine model is displayed for simultaneous recording.

Using "Settings", you have the option of separately activating or deactivating the collision
monitoring for the Machine operating area (operating modes, AUTO, JOG and MDI) separately
for the machine and tools.
Using machine data, you define from which protection level the collision monitoring for the
machine or the tool can be activated or deactivated in the operating modes JOG/MDI or AUTO.
Setting Effect
JOG/MDI operating mode They switch the collision monitoring for the operating modes JOG/MDI
Collision avoidance completely on or off.
AUTO mode They switch the collision monitoring for the operating mode AUTO com‐
Collision avoidance pletely on or off.
JOG/MDI If the collision monitoring for the JOG/MDI operating modes is activated,
Machine then as a minimum, the
machine protection areas are monitored.
The parameter cannot be changed.
AUTO If the collision monitoring for the AUTO operating mode is activated, then
Machine as a minimum, the
machine protection areas are monitored.
The parameter cannot be changed.
JOG/MDI They switch the collision monitoring of the tool protection areas for the
Tools operating modes JOG/MDI on or off.
AUTO They switch the collision monitoring of the tool protection areas for the
Tools operating mode AUTO on or off.
Grinding
Procedure
2. Select the "JOG", "MDI" or "AUTO" mode.
4. Press the "Collision avoidance" softkey.

The "Collision Avoidance" window opens.
5. In the "Collision avoidance" line for the required operating modes (e.g.
for JOG/MDI), select the entry "On" to activate the collision avoidance or
"Off" to deactivate collision avoidance.
6. Deactivate the "Tools" checkbox if you only want to monitor the machine
protection areas.
Grinding
Grinding
Multi-channel view 12
12.1 Multi-channel view
The multi-channel view allows you to simultaneously view several channels in the following
operating areas:
● "Machine" operating area
● "Program" operating area
12.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

With a multi-channel machine, you have the option of simultaneously monitoring and
influencing the execution of several programs.
Displaying the channels in the "Machine" operating area

In the "Machine" operating area, you can display 2 - 4 channels simultaneously.
Using the appropriate settings, you can define the sequence in which channels are displayed.
Here, you can also select if you wish to hide a channel.
Note
The "REF POINT" operating mode is shown only in the single-channel view.
Multi-channel view
2 - 4 channels are simultaneously displayed in channel columns on the user interface.
● Two windows are displayed one above the other for each channel.
● The actual value display is always in the upper window.
● The same window is displayed for both channels in the lower window.
● You can select the display in the lower window using the vertical softkey bar.
The following exceptions apply when making a selection using the vertical softkeys:
– The "Actual values MCS" softkey switches over the coordinate systems of both channels.
– The "Zoom actual value" and "All G functions" softkeys switch into the single-channel
view.
Grinding
Multi-channel view
12.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area
Single-channel view
If, for your multi-channel machine, you always only wish to monitor one channel, then you can
set a permanent single-channel view.
Horizontal softkeys
● Block search
When selecting the block search, the multi-channel view is kept. The block display is
displayed as search window.
● Program control
The "Program Control" window is displayed for the channels configured in the multi-channel
view. The data entered here applies for these channels together.
● If you press an additional horizontal softkey in the "Machine" operating area (e.g.
"Overstore", "Synchronized actions"), then you change into a temporary single-channel
view. If you close the window again, then you return to the multi-channel view.
Switching between single- and multi-channel view
Press the <MACHINE> key in order to briefly switch between the single-
and multi-channel view in the machine area.
Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key in order to switch between the upper
and lower window within a channel column.
Editing a program in the block display
You can perform simple editing operations as usual with the <INSERT>
key in the actual block display.
If there is not sufficient space, you switch over into the single-channel view.
Running-in a program
You select individual channels to run-in the program at the machine.
Requirement
● Several channels have been set-up.
● The setting "2 channels", "3 channels" or "4 channels" is selected.
Grinding
Multi-channel view
12.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels
Displaying/hiding a multi-channel view
2. Select the "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO" mode.
...
4. Press the "Multi-channel view" softkey.
5. In the window "Settings for Multi-Channel View" in the selection

box "View", select the required entry (e.g. "2 channels") and define
the channels as well as the sequence in which they are to be dis‐
played.
In the basic screen for the "AUTO", "MDA" and JOG" operating
modes, the upper window of the left-hand and right-hand channel
columns are occupied by the actual value window.
6. Press the "T,F,S" softkey if you wish to view the "T,F,S" window.
The "T,F,S" window is displayed in the lower window of the left-
hand and right-hand channel column.
Note:
The "T,F,S" softkey is present only for smaller operator panels, i.e.
up to OP012.

On the OP015 and OP019 operator panels as well as on the PC, you have the option of
displaying up to four channels next to each one. This simplifies the creation and run-in for multi-
channel programs.
Constraints
● OP015 with a resolution of 1024x768 pixels: up to three channels visible
● OP019 with a resolution of 1280x1024 pixels: up to four channels visible
● The operation of a OP019 requires a PCU50.5
Grinding
Multi-channel view
3- or 4-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

Use the multi-channel view settings to select the channels and specify the view.
Channel view Display in the "Machine" operating area

3-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
● Actual Value window
● T,F,S window
● Block Display window
Selecting functions
● The T,F,S window is overlaid by pressing one of the vertical softkeys.
4-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
● Actual Value window
● G functions (the "G functions" softkey is omitted). "All G functions" is
accessed with the Menu forward key.
● T,S,F window
● Block Display window
Selecting functions
● The window showing the G codes is overlaid if you press one of the vertical
softkeys.
Toggling between the channels
Press the <CHANNEL> key to toggle between the channels.
Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key to toggle within a channel column be‐
tween the three or four windows arranged one above the other.
Note
2-channel display
Unlike the smaller operator panels, the T,F,S window is visible for a 2-channel view in the
Program operating area

You can display as many as ten programs next to each other in the editor.
Displaying a program
You can define the width of the program in the Editor window using the settings in the editor.
This means that you can distribute programs evenly - or you can widen the column with the
active program .
Grinding
Multi-channel view
12.4 Setting the multi-channel view
Channel status
When required, channel messages are displayed in the status display.
Setting Meaning
View Here, you specify how many channels are displayed.
● 1 channel
● 2 channels
● 3 channels
● 4 channels
Channel selection and se‐ You specify which channels in which sequence are displayed in the multi-
quence channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels" view)
Visible Here, you specify which channels are displayed in the multi-channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels" view) You can quickly hide channels from the view.
Example
Your machine has 6 channels.
You configure channels 1 - 4 for the multi-channel view and define the display sequence (e.g.
1,3,4,2).
In the multi-channel view, for a channel switchover, you can only switch between the channels
configured for the multi-channel view; all others are not taken into consideration. Using the
<CHANNEL> key, advance the channel in the "Machine" operating area - you obtain the
following views: Channels "1" and "3", channels "3" and "4", channels "4" and "2". Channels
"5" and "6" are not displayed in the multi-channel view.
In the single-channel view, toggle between all of the channels (1...6) without taking into account
the configured sequence for the multi-channel view.
Using the channel menu, you can always select all channels, also those not configured for
multi-channel view. If you switch to another channel, which is not configured for the multi-
channel view, then the system automatically switches into the single-channel view. There is
no automatic switchback into the multi-channel view, even if a channel is again selected, which
has been configured for multi-channel view.
Grinding
Multi-channel view
Procedure
2. Select the "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO" mode.
4. Press the "Multi-channel view" softkey.

The "Settings for Multi-Channel View" window is opened.
5. Set the multi-channel or single-channel view and define which channels
are to be seen in the "Machine" operating area - and in the editor - in
which sequence.
Grinding
Manage tools 13
13.1 Lists for the tool management
All tools and also all magazine locations that have been created or configured in the NC are
displayed in the lists in the Tool area.
All lists display the same tools in the same order. When switching between the lists, the cursor
remains on the same tool in the same screen segment.
The lists have different parameters and softkey assignments. Switching between lists is a
specific change from one topic to the next.
● Tool list
All parameters and functions required to create and set up tools are displayed.
● Tool wear
All parameters and functions that are required during operation, e.g. wear and monitoring
functions, are listed here.
● Magazine
You will find the magazine and magazine location-related parameters and functions for the
tools / magazine locations here.
● Tool data OEM
This list can be freely defined by the OEM.
Grinding-specific tool data is provided here if you are working with
grinding tools.
Sorting the lists

You can change the sorting within the lists according to:
● The magazine
● The name (tool identifier, alphabetic)
● The tool type
● The T number (tool identifier, numerical)
● The D number
Filtering the lists

You can filter the lists according to the following criteria:
● Only display the first cutting edge
● Only tools that are ready to use
● Only tools that have reached the pre-alarm limit
● Only locked tools
● Only tools with active code
Grinding
Manage tools
13.3 Tool types
Search functions
You have the option of searching through the lists according to the following objects:
● Tool
● Magazine location
● Empty location
13.2 Magazine management

Depending on the configuration, the tool lists support a magazine management.
Magazine management functions

● Press the "Magazine" horizontal softkey to obtain a list that displays tools with magazine-
related data.
● The Magazine / Magazine location column is displayed in the lists.
● In the default setting, the lists are displayed sorted according to magazine location.
● The magazine selected via the cursor is displayed in the title line of each list.
● The "Magazine selection" vertical softkey is displayed in the tool list.
● You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list.
13.3 Tool types

A number of tool types are available when you create a new tool. The tool type determines
which geometry data is required and how it will be computed.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.3 Tool types
Tool types
Figure 13-1 Example for the list of favorites (cylindrical grinding)
Figure 13-2 Example for the list of favorites (surface grinding)
Figure 13-3 Tools listed in the "New Tool - Grinding Tools" window (cylindrical grinding)
Grinding
Manage tools
13.4 Tool dimensioning
Figure 13-4 Tools listed in the "New Tool - Grinding Tools" window (surface grinding)
Figure 13-5 Available tools in the "New Tool - Special Tools" window

This section provides an overview of the dimensioning of tools.
Grinding
Manage tools
Tool types
(QWULHVLQ HJ
WRROSDUDPHWHUV *=;SODQH
7&B'3 )
;
7&B'3 /HQJWK
7&B'3 /HQJWK
/HQJWK;
7&B'3 5DGLXV
=
$FWLYDWLRQ
5DGLXV
/HQJWKLQ<
* /HQJWKLQ;
$Q\XQXVHGSDUDPH 5DGLXVLQ;<
WHUVPXVWEHVHWWR /HQJWKLQ;
* /HQJWKLQ=
5DGLXVLQ=; /HQJWK=
/HQJWKLQ= )7RROKROGHUUHIHUHQFHSRLQW
* /HQJWKLQ<
5DGLXVLQ<=
Figure 13-6 Grinding disk

'LDPHWHU
/HQJWKP
/HQJWKX
Figure 13-7 3D-probe
The tool length is measured to the center of the ball or to the ball circumference.
Note
A 3D-probe must be calibrated before use.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
13.5 Tool list
13.5.1 Tool list

All parameters and functions that are required to create and set up the tools are displayed in
the tool list.
Each tool is uniquely identified by the tool identifier and the sister tool number.
For the tool display, i.e. when displaying the cutting edge positions, the machine coordinate
system is taken into account.
Tool parameters
Column heading Meaning

Location Magazine/location number
● The magazine location numbers
The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location number
in the magazine.
If there is only one magazine, only the location number is displayed.
W ● Transfer location
L
● Loader
B
● Loading station
BS
● Load position
The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
*
● Spindle location as an icon
*
● Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a spindle with
* If activated in magazine
selection dual gripper is used) as icons.
Type Tool type
Specific tool offset data is displayed depending on the tool type (represen‐
ted as an icon).
The icon identifies the position of the tool; this was selected when the tool
was created.
You have the option of changing the tool position or the tool type using the
<SELECT> key.
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter
the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The num‐
ber of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode characters.
The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Sister tool number (for replacement tool strategy).
D Cutting edge number
Wheel Ø Wheel diameter
(for grinding wheel - type 400, type 410)
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list

Length X or length Z Tool length
- Cylindrical grinding Geometry data length X or length Z
Length Y or length Z Tool length
- Surface grinding Geometry data length Y or length Z
Cutting edge radius Tool radius (for grinding wheel - type 400, type 410; dresser - type 490,
dressing roller - type 495, dressing wheel - type 497)
Ø Tool diameter
(for 3D-probe - type 710; edge-probe - type 711; mono-probe - type 712; L-
probe - type 713; calibration tool - type 725)
Outer Ø Outer diameter
(for star-type probe - type 714)
Further parameters
If you have set up unique cutting edge numbers, these are displayed in the first column.

D no. Unique cutting edge number
SN Cutting edge number
EC Setup offsets
Display of the existing setup offsets
You use the configuration file to specify the selection of parameters in the list.
References
Information on the configuration and setting up of the tool list can be found in the following
references:
Icons in the tool list
Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Tool type
Red cross The tool is disabled.
Yellow triangle pointing down‐ The prewarning limit has been reached.
ward
Yellow triangle pointing up‐ The tool is in a special state.
ward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tool tip will pro‐
vide a brief description.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Green frame The tool is preselected.
Magazine/location number
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change po‐
sition.
Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the load position.
Red cross The magazine location is disabled.
Procedure
2. Press the "Tool list" softkey.

The "Tool List" window opens.
13.5.2 Additional data

The following tool type requires geometry data that is not included in the tool list display.
Tool types with additional geometry data
Tool type Additional parameters

710 3D-probe Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
Wear length (Δ length X, Δ length Y, Δ length Z)
Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z)
712 Mono-probe Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
Offset angle (angle)
713 L-probe Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
Boom length (length)
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
Tool type Additional parameters

714 Star-type probe Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
Ball diameter (Ø)
725 Calibration tool Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
You can use the configuration file to specify the data to be displayed in the "Additional Data"
window.
Procedure
1. The tool list is opened.
2. In the list, select an appropriate tool, e.g. an angle head cutter.

3. Press the "Additional data" softkey.
The "Additional Data - ..." window opens.
The "Additional data" softkey is only active if a tool for which the "Addi‐
tional Data" window is configured is selected.
13.5.3 Creating a new tool

When creating a new tool, the "New Tool - Favorites" window offers you a number of selected
tool types, known as "favorites".
If you do not find the desired tool type in the favorites list, then select the turning or special
tool via the corresponding softkeys.
Note
Grinding tools
Additional grinding tools are available depending on the particular machine configuration.
Procedure
1. The tool list opens.
2. Place the cursor in the tool list at the position where the new tool should
be created.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
To do this, you can select an empty magazine location or the NC tool

memory outside of the magazine.
You may also position the cursor on an existing tool in the area of the
NC tool memory. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten.
3. Press the "New tool" softkey.
The "New Tool - Favorites" window opens.
- OR -
If you want to create a tool that is not in the list of favorites, press
"Grinders 400-499" or " Spec. tool 700-900".
- or - The "New Tool - Grinding Tools" or "New Tool - Special Tools" window
opens.
4. Select the tool by placing the cursor on the corresponding tool type and
on the icon of the desired cutting edge position.
5. If more than four cutting edge positions are available, select the desired
cutting edge position with the aid of the <cursor left> and <cursor right>
keys.

The tool is added to the tool list with a predefined name. If the cursor
is located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool
is loaded to this magazine location.
The tool creation sequence can be defined differently.
Multiple load positions

If you have configured several load positions for a magazine, then the "Select Load Position"
window opens when a tool is created directly in an empty magazine location or when the "Load"
softkey is pressed.
Select the required load position and confirm with the "OK" softkey.
Additional data
If configured accordingly, the "New Tool" window opens after the required tool has been
selected and confirmed with "OK".
You can define the following data in this window:
● Name
● Tool location type
● Size of tool
References:
For a description of configuration options, refer to the
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
13.5.4 Measuring a tool - tool list

You can measure the tool offset data for the individual tools directly from the tool list.
Note
Tool measurement is only possible with an active tool.
Procedure
2. Select the tool that you want to measure in the tool list and press the
"Measure tool" softkey.
You jump to the "JOG" operating area and the tool to be measured is
entered in the "Measure: Length manual" screen in the "T" field.
3. Select the cutting edge number D and the sister tool number ST.
4. Press the "X", "Y" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want
to measure.
...
5. Traverse the tool towards the workpiece in the direction that is to be

measured and scratch it.
6. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0, Y0 or Z0.
If no value is entered for X0, Y0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual
value display.
13.5.5 Managing several cutting edges

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is assigned
to each cutting edge. The number of possible cutting edges depends on the control
configuration.
Tool cutting edges that are not required can be deleted.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
Procedure
2. Position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to store more
cutting edges.
3. Press the "Cutting edges" softkey in the "Tool list".
4. Press the "New cutting edge" softkey.

A new data set is stored in the list.
The cutting edge number is incremented by 1. The offset data is preas‐
signed with the values of the cutting edge where the cursor is located.
5. Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.
6. Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.
7. Position the cursor on the cutting edge that you want to delete and press
the "Delete cutting edge" softkey.
The data set is deleted from the list. The first tool cutting edge cannot be
deleted.
13.5.6 Deleting a tool

Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a clearer overview.
Procedure
2. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.
3. Press the "Delete tool" softkey.
A safety prompt is displayed.
4. Press the "OK" softkey if you really want to delete the tool.
Use this softkey to delete the tool.

If the tool is in a magazine location, it is unloaded and then deleted.
Multiple load points - tool in magazine location

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Loading Point
Selection" window appears after pressing the "Delete tool" softkey.
Select the required load point and press the "OK" softkey to unload and delete the tool.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
13.5.7 Loading and unloading tools

You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list. When a tool is loaded,
it is taken to a magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and
stored in the tool list.
When you are loading a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You
may also directly specify an empty magazine location.
You can unload tools from the magazine that you are not using at present. HMI then
automatically saves the tool data in the tool list in the NC memory outside the magazine.
Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the
corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered
more than once.
Procedure
2. Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if
the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will find
it at the end of the tool list).
3. Press the "Load" softkey.
The "Load to… " window opens.

The "... location" field is pre-assigned with the number of the first empty
magazine location.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.
- OR -
Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
Press the "Spindle" softkey.
. The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location or spindle.
Several magazines
If you have configured several magazines, the "Load to ..." window appears after pressing the
"Load" softkey.
If you do not want to use the suggested empty location, then enter your desired magazine and
magazine location. Confirm your selection with "OK".
Multiple load points

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection"
window appears after pressing the "Load" softkey.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
Select the required loading point and confirm with "OK".
Unloading tools
1. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to unload from the mag‐
azine and press the "Unload" softkey.
2. Select the required load point in the "Load Point Selection" window.
3. Confirm your selection with "OK".
- OR -
Undo your selection with "Cancel".
13.5.8 Selecting a magazine

You can directly select the buffer memory, the magazine, or the NC memory.
Procedure
2. Press the "Magazine selection" softkey.
If there is only one magazine, you will move from one area to the next
(i.e. from the buffer memory to the magazine, from the magazine to the
NC memory, and from the NC memory back to the buffer memory) each
time you press the softkey. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of
the magazine each time.
- OR -
If there is more than one magazine, the "Magazine Selection" window
opens. Position the cursor on the desired magazine in this window and
press the "Go to ..." softkey.
The cursor jumps directly to the beginning of the specified magazine.
Hiding magazines
Deactivate the checkbox next to the magazines that you do not want to
appear in the magazine list.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
The magazine selection behavior with multiple magazines can be configured in different ways.
References
13.5.9 Code carrier connection (only 840D sl)
13.5.9.1 Overview
You have the option of configuring a code carrier connection.
This means that the following functions are available in SINUMERIK Operate:
● Creating a new tool from code carrier
● Unloading tools on code carrier
Software option
In order to use the functions, you require the option "Tool Ident Connection".
References
Further details on tool management with code carrier and the configuration of the user interface
in SINUMERIK Operate can be found in the following reference:
● Function Manual SINUMERIK Integrate for Production AMB, AMC AMM/E
● SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl Commissioning Manual
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
13.5.9.2 Managing tools on a code carrier

With a code carrier connection, in the list of favorites, there is also a tool available.
Figure 13-8 New tool from code carrier in the list of favorites
Creating a new tool from code carrier
be created.
You may also position the cursor on an existing tool in the area of the NC
tool memory. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten.
The "New Tool - Favorites" window is opened.
4. Position the cursor on the entry "Tool from code carrier" and press the
"OK" softkey.
The tool data is read from the code carrier, and is displayed in the "New
tool" window with the tool type, tool name and possibly with certain pa‐
rameters.
The tool is added to the tool list with the specified name. If the cursor is
located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool is
loaded to this magazine location.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
Unloading tool on code carrier
azine and press the "Unload" and "On code carrier" softkeys.
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are then written to the code
carrier.
According to the appropriate setting, after being read out on the code carrier, the unloaded
tool on the code carrier is deleted from the NC memory.
Delete tool on code carrier
2. Position the cursor on the tool on code carrier that you want to delete.
3. Press the "Delete tool" and "On code carrier" softkeys.
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are written to the code carrier.
The tool is then deleted from the NC memory.
The deletion of the tool can be set differently, i.e. the "On code carrier" softkey is not available.
References
A description of the configuration options can be found in the following reference:
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
13.5.10 Managing a tool in a file

If, in the tool list settings, the "Permit tool in/out file" option is activated, then an additional entry
is available in the list of favorites.
Figure 13-9 New tool from file in the list of favorites
Creating a new tool from file
be created.
You may also position the cursor on an existing tool in the area of the NC
tool memory. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten.
The "New Tool - Favorites" window is opened.
4. Position the cursor on the entry "Tool from file" and press the "OK" softkey.
The "Load tool data" window opens.
5. Navigate to the required file and press the "OK" softkey.
The tool data is read from the file and is displayed in the "New tool from
file" window with the tool type, tool name and possibly with certain pa‐
rameters.
The tool is added to the tool list with the specified name. If the cursor is
located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool is
loaded to this magazine location.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.5 Tool list
The tool creation sequence can be defined differently.
Unloading a tool in a file
azine and press the "Unload" and "In file" softkeys.
3. Navigate to the required directory and press the "OK" softkey.
4. Enter the required file name in the "Name" field and press the "OK" soft‐
key.
The field is preassigned with the tool names
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are written to the file.
According to the corresponding setting, after having been read out, the unloaded tool is deleted
from the NC memory.
Deleting a tool in a file
2. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to delete.

3. Press the "Delete tool" and "In file" softkeys.
3. Navigate to the required directory and press the "OK" softkey.
4. Enter the required file name in the "Name" field and press the "OK" soft‐
key.
The field is preassigned with the tool names
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are written to the file. The
tool is then deleted from the NC memory.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.6 Tool wear
13.6 Tool wear
13.6.1 Tool wear

All parameters and functions that are required during operation are contained in the tool wear
list.
Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can measure this wear and
enter it in the tool wear list. The control then takes this information into account when calculating
the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent level of accuracy during
workpiece machining.
Monitoring types
You can automatically monitor the tools' working times via the workpiece count, tool life or
wear.
In addition, you can disable tools when you no longer wish to use them.
Note
Combination of monitoring types
You have the option to activate the monitoring of a tool by type or any combination of monitoring
types.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.6 Tool wear
Tool parameters

● The magazine location numbers
in the magazine.
W ● Transfer location
L
● Loader
B
● Loading station
BS
● Load position in the load magazine
* The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
*
selection ● Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (this applies only when a spindle
with dual gripper is used) as icons.
Type Tool type
Depending on the tool type (represented by an icon), certain tool offset
data is enabled.
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter
the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The
number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode charac‐
ters. The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Sister tool number (for replacement tool strategy).
Δ length X, Δ length Z Wear for length X or wear for length Z
- Cylindrical grinding
Δ length Y, Δ length Z Wear for length Y or wear for length Z
- Surface grinding
Δ cutting edge radius Tool wear of the cutting edge radius
(for grinding wheel - type 400, type 410; dresser - type 490, dressing roller
- type 495, dressing wheel - type 497)
ΔØ Tool wear of the diameter
(for 3D-probe - type 710; edge-probe - type 711; mono-probe - type 712;
L-probe - type 713; calibration tool - type 725)
Δ outer Ø Tool wear of the outer diameter
(for star-type probe - type 714)
TC Selection of tool monitoring
- by tool life (T)
- by count (C)
- by wear (W)
- wear, summed offset (S)
The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.6 Tool wear

Tool life Tool life
Workpiece count Number of workpieces
Wear Tool wear
Wear, summed offset *
*Parameter depends on
selection in TC
Setpoint Setpoint for tool life, workpiece count, or wear
Prewarning limit Specification of the tool life, workpiece count or wear at which a warning
is displayed.
G The tool is disabled when the checkbox is activated.
Further parameters

SC Summed offsets
Display of the existing setup offsets
Icons in the wear list
Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Tool type
Yellow triangle pointing The prewarning limit has been reached.

downward
Yellow triangle pointing The tool is in a special state.
upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tooltip provides a
short description.
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change position.
Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the load position.
(configurable)
Grinding
Manage tools
13.6 Tool wear
Procedure
2. Press the "Tool wear" softkey.
13.6.2 Reactivating a tool

You can replace disabled tools or make them ready for use again.
Preconditions
In order to be able to reactivate a tool, the monitoring function must be activated and a setpoint
must be stored.
Procedure
1. The tool wear list is opened.
2. Position the cursor on the disabled tool which you would like to reuse.
3. Press the "Reactivate" softkey.
The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the new tool life or work‐
piece count.
The disabling of the tool is cancelled.
Reactivating and positioning

When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, the selected tool's magazine
location will also be positioned at a loading point. You can exchange the tool.
Reactivation of all monitoring types

When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all the monitoring types
set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation.
References
Grinding
Manage tools
13.7 Tool data OEM

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection"
window appears after pressing the "Load" softkey.
Select the required load point and confirm with the "OK" softkey.
13.7 Tool data OEM

You have the option of configuring the list according to your requirements.
Depending on the machine configuration, grinding-specific parameters are displayed in the list
with OEM tool data.
Grinding tool-specific parameters

Min. radius Minimum radius
Limit value for the radius of the grinding wheel to monitor the geometry.
Actual radius Actual radius
Displays the sum of the geometry value, wear value and, if set, the base
dimension.
Min. width Minimum wheel width
Limit value for the width of the grinding wheel to monitor the geometry.
Actual width Actual wheel width
The width of the grinding wheel measured, for example, after the dressing.
Maximum speed Specifies the maximum speed
Max. peripheral velocity Specifies the maximum peripheral velocity
Wheel angle Specifies the angle of inclined grinding wheel
Spindle number Specifies the programmed spindle number (e.g. grinding wheel peripheral
velocity) and spindle to be monitored (e.g. wheel radius and width).
Param. rad.calc. Selects the parameter to calculate the radius

● Length X
● Length Y
● Length Z
● Radius
Chaining rule This parameter defines which tool parameters of tool cutting edge 2 (D2)
and tool cutting edge 1 (D1) have to be chained to one another. When the
value of a chained parameter is modified, then the other cutting edge is
automatically used when chaining the parameter.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.8 Magazine
References
● You can find more information on grinding tools in the following manual:
Function Manual, Extended Functions W4: Grinding-specific tool offset and monitoring
functions / SINUMERIK 840D sl
● Refer to the following document for more information on configuring OEM tool data:
Procedure
2. Press the "OEM tool" softkey.
3. Position the cursor on a grinding tool.
13.8 Magazine
Tools are displayed with their magazine-related data in the magazine list. Here, you can take
specific actions relating to the magazines and the magazine locations.
Individual magazine locations can be location-coded or disabled for existing tools.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.8 Magazine
Tool parameters

● Magazine location numbers
in the magazine.
● Transfer location
W
L ● Loader
B ● Loading station
LP ● Load position in the load magazine
The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
● Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (only when a spindle with dual
gripper is used) as icons
selection
Type Tool type
Depending on the tool type (represented by an icon), certain tool offset
data is enabled.
The icon identifies the position of the tool; this was selected when the tool
was created.
You have the option of changing the tool position or the tool type by press‐
ing the <SELECT> key.
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and number of the sister tool (ST). You
can enter the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The
number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode charac‐
ters. The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Sister tool number.
G Disabling the magazine location
Ü Marking a tool as oversized.
The tool occupies two half locations left, two half locations right, one half
location top and one half location bottom in a magazine.
P Fixed location coding
The tool is permanently assigned to this magazine location.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.8 Magazine
Further parameters

Magazine list icons
Icon/ Meaning
marking
Tool type
Yellow triangle pointing The prewarning limit has been reached.

downward
Yellow triangle pointing The tool is in a special state.
upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tooltip provides a
short description.
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change position.
Gray double arrow (con‐ The magazine location is positioned at the load position.
figurable)
Procedure
2. Press the "Magazine" softkey.
13.8.1 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.8 Magazine
Procedure
1. The magazine list is opened.
2. Place the cursor on the magazine location that you want to position onto
the load point.
3. Press the "Position magazine" softkey.
The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Loading Point
Selection" window appears after pressing the "Position magazine" softkey.
Select the desired loading point in this window and confirm your selection with "OK" to position
the magazine location at the loading point.
13.8.2 Relocating a tool

Tools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine location, which means
that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different
location.
When you are relocating a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You
may also directly specify an empty magazine location.
Procedure
1. The magazine list is opened.
2. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.
3. Press the "Relocate" softkey.
The "... relocate from location ... to location ..." window is displayed. The
"Location" field is pre-assigned with the number of the first empty maga‐
zine location.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the recommended magazine
location.
- OR -
Enter the required magazine number in the "...magazine" field and the
required magazine location number in "Location" field.
The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.8 Magazine
Several magazines
If you have set up several magazines, then the "...relocate from magazine... location... to..."
window appears after pressing the "Relocate" softkey.
Select the desired magazine and location, and confirm your selection with "OK" to load the
tool.
13.8.3 Unload/load/relocate all tools

You have the option of unloading all tools from the magazine list, loading them to the magazine
list and relocating them in the magazine list at the same time.
Preconditions
The following requirements must be satisfied so that the "Unload all", "Load all" or "Relocate
all" softkey is displayed and available:
● Magazine management is set up
● There is no tool in the buffer / in the spindle
Procedure
1. The magazine list opens.
2. Press the "Unload all" softkey.
- OR -
Press the "Load all" softkey.
- OR -
Press the "Relocate all" softkey.
A prompt is displayed as to whether you really want to unload, load or

relocate all tools.
3. Press the "OK" softkey to continue with unloading, loading or relocating
the tools.
The tools are loaded in the displayed order, i.e. unload, load or relocate
as specified by the sorting and the set filter.
4. Press the "Cancel" softkey if you wish to cancel the unloading operation.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.10 Filtering the tool management lists
13.9 Sorting tool management lists

When you are working with many tools, with large magazines or several magazines, it is useful
to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a specific
tool more easily in the lists.
Procedure
2. Press the "Tool list", "Tool wear" or "Magazine" softkey.
...
3. Press the ">>" and "Sort" softkeys.
The lists are displayed sorted numerically according to magazine location.
4. Press the "Acc. to type" softkey to display the tools arranged by tool type.
Identical types are sorted according to their radius.
Press the "Acc. to name" softkey to display the tool names in alphabetical
order.
The sister tool numbers are used to sort tools with the same names.
- OR -
Press the "Acc. to T number" softkey to display the tools sorted numeri‐
cally.
The list is sorted according to the specified criteria.

The filter function allows you to filter-out tools with specific properties in the tool management
lists.
For instance, you have the option of displaying tools during machining that have already
reached the prewarning limit in order to prepare the corresponding tools for equipping.
Grinding
Manage tools
Filter criteria
● Only display the first cutting edge
● Only tools that are ready to use
● Only tools with active code
● Only tools that have reached the prewarning limit
● Only locked tools
● Only tools with remaining quantity of ... to ...
● Only tools with residual tool life of ... to ...
● Only tools with unloading marking
● Only tools with loading marking
Note
Multiple selection
You have the option of selecting several criteria. You will receive an appropriate message if
conflicting filter options are selected.
You can configure OR logic operations for the various filter criteria.
References
A description of the configuration options is provided in
Procedure
...
Grinding
Manage tools
13.11 Specific search in the tool management lists
3. Press the ">>" and "Filter" softkeys.

The "Filter" window opens.
4. Activate the required filter criterion and press the "OK" softkey.
The tools that correspond to the selection criteria are displayed in the list.
The active filter is displayed in the window header.
13.11 Specific search in the tool management lists

There is a search function in all tool management lists, where you can search for the following
objects:
● Tools
– You enter a tool name. You can narrow down your search by entering a sister tool
number.
You have the option of only entering a part of the name as search term.
– You enter the D number and activate if necessary, the check box "Active D number".
● Magazine locations or magazines
If only one magazine is configured, then the search is made according to the magazine
location.
If several magazines are configured, then it is possible to search a specific magazine
location in a specific magazine or just to search in a specific magazine.
● Empty locations
The empty location search is realized using the tool size. The tool size is defined by the
number of half locations required to the right, left, top and bottom. All four directions are of
significance for a box magazine. For a chain magazine, a disk-type or a turret, only the half
locations to the right and left are of significance. The maximum number of half locations,
which a tool can occupy is limited to 7.
If the lists with the location type are used, then the empty location search is made using
the location type and location size.
You can enter the location type as numerical value or as text depending on the particular
configuration.
References
Grinding
Manage tools
13.12 Tool details
Procedure
...
3. Press the ">>" and "Search" softkeys.
4. Press the "Tool" softkey if you wish to search for a specific tool.
- OR -
Press the "Magazine location" softkey if you wish to search for a specific
magazine location or a specific magazine.
- OR -
Press the "Empty location" softkey if you wish to search for a specific
empty location.
The search is started.
6. Press the "Search" softkey again if the tool that was found is not the tool
that was being searched for.
The search term is kept and with "OK" you start the search for the next
tool that corresponds to the entry.
7. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the search.
13.12 Tool details
13.12.1 Displaying tool details

The following parameters of the selected tool can be displayed using softkeys in the "Tool
Details" window.
● Tool data (Page 274)
● Grinding data (Page 275)
● Cutting edge data (Page 276)
● Monitoring data (Page 276)
Grinding
Manage tools
13.12 Tool details
Procedure
1. The tool list, the wear list, the OEM tool list or the magazine is open.
...
2. Position the cursor to the desired tool.

3. If you are in the tool list or in the magazine, press the ">>" and "Details"
softkey.
- OR -
If you are in the wear list or OEM tool list, press the "Details" softkey.
The "Tool Details" window is displayed.

The tool data is displayed in the list.
4. Press the "Grinding data" softkey if you want to display the grinding data.
5. Press the softkey "Cutting edge data" if you wish to display the cutting
edge data.
6. Press the softkey "Monitoring data" if you wish to display the monitoring
data.
13.12.2 Tool data

The "Tool Details" window provides the following data on the selected tool when the "Tool
data" softkey is active.
Parameter Meaning
Magazine location The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location number in the magazine.
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter the name as text or
number.
ST Sister tool number (for sister tool strategy)
D quantity Number of created cutting edges
Tool state A Activate tool
F Tool enabled
G Block tool
M Measure tool
V Reaching the prewarning limit
Grinding
Manage tools
13.12 Tool details
Parameter Meaning
W Tool being changed
P Tool in fixed location
The tool is permanently assigned to this magazine location
I Tool has been in use
Tool size Standard Tool does not require an additional location in a magazine.
Oversize The tool occupies two half locations left, two half locations right, one half
location top and one half location bottom in a magazine.
Special size
Left Number of half locations to the left of the tool
Right Number of half locations to the right of the tool
Tool OEM parameters Freely available pa‐
1-6 rameters
13.12.3 Grinding data

The "Tool Details" window provides the following data on the selected tool when the "Tool
Parameter Meaning
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter the name as
text or number.
ST Sister tool number (for replacement tool strategy)
Minimum wheel radius Specifies the minimum wheel radius
Actual wheel radius Specifies the actual wheel radius.
Minimum wheel width Specifies the minimum wheel width
Actual wheel width Specifies the actual wheel width
Maximum speed Specifies the maximum speed
Maximum Specifies the maximum peripheral velocity.
peripheral velocity
Angle of inclined wheel Specifies the angle of inclined wheel
Spindle number Specifies the spindle number
Parameter for calculating the Selected parameter for the radius calculation
radius
Chaining rule This parameter defines which tool parameters of tool cutting edge 2 (D2) and tool cutting
edge 1 (D1) have to be chained to one another.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.12 Tool details
13.12.4 Cutting edge data

The "Tool Details" window provides the following data on the selected tool when the "Cutting
edge data" softkey is active.
Parameter Description
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter the name
as text or number.
Tool type Tool icon with type number and current cutting edge position
Cylindrical grinding
Length X or diameter Length Z or diameter
Geometry Geometry data, length X Geometry data, length Z
Wear Tool wear for length X Tool wear for length Z
Surface grinding
Length X Length Z or diameter Length Y or diameter
Geometry Geometry data, length X Geometry data, length Z Geometry data, length Y
Wear Tool wear for length X Tool wear for length Z Tool wear for length Y
Radius
Geometry Cutting edge radius
Wear Wear of the cutting edge radius
Ø
Geometry Tool diameter
Wear Tool wear, diameter
Cutting edge OEM
parameters 1 - 2
13.12.5 Monitoring data

The "Tool Details" window provides the following data on the selected tool when the "Monitoring
Parameter Meaning
Magazine location The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location number in the magazine. When
there is only one magazine, only the location number is displayed.
Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the sister tool number. You can enter the name as text
or number.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.13 Changing a tool type
Parameter Meaning
Monitoring type T - tool life
C - count
W - wear
The wear monitoring is configured via machine data.

Please note the specifications of the machine manufacturer.
Actual value
Tool life, count and wear Actual value for tool life, count or wear
Setpoint
Tool life, count and wear Setpoint for tool life, count or wear
Prewarning limit
Tool life, count and wear Specification of the tool life, the count or wear at which a warning is displayed.
Monitoring OEM parame‐
ters 1 - 8
13.13 Changing a tool type
Procedure
1. The tool list, the wear list, the OEM tool list or the magazine opens.
...
2. Position the cursor in the column "Type" of the tool that you wish to
change.
3. Press the <SELECT> key.
The "Tool Types - Favorites" window opens.
4. Select the desired tool type in the list of favorites or select by pressing
the "Grinders 400-499" or " Spec. tool 700-900" softkey.
The new tool type is accepted and the corresponding icon is displayed in
the "Type" column.
Grinding
Manage tools
13.14 Settings for tool lists

In the "Settings" window you have the following options to set the view in the tool lists:
● Display only one magazine in "Magazine sort"
– You can limit the display to one magazine. The magazine is displayed with the assigned
buffer magazine locations and the tools not loaded.
– You may set via a configuration if you want to jump to the next magazine by clicking
softkey "Magazine selection" or if the dialog "Magazine selection" is switched over to
any magazine.
● Display only spindle in buffer.
In order to display only the spindle location during operation, the remaining locations of the
buffer are hidden.
● Permits tool in/out file
– When creating a new tool, the tool data can be loaded from a file.
– When deleting or unloading a tool, the tool data can be backed up in a file.
● Switch on adapter-transformed view
– Geometry lengths and the application offsets are displayed in a transformed manner in
the tool list.
– In the tool wear list, the wear length and the sum offsets are displayed in a transformed
manner.
References
For further information about configuring the settings, please refer to the following references:
Procedure
...
Grinding
Manage tools
3. Press the "Continue" and "Settings" softkeys.
4. Activate the corresponding check box for the desired setting.
Grinding
Manage tools
Grinding
Managing programs 14
14.1 Overview
You can access programs at any time via the Program Manager for execution, editing, copying,
or renaming.
Programs that you no longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.
NOTICE
Execution from USB-FlashDrive
Direct execution from a USB-FlashDrive is not recommended.
There is no protection against contact problems, falling out, breakage through knocking or
unintentional removal of the USB-FlashDrive during operation.
Disconnecting it during operation will result in the stopping of the machining and thus to the
workpiece being damaged.
Storage for programs

Possible storage locations are:
● NC
● Local drive
● Network drives
● USB drives
● FTP drives
● V24
Software options
To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the "Additional 256 MB HMI
user memory on CF card of the NCU" option (not for SINUMERIK Operate on
PCU50 or PC/PG).
Grinding
Managing programs
14.1 Overview
Data exchange with other workstations

You have the following options for exchanging programs and data with other workstations:
● USB drives (e.g. USB-FlashDrive)
● Network drives
● FTP drives
Choosing storage locations

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage location that contains the directories
and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the passive
file system data can be displayed, additional softkeys can be displayed.
The "USB" softkey is only operational when an external storage medium is connected (e.g.
USB-FlashDrive on the USB port of the operator panel).
Displaying documents
You can display documents on all drives of the program manager (e.g. in the local drive or
USB) and via the data tree of the system data. Various data formats are supported:
● PDF
● HTML
It is not possible to preview HTML documents.
● Various graphic formats (e.g. BMP or JPEG)
● DXF
Software options
You require the "DXF reader" option in order to display DXF files.
Note
FTP drive
It is not possible to preview documents on the FTP drive.
Structure of the directories

In the overview, the icons in the left-hand column have the following meaning:
Directory
Program
All directories have a plus sign when the program manager is called for the first time.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.1 Overview
Figure 14-1 Program directory in the program manager
The plus sign in front of empty directories is removed after they have been read for the first
time.
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information:
● Name
The name can be a maximum of 24 characters long.
Permissible characters include all upper-case letters (without accents), digits, and
underscores.
● Type
Directory: DIR or WPD
Dressing program: DRS directory
Program: MPF
Subprogram: SPF
Initialization programs: INI
Job lists: JOB
Tool data: TOA
Magazine assignment: TMA
Zero points: UFR
R parameters: RPA
Global user data/definitions: GUD
Setting data: SEA
Protection zones: PRO
Sag: CEC
● Size (in bytes)
● Date/time (of creation or last change)
Active programs
Selected, i.e. active programs are identified with a green icon.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.1 Overview
Figure 14-2 Active program shown in green
14.1.1 NC memory
The complete NC working memory is displayed along with all workpieces, main programs and
subprograms as well as dressing programs.
You can create further subdirectories here.
Procedure
2. Press the "NC" softkey.
14.1.2 Local drive

Workpieces, main and subprograms as well as dressing programs that are saved in the user
memory of the CF card or on the local hard disk are displayed.
For archiving, you have the option of mapping the structure of the NC memory system or to
create a separate archiving system.
You can create any number of subdirectories here, in which you can store any files (e.g. text
files with notes).
Software options
To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the "Additional HMI user mem‐
ory on CF card of the NCU" option (not for SINUMERIK Operate on PCU50 or
PC/PG).
Grinding
Managing programs
14.1 Overview
Procedure
2. Press the "Local drive" softkey.
14.1.3 Creating an NC directory on the local drive

On the local drive, you have the option of mapping the directory structure of the NC memory.
This also simplifies the search sequence.
Creating Directories
1. The local drive is selected.
2. Position the cursor on the main directory.
3. Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

The "New Directory" window opens.
4. In the "Name" entry field, enter "mpf.dir", "spf.dir" and "wks.dir" and press
the "OK" softkey.
The directories "Part programs", "Subprograms" and "Workpieces" are
created below the main directory.
14.1.4 USB drives

USB drives enable you to exchange data. For example, you can copy to the NC and execute
programs that were created externally.
NOTICE
Interruption of operation
Direct execution from the USB FlashDrive is not recommended, because machining can be
undesirably interrupted, therefore resulting in workpiece damage.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.1 Overview
Partitioned USB-FlashDrive (only 840D sl and TCU)

If the USB-FlashDrive has several partitions, these are displayed in a tree structure as a
subtree (01,02,...).
For EXTCALL calls, enter the partition (e.g. USB:/02/... or //ACTTCU/FRONT/02/... or //
ACTTCU/FRONT,2/... or //TCU/TCU1/FRONT/02/...)
You can also configure any partition (e.g. //ACTTCU/FRONT,3).
Procedure
2. Press the "USB" softkey.
Note
The "USB" softkey can only be operated when a USB-FlashDrive is inserted in the front
interface of the operator panel.
14.1.5 FTP drive

The FTP drive offers you the following options - to transfer data, e.g. part programs, between
your control system and an external FTP server.
You have the option of archiving any files in the FTP server by creating new directories and
subdirectories.
Note
Selecting a program / execution
It is not possible to select a program directly on the FTP drive, and change to execution in the
Precondition
User name and password have been set up in the FTP server.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.2 Opening and closing the program
Procedure
2. Press the "FTP" softkey.

When selecting the FTP drive for the first time, a login window is displayed.
3. Enter the user name and password and press the "OK" softkey to log into
the FTP server.
The content of the FTP server with its folders is displayed.
4. Press the "Log out" softkey after the required data processing has been
completed.
The connection to the FTP server is disconnected. In order to reselect
the FTP drive, you must log on again.
14.2 Opening and closing the program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, open the program in the editor.
With programs that are in the NCK memory, navigation is already possible when opening. The
program blocks can only be edited when the program has been opened completely. You can
follow the opening of the program in the dialog line.
With programs that are opened via local network, USB FlashDrive or network connections,
navigation is only possible when the program has been opened completely. A progress
message box is displayed when opening the program.
Note
Channel changeover in the editor
When opening the program, the editor is opened for the currently selected channel. This
channel is used to simulate the program.
If you change over a channel in the editor, this does not influence the editor. Only when closing
the editor do you change into the other channel.
Procedure
2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the program
that you would like to edit.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.3 Executing a program
- OR -
- OR -
- OR -
Double-click the program.
The selected program is opened in the "Editor" operating area.
4. Now make the necessary program changes.
5. Press the "NC Select" softkey to switch to the "Machine" operating area
and begin execution.
When the program is running, the softkey is deactivated.
Closing the program
Press the ">>" and "Exit" softkeys to close the program and editor again.
- OR -
If you are at the start of the first line of the program, press the <Cursor left> key
to close the program and the editor.
To reopen a program you have exited with "Close", press the "Program" key.
Note
A program does not have to be closed in order for it to be executed.

When you select a program for execution, the control switches automatically to the "Machine"
operating area.
Program selection
Select the workpieces (WPD), main programs (MPF) or subprograms (SPF) by placing the
cursor on the desired program or workpiece.
Grinding
Managing programs
For workpieces, the workpiece directory must contain a program with the same name. This
program is automatically selected for execution (e.g. when you select the workpiece
SHAFT.WPD, the main program SHAFT.MPF is automatically selected).
If an INI file of the same name exists (e.g. SHAFT.INI), it will be executed once at the first part
program start after selection of the part program. Any additional INI files are executed in
accordance with machine data MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE.
MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE=0:
The INI file with the same name as the selected workpiece is executed. For example, when
you select SHAFT1.MPF, the SHAFT1.INI file is executed upon <CYCLE START>.
MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE=1:
All files of type SEA, GUD, RPA, UFR, PRO, TOA, TMA and CEC which have the same name
as the selected main program are executed in the specified sequence. The main programs
stored in a workpiece directory can be selected and processed by several channels.
Procedure
2. Select the desired storage location, and position the cursor on the work‐
piece/program that you would like to execute.
The control switches automatically into the "Machine" operating area.

- OR -
If the selected program is already opened in the "Program" operating area,
press the "Execute NC" softkey.
Press the <CYCLE START> key.
Machining of the workpiece is started.
Note
Program selection from external media
If you execute programs from an external drive (e.g. network drive), you require the "Execution
from external storage (EES)" software option.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.4 Creating a directory / program / job list
14.4.1 Creating a new directory

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. At all archive
locations, you can create subdirectories for this purpose in a directory.
In a subdirectory, in turn, you can create programs and then create program blocks for them.
Note
Restrictions relating to name and path lengths
● Directory names must end in .DIR or .WPD. The maximum name length is 28 characters
including the extension.
All letters (except accented characters), numbers, and underscores are permitted for name
assignment. These names are automatically converted to upper-case letters.
This limitation does not apply for work on USB/network drives.
● The maximum path length for nested workpieces, including all supplementary characters,
is 100 characters.
Procedure
2. Select your chosen storage medium, i.e. a local or USB drive.
3. If you want to create a new directory in the local network, place the cursor
on the topmost folder and press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.
4. Enter the desired directory name and press the "OK" softkey.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.4.2 Creating a new workpiece

You can set up various types of files such as main programs, initialization files, tool offsets,
etc. in a workpiece.
Note
Workpiece directories
You have the option of nesting tool directories. You must note that the length of the call line is
restricted. You will be informed if the maximum number of characters is reached when entering
the workpiece name
Procedure
2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to create a workpiece.
3. Press the "New" softkey.

The "New Workpiece" window appears.
4. If necessary, select a template if any are available.
5. Enter the desired workpiece name and press the "OK" softkey.

You can use any letters (except accented), digits or the underscore sym‐
bol (_).
The directory type (WPD) is set by default.
A new folder with the workpiece name will be created.
The "New G Code Program" window will open.
6. Press the "OK" softkey again if you want to create the program.
The program will open in the editor.
14.4.3 Creating a new G code program

You can create G code programs and then render G code blocks for them in a directory/
workpiece.
Grinding
Managing programs
Procedure
2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to store the program.
The "New G Code Program" window appears.
4. If necessary, select a template if any are available.

5. Select the file type (MPF or SPF).
If you are in the NC memory and have selected the file "Subprograms"
or "Part programs", you can create only one subprogram (SPF) or main
program (MPF) respectively.
6. Enter the desired program name and press the "OK" softkey.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.

You can use all letters (with the exception of special characters, language-
specific special characters, Asian or Cyrillic characters), numbers and
underscores (_). The program type is appropriately specified.
14.4.4 Creating a new dressing program

You can create dressing programs and then render G code blocks for them in a directory/
workpiece.
Procedure
2. Select a storage location and place the cursor on the "Dressing programs"
folder.
The "New Dressing Program" window opens.

The "DRS" file type is set as default.
Grinding
Managing programs
4. Enter the desired program name and press the "OK" softkey.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters long.

You can use all letters (with the exception of special characters, language-
specific special characters, Asian or Cyrillic characters), numbers and
underscores (_). The program type is appropriately specified.
14.4.5 Storing any new file

In each directory or subdirectory you can create a file in any format that you specify.
Note
File extensions
In the NC memory, the extension must have 3 characters, and DIR or WPD are not permitted.
In the NC memory, you can create the following file types under a workpiece using the "Any"
softkey.
Procedure
2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder
in which you would like to create the file.
Grinding
Managing programs
3. Press the "New" and "Any" softkeys.

The "Any New Program" window appears
4. Select a file type from the "Type" selection field (for example, "Definitions
GUD") and enter the name of the file to be created when you have se‐
lected a workpiece directory in the NC memory.
The file automatically has the selected file format.
- OR -
Enter a name and file format for the file to be created (e.g. My_Text.txt).
You can use any letters (except accented), digits or the underscore sym‐
bol (_).
14.4.6 Creating a job list

For every workpiece, you can create a job list for extended workpiece selection.
In the job list, you specify instructions for program selection in different channels.
Syntax
The job list contains the SELECT instructions.
SELECT <program> CH=<channel number> [DISK]
The SELECT instruction selects a program for execution in a specific NC channel. The selected
program must be loaded into the working memory of the NC. The DISK parameter enables
the selection of external execution (CF card, USB data carrier, network drive).
● <Program>
Absolute or relative path specification of the program to be selected.
Examples:
– //NC/WCS.DIR/SHAFT.WPD/SHAFT1.MPF
– SHAFT2.MPF
● <Channel number>
Number of the NC channel in which the program is to be selected.
Example:
CH=2
● [DISK]
Optional parameter for programs that are not in the NC memory and are to be executed
"externally".
Example:
SELECT //remote/myshare/shaft3.mpf CH=1 DISK
Grinding
Managing programs
Comment
Comments are identified in the job list by ";" at the start of the line or by round brackets.
Template
You can select a template from Siemens or the machine manufacturer when creating a new
job list.
Executing a workpiece
If the "Select" softkey is selected for a workpiece, the syntax of the associated job list is checked
and then executed. The cursor can also be placed on the job list for selection.
Procedure
2. Press the "NC" softkey, and in directory "Workpieces" place the cursor
on the program for which you wish to create a job list.
3. Press the "New" and "Any" softkeys.
The "Any New Program" window opens.
4. Select entry "Job list JOB" from the "Type" selection field and enter a
name and press the "OK" softkey.
14.4.7 Creating a program list

You can also enter programs in a program list that are then selected and executed from the
PLC.
The program list may contain up to 100 entries.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.5 Creating templates
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Program list" softkey.
The "Prog.-list" window opens.
3. Place the cursor in the desired line (program number).

4. Press the "Select program" softkey.
The "Programs" window opens. The data tree of the NC memory with
workpiece, part program and subprogram directory is displayed.
5. Place the cursor on the desired program and press the "OK" softkey.
The selected program is inserted in the first line of the list together with
its path.
- OR -
Enter the program name directly in the list.
If you are making entries manually, check that the path is correct (e.g. //
NC/WKS.DIR/MEINPROGRAMM.WPD/MEINPROGRAMM.MPF).
//NC and the extension (.MPF) may be added automatically.
With multi-channel machines, you can specify in which channel the pro‐
gram is to be selected.
6. To remove a program from the list, place the cursor on the appropriate
line and press the "Delete" softkey.
- OR -
To delete all programs from the program list, press the "Delete all" softkey.
14.5 Creating templates

You can store your own templates to be used for creating part programs and workpieces.
These templates provide the basic framework for further editing.
You can use them for any part programs or workpieces you have created.
Storage location for templates

The templates used to create part programs or workpieces are stored in the following
directories:
HMI Data/Templates/Manufacturer/Part programs or Workpieces
HMI Data/Templates/User/Part programs or Workpieces
Grinding
Managing programs
14.6 Searching directories and files
Procedure
3. Position the cursor on the file that you wish to store as a template and
press the "Copy" softkey.
4. Select the directory in which you want to store the data - "Part programs"
or "Workpieces" - and press the "Paste" softkey.
Stored templates can be selected when a part program or a workpiece is
being created.
14.6 Searching directories and files

You have the possibility of searching in the Program Manager for certain directories and files.
Note
Search with place holders
The following place holders simplify the search:
● "*": Replaces any character string
● "?": Replaces any character
If you use place holders, only directories and files are found that correspond exactly to the
search pattern.
Without place holders, directories and files are found that contain the search pattern at an
arbitrary position.
Search strategy
The search is made in all of the selected directories and their subdirectories.
If the cursor is positioned on a file, then a search is made from the higher-level directory.
Note
Searching in opened directories
Open the closed directories for a successful search.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.7 Displaying the program in the Preview.
Procedure
2. Select the storage location in which you wish to perform the search and
then press the ">>" and "Search" softkeys.
The "Find File" window opens.
3. Enter the desired search term in the "Text" field.

Note: When searching for a file with place holders, enter the complete
name with extension (e.g. DRILLING.MPF).
4. When required, activate the "Observe upper and lower case" checkbox.
6. If a corresponding directory or file is found, then it is marked.

7. Press the "Continue search" and "OK" softkeys if the directory or the file
does not correspond to the required result.
- OR -
14.7 Displaying the program in the Preview.

You can show the content on a program in a preview before you start editing.
Procedure
2. Select a storage location and place the cursor on the relevant program.
3. Press the ">>" and "Preview window" softkeys.
The "Preview: ..." window opens.
4. Press the "Preview window" softkey again to close the window.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.8 Selecting several directories/programs
14.8 Selecting several directories/programs

You can select several files and directories for further processing. When you select a directory,
all directories and files located beneath it are also selected.
Note
Selected files
If you have selected individual files in a directory, then this selection is canceled when the
directory is closed.
If the complete directory with all of the files included in it are selected, then this selection is
kept when closing the directory.
Procedure
2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the file or
directory from which you would like your selection to start.
The softkey is active.
4. Select the required directories/programs with the cursor keys or mouse.

5. Press the "Select" softkey again to deactivate the cursor keys.
Canceling a selection
By reselecting an element, the existing selection is canceled.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program
Selecting via keys
Key combination Meaning

Renders or expands a selection.
You can only select individual elements.
Renders a consecutive selection.
A previously existing selection is canceled.
Selecting with the mouse
Key combination Meaning

Left mouse Click on element: The element is selected.
A previously existing selection is canceled.
Left mouse + Expand selection consecutively up to the next click.
Pressed
Left mouse + Expand selection to individual elements by clicking.
An existing selection will expand to include the element you clicked.
Pressed

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time
by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program
blocks.
The capability of copying and pasting directories and programs can also be used to exchange
data with other systems via USB/network drives (e.g. USB FlashDrive).
Grinding
Managing programs
Copied files or directories can be pasted in a different location.
Note
You can only paste directories on local drives and on USB or network drives.
Note
Write protection
If the current directory is write-protected for the user, then the function is not offered.
Note
When you copy directories, any missing endings are added automatically.
All letters (except accented characters), numbers, and underscores are permitted for name
assignment. The names are automatically converted to upper-case letters, and extra dots are
converted to underscores.
Example
If the name is not changed during the copy procedure, a copy is created automatically:
MYPROGRAM.MPF is copied to MYPROGRAM__1.MPF. The next time it is copied, it is
changed to MYPROGRAM__2.MPF, etc.
If the files MYPROGRAM.MPF, MYPROGRAM__1.MPF, and MYPROGRAM__3.MPF already
exist in a directory, MYPROGRAM__2.MPF is created as the next copy of MYPROGRAM.MPF.
Procedure
directory which you would like to copy.
3. Press the "Copy" softkey.
4. Select the directory in which you want to paste your copied directory/pro‐
gram.
5. Press the "Paste" softkey.
If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directory,

you are are informed. You are requested to assign a new name, otherwise
the directory/program is assigned a name by the system.
If the name contains illegal characters or is too long, a prompt will appear
for you to enter a permissible name.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.10 Deleting a program/directory
6. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey if you want to overwrite existing
directories/programs.
- OR -
Press the "No overwriting" softkey if you do not want to overwrite already
existing directories/programs.
- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the copy operation is to be continued with the
next file.
- OR -
Enter another name if you want to paste the directory/program under
another name and press the "OK" softkey.
Note
Copying files in the same directory
You cannot copy files to the same directory. You must copy the file under a new name.
14.10 Deleting a program/directory

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer using to maintain a
clearer overview of your data management. Back up the data beforehand, if necessary, on an
external data medium (e.g. USB FlashDrive) or on a network drive.
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data and zero point data and
subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.
Procedure
directory that you would like to delete.
3. Press the ">>" and "Delete" softkeys.
A prompt appears as to whether you really want to delete the file or di‐
rectory.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.11 Changing file and directory properties
4. Press the "OK" softkey to delete the program/directory.
- OR -.
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the process.
14.11 Changing file and directory properties

Information on directories and files can be displayed in the "Properties for ..." window.
Information on the creation date is displayed near the file's path and name.
You can change names.
Changing access rights

Access rights for execution, writing, listing and reading are displayed in the "Properties"
window.
● Execute: Is used for the selection for execution
● Write: Controls the changing and deletion of a file or a directory
For NC files, you have the option to set the access rights from keyswitch 0 to the current access
level, to be set separately for each file.
If an access level is higher than the current access level, it cannot be changed.
For external files (e.g. on a local drive), the access rights are displayed to you only if settings
have been executed for these files by the machine manufacturer. They cannot be changed via
the "Properties" window.
Settings for the access rights to directories and files

Via a configuration file and MD 51050, access rights of the directories and file types of the NC
and user memory (local drive) can be changed and pre-assigned.
References
A detailed description of the configuration can be found in the following documentation:
Grinding
Managing programs
14.12 Creating drives
Procedure
1. Select the program manager.
directory whose properties you want to display or change.
3. Press the ">>" and "Properties" softkeys.

The "Properties from ..." window appears.
...
4. Enter any necessary changes.

Note: You can save changes via the user interface in the NC memory.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to save the changes.
14.12.1 Overview
Up to 21 connections to so-called logical drives (data carriers) can be configured. These drives
can be accessed in the "Program manager" and "Startup" operating areas.
The following logical drives can be set up:
● USB interface
● Network drives
● CompactFlash card
● CompactFlash card of the NCU, only for SINUMERIK Operate in the NCU (for 840D sl)
● Local hard disk of the PCU, only for SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU (for 840D sl)
Software option - for 840D sl

In order to use the CompactFlash card as data carrier, you require the "Additional
HMI user memory on CF card of the NCU" option (not for SINUMERIK Operate on
PCU or PC).
Grinding
Managing programs
Software option - for 828D

You will need the "Manage network drives" option to manage additional drives via
Ethernet.
Note
The USB interfaces of the NCU are not available for SINUMERIK Operate and can therefore
not be configured (with 840D sl).
14.12.2 Setting up drives

The "Set Up Drives" window is available in the "Start-up" operating area for configuring the
softkeys in the Program Manager.
Note
Reserved softkeys
Softkeys 4, 7 and 16 are not available to be freely configured.
File
The created configuration data is stored in the "logdrive.ini" file. This file is located in the /user/
sinumerik/hmi/cfg directory.
Grinding
Managing programs
General information
Entry Meaning
Drives 1 - 24
Type No drive No drive defined.
NC program memory Access to the NC memory.
USB local Access to the USB interface of the active op‐
erator unit.
USB global All of the TCUs in the plant network can ac‐
cess the USB memory medium.
NW Windows Network drive in Windows systems.
NW Linux Network drive in Linux systems.
Local drive Local drive.
Hard disk or user memory on the Compact‐
Flash card.
FTP Access to an external FTP server.
The drive cannot be used as global part pro‐
gram memory.
User cycles Access to the user cycle directory of the Com‐
pactFlash card.
Manufacturer cycles Access to the manufacturer cycle directory of
the CompactFlash card.
Drive Windows Access to a local PCU/PC directory.
Specifications for USB
Entry Description
Device Names of the TCU to which the USB storage
medium is connected, e.g. tcu1. The NCU
must already know the TCU name.
Connection Front USB interface that is located at the front of the
operator panel.
X203/X204 USB interface X203/X204 that is located at the
rear of the operator panel.
X204 For SIMATIC Thin Client the USB interface is
X204.
X212/X213 TCU20.2/20.3
X20 OP 08T
X60.P1/P2/P3/P4 PCU
Symbolic Symbolic drive name.
Additional parameters under Details
Grinding
Managing programs
Entry Description
Partition Partition number on the USB storage medium,
e.g. 1 or all.
If a USB hub is being used, then specify the
USB port of the hub.
USB path Path to the USB hub.
Note:
This value is not currently evaluated.
Specifications for local drives
Entry Description
Assignment of the names under Details
Use drive as: LOCAL_DRIVE The activation of the checkbox assigns the
CF_CARD symbolic name to the drive.
SYS_DRIVE If an assignment exists already for the drive,
no change can be made.
All checkboxes are active as preassignment.
Specifications for network drives
Entry Description
Computer name Logical name of the server or the IP address.
Release name Only for network drives in Name, under which the network drive was re‐
Windows systems. leased
Path Start directory.
The path is specified relative to the released
directory.
User name Enter the user name and the corresponding
Password password for which the directory is enabled on
the server.
The password is displayed in encoded form
as string of "*" characters and is stored in the
"logdrive.ini" file.
Maximum 12 characters can be entered (let‐
ters, digits, underscore).
The names NC, GDIR and FTP are reserved.
They are also used to label the softkey if a
softkey text is not specified.
Grinding
Managing programs
Specifications for FTP
Entry Description
Computer name Logical name of the FTP server or the IP ad‐
dress.
Path Start directory on the FTP server.
The path is specified relative to the home di‐
rectory.
User name User names and the associated password for
Password login to the FTP server.
The password is displayed in encoded form
as string of "*" characters and is stored in the
"logdrive.ini" file.
Port Interface for the FTP connection. The default
port is 21.
Disconnect After a disconnect timeout, the FTP connec‐
tion is disconnected. The timeout can be be‐
tween 1 and 150 s. 10 s is the default setting.
Additional specifications when using the "Execution from external storage (EES)" function
Entry Description
Enable drive Only for "Drive Windows The drive is enabled in the network. A user
(PCU)" type name is required.
The checkbox must be activated if the local
drive serves as global part program memory.
Global part program mem‐ Only for local drives, net‐ The checkbox indicates that all system nodes
ory work drives and global have access to the configured logical drive.
USB drives The nodes can directly execute part programs
from the drive.
The setting can only be changed under De‐
tails.
Use this drive for EES pro‐ Only for USB drives Allows a local USB storage medium to be
gram execution used to execute programs using EES.
Grinding
Managing programs
Entry Description
Windows user name Only for USB drives, local User name and the associated password for
Windows password drives and local directo‐ release of the configured drive.
ries The specifications from the "Global Settings"
window are used as default setting.
Global part program mem‐ Only for local drives, net‐ The checkbox defines whether all system no‐
ory work drives and global des have access to the configured logical
USB drives drive.
Only one drive can be selected as global part
program memory (GDIR). If another drive has
already been defined as GDIR and the check‐
box is activated, the original setting is deleted.
Specifications for the configured softkey
Entry Description
Access level Assign access rights to the connections: From
access level 7 (keyswitch position 0) to access
level 1 (manufacturer).
The particular assigned access level applies
to all operating areas.
Softkey text Two lines are available as labeling text for the
softkey. %n is accepted as a line separator.
If the first line is too long, then a line break is
automatically inserted.
If a space is present, it is taken as a line sep‐
arator.
For language-dependent softkey texts, the
text ID is entered, which is used to search in
the text file.
If nothing is specified in the entry field, then
the symbolic drive name is used as softkey
text.
Softkey icon No icon No icon is displayed on the softkey.
sk_usb_front.png File names of the icon displayed on the soft‐
key.
sk_local_drive.png
sk_network_drive_ftp.png
Text file slpmdialog File for language-dependent softkey text. If

Text context SlPmDialog nothing is specified in the input fields, the text
appears on the softkey as was specified in the
"Softkey text" input field.
Grinding
Managing programs
Procedure
2. Press the "HMI" and "Log. drive" softkeys.

The "Set Up Drives" window opens.
3. Select the softkey that you want to configure.
4. To configure softkeys 9 to 16 or softkeys 17 to 24, click the ">> level"

softkey.
5. To allow entry fields to be edited, press the "Change" softkey.
6. Select the data for the corresponding drive or enter the necessary data.
7. Press the "Details" softkey if you want to enter additional parameters.
Press the "Details" softkey to return to the "Set Up Drives" window.
The entries are checked.
A window with the appropriate message opens if the data is incomplete
or incorrect. Acknowledge the message with "OK" softkey.
If you press the "Cancel" softkey, then all of the data that has not been
activated is rejected.
9. Restart the control in order to activate the configuration and to obtain the
softkeys in the "Program Manager" operating area.
Entering the default settings for drive release
Note
This function is available only on Windows systems when the "Execution from external storage
(EES)" software option is activated.
2. Press the "HMI" and "Log. drive" softkeys.

The "Set Up Drives" window opens.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.13 EXTCALL
3. Press the "Glob. settings" softkey.
4. Enter the user name and the associated password for the configured
drives to be released.
The specifications are transferred as default setting for the Windows re‐
lease.
If you press the "Cancel" softkey, then all of the data that has not been
activated is rejected.
14.13 EXTCALL
The EXTCALL command can be used to access files on a local drive, USB data carriers or
network drives from a part program.
The programmer can set the source directory with the setting data SD $SC42700
EXT_PROG_PATH and then specify the file name of the subprogram to be loaded with the
EXTCALL command.
Supplementary conditions
The following supplementary conditions must be taken into account with EXTCALL calls:
● You can only call files with the MPF or SPF extension via EXTCALL from a network drive.
● The files and paths must comply with the NCK naming conventions (max. 25 characters
for the name, 3 characters for the identifier).
● A program is found on a network drive with the EXTCALL command if
– with SD $SC42700 EXT_PROG_PATH the search path refers to the network drive or a
directory contained on the network drive. The program must be stored directly on that
level, no subdirectories are searched.
– without SD $SC42700 the correct location of the program is specified in the EXTCALL
call itself by means of a fully qualified path that can also point to a subdirectory of the
network drive.
● For programs that were generated on external storage media (Windows system) observe
upper- and lower-case syntax.
Note
Maximum path length for EXTCALL
The path length must not exceed 112 characters. The path comprises the contents of the
setting data (SD $SC42700) and the path data for EXTCALL call from the part program.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.13 EXTCALL
Examples of EXTCALL calls

The setting data can be used to perform a targeted search for the program.
● Call of USB drive on TCU (USB storage device on interface X203), if SD42700 is empty:
e.g. EXTCALL "//TCU/TCU1 /X203 ,1/TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Call of USB drive on TCU (USB storage device on interface X203), if SD42700 "//TCU/
TCU1 /X203 ,1" contains: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
● Call of the USB front connection (USB-FlashDrive), if SD $SC 42700 is empty: e.g.
EXTCALL "//ACTTCU/FRONT,1/TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Call of USB front connection (USB-FlashDrive), if SD42700 "//ACTTCU/FRONT,1"
contains: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
● Call of network drive, if SD42700 is empty: e.g. EXTCALL "//computer name/enabled drive/
TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Call of the network drive, if SD $SC42700 "//Computer name/enabled drive" contains:
EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
● Use of the HMI user memory (local drive):
– On the local drive, you have created the directories part programs (mpf.dir),
subprograms (spf.dir) and workpieces (wks.dir) with the respective workpiece
directories (.wpd):
SD42700 is empty: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
The same search sequence is used on the CompactFlash card as in the NCK part
program memory.
– On the local drive, you have created your own directory (e.g. my.dir):
Specification of the complete path: e.g. EXTCALL "/card/user/sinumerik/data/prog/
my.dir/TEST.SPF"
A search is performed for the specified file.
Note
Abbreviations for local drive, CompactFlash card and USB front connection
As abbreviation for the local drive, the CompactFlash card and the USB front connection
you can use the abbreviation LOCAL_DRIVE:, CF_CARD: and USB: (e.g. EXTCALL
"LOCAL_DRIVE:/spf.dir/TEST.SPF").
Alternatively, you can also use the abbreviations CF_Card and LOCAL_DRIVE.
Software options
To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the "Additional HMI user mem‐
ory on CF card of the NCU" option (not for SINUMERIK Operate on PCU50 /
PC).
Grinding
Managing programs
14.14 Execution from external storage (EES)
NOTICE
Possible interruption when executing from USB FlashDrive
Direct execution from a USB-FlashDrive is not recommended.
There is no protection against contact problems, falling out, breakage through knocking or
unintentional removal of the USB-FlashDrive during operation.
Disconnecting it during operation will result in immediate stopping of the machining and, thus,
to the workpiece being damaged.
Processing EXTCALL calls can be enabled and disabled.
14.14 Execution from external storage (EES)

The "Execution from external storage" function allows you to directly execute any size of part
program from an appropriately configured drive. The behavior is the same as that for execution
from the NC part program memory without the restrictions that apply to "EXTCALL".
Software option
You require the "CNC user memory extended" software option in order to use this
function in the user memory (100 MB) of the CompactFlash card.
Software option
In order to use this function without restrictions, e.g. for a network drive or a USB
drive, you require the "Execution from external storage (EES)" software option.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
You have the option of processing the G code programs saved on the configured external
drives as usual in the editor.
When executing the G code programs, you obtain a current block display, as usual. You can
edit the programs directly in the Reset state.
In addition to the current block display, you can also show a basic block display. You can make
corrections with the "Program correction" function, as usual.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.15 Backing up data
14.15.1 Generating an archive in the Program Manager

You have the option of archiving individual files from the NC memory and the local drive.
Archive formats
You have the option of saving your archive in the binary and punched tape format.
Save target
The archive folder of the system data in the "Startup" operating area as well as USB and
network drives are available as save target.
Procedure
2. Select the storage location for the file/files to be archived.
3. In the directories, select the required file from which you want to create
an archive.
- OR -
If you want to back up several files or directories, press the "Select" soft‐
key and, using the cursor keys or the mouse, select the required directo‐
ries or files.
4. Press the ">>" and "Archive" softkeys.
5. Press the "Generate archive" softkey.

The "Generate Archive: Select archiving" window opens.
6. Position the cursor to the required storage location, press the "Search"
softkey, enter the required search term in the search dialog and press
the "OK" softkey if you wish to search for a specific directory or subdirec‐
tory.
- OR -
Select the required storage location, press the "New directory" softkey,
enter the required name in the "New directory" window and press the
"OK" softkey to create a directory.
Grinding
Managing programs
7. Press "OK".
The "Generate Archive: Name" window opens.
9. Select the format (e.g. archive ARC (binary format) for 840 sl or archive
ARD for 828D), enter the desired name and press the "OK" softkey.
A message informs you if archiving was successful.
14.15.2 Generating an archive via the system data

If you only want to backup specific data, then you can select the desired files directly from the
data tree and generate an archive.
Archive formats
You have the option of saving your archive in the binary and punched tape format.
You can display the contents of the selected files (XML, ini, hsp, syf files, programs) in a
preview.
You can display information about the file, such as path, name, date of creation and change,
in a Properties window.
Precondition
The access rights depend on the relevant areas and range from protection level 7 (key switch
position 0) to protection level 2 (password: Service).
Storage locations
● CompactFlash card under
/user/sinumerik/data/archive, or
/oem/sinumerik/data/archive
● All configured logical drives (USB, network drives)
Software option
In order to save archives on the CompactFlash card in the user area you require
the option "Additional HMI user memory on CF card of NCU".
NOTICE
Possible data loss when using USB flash drives
USB-FlashDrives are not suitable as persistent memory media.
Grinding
Managing programs
Procedure
1. Select the "Startup" operating area.

The data tree opens.
3. In the data tree, select the required files from which you want to generate
an archive.
- OR -
If you want to back up several files or directories, press the "Select" soft‐
key and, using the cursor keys or the mouse, select the required directo‐
ries or files.
4. If you press the ">>" softkey, further softkeys are displayed on the vertical
bar.
5. Press the "Preview window" softkey.
The contents of the selected file are displayed in a small window. Press
the "Preview window" softkey again to close the window.
6. Press the "Properties" softkey.
Information about the selected file is displayed in a small window. Press
the "OK" softkey to close the window.

Enter the required search term in the search dialog and press the "OK"
softkey if you wish to search for a specific directory or subdirectory.
8. Press the "Archive" and "Generate archive" softkeys.
The "Generate Archive: Select Storage Location" window opens.
The "Archive" folder with the subfolders "User" and "Manufacturer" as
well as the storage media (e.g. USB) are displayed.
9. Select the required location for archiving and press the "New directory"
softkey to create a suitable subdirectory.
10. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.
The directory is created below the selected folder.
The "Generate Archive: Name" window opens.
Grinding
Managing programs
12. Select the format (e.g. archive ARC (binary format) for 840D sl and/or
Archive ARC for 828D), enter the desired name and press the "OK" soft‐
key to archive the file(s).
A message informs you if archiving was successful.
13. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the message and end the archiving
operation.
An archive file in the .ARC (840D sl) or .ARD (828D) format type is created
in the selected directory.
14.15.3 Reading in an archive in the Program Manager

In the "Program Manager" operating area, you have the option of reading in archives from the
archive folder of the system data as well as from configured USB and network drives.
Software option
In order to read-in user archives in the "Program Manager" operating area, you
require the option "Additional HMI user memory on CF Card of NCU" (not for
840D sl / SINUMERIK Operate on PCU50 / PC).
Procedure
2. Press the "Archive" and "Read in archive" softkeys.

The "Read in archive: Select archive" window opens.
3. Select the archive storage location and position the cursor on the
required archive.
Note: When the option is not set, the folder for user archives is only
displayed if the folder contains at least one archive.
- OR -
Press the "Search" softkey and in the search dialog, enter the name
of the archive file with file extension (*.arc) for 840D sl or with file
extension (*.ard) for 828D if you wish to search for a specific archive
4. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey to overwrite existing files.
...
Grinding
Managing programs
- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if you do not want to overwrite
already existing files.
- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the read-in operation is to be continued
with the next file.
The "Read In Archive" window opens and a progress message box
appears for the read-in process.
You will then obtain a "Read error log for archive" in which the
skipped or overwritten files are listed.
5. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the read-in process.
14.15.4 Read in archive from system data

If you want to read in a specific archive, you can select this directly from the data tree.
Procedure
3. In the data tree below the "Archive" directory, in the "User" folder,
select the file that you wish to read in.
4. Press the "Read in" softkey.
5. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey to overwrite existing files.
...
- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if you do not want to overwrite
already existing files.
- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the read-in operation is to be continued
with the next file.
The "Read In Archive" window opens and a progress message box
appears for the read-in process.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.16 Setup data
You will then obtain a "Read error log for archive" in which the
skipped or overwritten files are listed.
6. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the read-in process.
14.16 Setup data
14.16.1 Backing up setup data

Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point settings.
You can use this option, for example, to backup the required tools and zero point data for a
specific G code program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will
then have quick access to the relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily
into the tool management system using this option.
Note
Backing up setup data from part programs
Setup data from part programs can only be backed up if they have been saved in the
"Workpieces" directory.
For part programs, which are located in the "Part programs" directory, "Save setup data" is
not listed.
Backing up data
Data
Tool data ● No
● Complete tool list
Magazine assignment ● Yes
● No
Zero points ● No
The selection box "Basis zero point" is hidden
● All
Basic zero points ● No
● Yes
Directory The directory is displayed, in which the selected program is located.
File name Here you have the option of changing the suggested file names.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.16 Setup data
Note
Magazine assignment
You can only read out the magazine assignments if your system provides support for loading
and unloading tool data to and from the magazine.
Procedure
2. Position the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.
...
4. Press the "Setup data" softkey.

The "Backup setup data" window opens.
5. Select the data you want to back up.
6. When required, change the specified name of the originally selec‐
ted program here in the "File name" field.
The setup data will be set up in the same directory in which the
selected program is stored.
The file is automatically saved as INI file.
Note
Program selection
If a main program as well as an INI file with the same name are in a directory, when selecting
the main program, initially, the INI file is automatically started. In this way, unwanted tool data
can be changed.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.16 Setup data
14.16.2 Reading-in set-up data

When reading-in, you can select which of the backed-up data you wish to read-in:
● Tool data
● Magazine assignment
● Zero points
● Basic zero point
Tool data
Depending on which data you have selected, the system behaves as follows:
● Complete tool list
First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.
● All tool data used in the program
If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you
can choose between the following options.
Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing tools
will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if existing tools must not be over‐
written.
Already existing tools are skipped, without you receiving any queries.
- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if already existing tools are not to be overwritten.
For an already existing tool, you receive a query.
Selecting loading point

For a magazine, if more than one loading point was set-up, using the "Select loading point"
softkey, you have the option of opening a window in which you can assign a loading point to
a magazine.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.17 V24
Procedure
2. Position the cursor on the file with the backed-up tool and zero point data
(*.INI) that you wish to re-import.
3. Press the <Cursor right> key
- OR -
Double-click the file.
The "Read-in setup data" window opens.
4. Select the data (e.g. magazine assignment) that you wish to read-in.
14.17 V24
14.17.1 Reading-in and reading-out archives via a serial interface
Availability of the V24 serial interface

You have the option of reading-out and reading-in archives in the "Program manager"
operating area as well as in the "Startup" operating area via the V24 serial interface.
● SINUMERIK Operate on the NCU:
The softkeys for the V24 interface are available as soon as an option module is connected
and the slot is occupied.
● SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU:
The softkeys for the V24 interface are always available.
Reading-out archives
The files to be sent (directories or individual files) are zipped in an archive (*.arc). If you send
an archive (*.arc), this is sent directly without being additionally zipped. If you have selected
an archive (*.arc) together with an additional file (e.g. directory), then these are zipped into a
new archive and are then sent.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.17 V24
Reading-in archives
Only archives can be read-in via the V24 interface. These are transferred and then
subsequently unzipped.
Note
Start-up archive
If you read in a start-up archive via the V24 interface, then this is immediately activated.
Externally processing the punched tape format

If you wish to externally process an archive, then generate this in the punched tape format.
Procedure
1. Select the "Program manager" operating area, and press the "NC"
or "Local drive" softkey.
...
- OR -
Select the "Startup" operating area and press the "System data"
softkey.
Reading-out archives
2. Select the directories or the files that you wish to send via V24.
4. Press the "V24 send" softkey.
- OR -
Reading in an archive
Press the "V24 receive" softkey if you wish to read-in files via V24.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.17 V24
14.17.2 Setting V24 in the program manager
V24 setting Meaning

Protocol The following protocols are supported for transfer via the V24 interface:
● RTS/CTS (default setting)
● Xon/Xoff
Transfer It is also possible to use a secure protocol for data transfer (ZMODEM
protocol).
● Normal (default setting)
● secure
For the selected interface, secure data transfer is set in conjunction
with handshake RTS/CTS.
Baud rate Transfer rate: Transfer rates of up to 115 kbaud can be selected. The
baud rate that can be used depends on the connected device, the cable
length and the general electrical conditions.
● 110
● ....
● 19200 (default)
● ...
● 115200
Archive format ● Punched tape format (default setting)
● Binary format (PC format)
V24 settings (details)
Interface ● COM1
Parity Parity bits are used for error detection: The parity bits are added to the
coded characters to make the number of positions set to "1" an uneven
number (uneven parity) or to an even number (even parity).
● None (default setting)
● Odd
● Even
Stop bits Number of stop bits for asynchronous data transfer.
● 1 (default)
● 2
Data bits Number of data bits for asynchronous data transfer.
● 5 bits
● ...
● -8 bits (default setting)
XON (hex) Only for punched tape format
XOFF (hex) Only for punched tape format
Grinding
Managing programs
14.17 V24
V24 setting Meaning

End of data transfer (hex) Only for punched tape format
Stop with end of data transfer character
The default setting for the end of data transfer character is (HEX) 1A
Time monitoring (sec) Time monitoring
For data transfer problems or at the end of data transfer (without end of
data transfer character) data transfer is interrupted after the specified
number of seconds.
The time monitoring is controlled by a time generator (clock) that is star‐
ted with the first character and is reset with each transferred character.
The time monitoring can be set (seconds).
Procedure
2. Press the "NC" or "Local drive" softkey.
4. Select the "V24 settings" softkey.

The "Interface: V24" window is opened.
5. The interface settings are displayed.
6. Press the "Details" softkey if you wish to view and process addi‐
tional settings for the interface.
Grinding
Managing programs
14.17 V24
Grinding
Alarm, fault, and system messages 15
15.1 Displaying messages
PLC and part program messages may be issued during machining.
These message will not interrupt the program execution. Messages provide information with
regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and
are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle.
Overview of messages
You can display all issued messages.
The message overview contains the following information:
● Date
● Message number
is only displayed for PLC messages
● Message text
Procedure
1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.
2. Press the "Messages" softkey.

The "Messages" window appears.
15.2 Displaying alarms

If faulty conditions are recognized in the operation of the machine, then an alarm will be
generated and, if necessary, the machining will be interrupted.
The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed
information on the error cause.
CAUTION
Dangers for persons and machines
Please check the situation in the plant on the basis of the description of the active alarm(s).
Eliminate the cause/s of the alarm/s and acknowledge it/them as instructed.
Failure to observe this warning will place your machine, workpiece, stored settings and
possibly even your own safety at risk.
Grinding
Alarm, fault, and system messages
15.2 Displaying alarms
Alarm overview
You can display all upcoming alarms and acknowledge them.
The alarm overview contains the following information:
● Date and time
● Cancel criterion
specifies the key or softkey used to acknowledge the alarm
● Alarm number
● Alarm text
Procedure
2. Press the "Alarm list” softkey.

The "Alarms" window appears.
All pending alarms are displayed.
The "Hide SI alarms" softkey is displayed if safety alarms are pending.
3. Press the "Hide SI alarms" softkey if you do not wish to display SI alarms.
4. Position the cursor on an alarm.
...
5. Press the key that is specified as acknowledgement symbol to delete the

alarm.
- OR -
Press the "Delete HMI alarm" softkey to cancel an HMI alarm.
- OR -
Press the "Acknowledge alarm" softkey to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ
type (alarm number as of 800000).
The softkeys are activated when the cursor is on the corresponding alarm.
Grinding
15.3 Displaying an alarm log
Acknowledgement symbols
Symbol Meaning
Turn the unit off and back on (main switch), or press NCK POWER ON.
Press the <RESET> key.
Press the <ALARM CANCEL> key.

- OR -
Press the "Acknowl. HMI alarm" softkey.
...
Press the key provided by the manufacturer.
15.3 Displaying an alarm log

A list of all the alarms and messages that have occurred so far are listed in the "Alarm Log"
window.
Up to 500 administered, incoming and outgoing events are displayed in chronological order.
Procedure
2. Press the "Alarm log" softkey.
The "Alarm Log" window opens.

All of the coming and going events - that have occurred since the HMI
was started - are listed.
Grinding
15.5 Creating screenshots
3. Press the "Display new" softkey to update the list of displayed alarms/
messages.
4. Press the "Save Log" softkey.
The log that is currently displayed is stored as text file alarmlog.txt in the
system data in directory card/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/alarm_log.
15.4 Sorting, alarms, faults and messages

If a large number of alarms, messages or alarm logs are displayed, you have the option of
sorting these in an ascending or descending order according to the following criteria:
● Date (alarm list, messages, alarm log)
● Number (alarm list, messages)
As a consequence, for every extensive lists, you can obtain the required information faster.
Procedure
2. Press the softkey "Alarm list", "Messages" or "Alarm log" to display the
requested messages and alarms.
...
3. Press the "Sort" softkey.

The list of entries is sorted in ascending order according to date, i.e. the
most recent information is at the end of the list.
4. Press the softkey "Descending" to sort the list in a descending order.
The most recent event is shown at the beginning of the list.
5. Press the "Number" softkey if you wish to sort the alarm list or the list with
messages according to numbers.
6. Press the "Ascending" softkey if you wish to display the list in an ascend‐
ing order.

You can create screenshots of the current user interface.
Each screenshot is saved as a file and stored in the following folder:
/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/screenshot
Grinding
Procedure
Ctrl + P Press the <Ctrl+P> key combination.

A screenshot of the current user interface is created in .png format.
The file names assigned by the system are in ascending order from
"SCR_SAVE_0001.png" to "SCR_SAVE_9999.png". You can create up to 9,999
screenshots.
Copy file
3. Open the folder specified above, and select the required screenshots.
4. Press the "Copy" softkey.
- OR -
Press the "Cut" softkey.
5. Open the required archive directory, e.g. on a USB flash drive and press
the "Paste" softkey.
Note
You can also copy the screenshots using "WinSCP" to a Windows PC
(for 840D sl).
Note
If you wish to view the screenshots, then you can open the files in SINUMERIK Operate. On
a Windows PC, you can open the data using a graphic program, e.g. "Office Picture Manager".
(for 840D sl)
Grinding
15.6 PLC and NC variables
15.6.1 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables

Changes can only be made to the NC/PLC variables with the appropriate password.
WARNING
Incorrect parameterization
Changes in the states of NC/PLC variables have a considerable influence on the machine.
Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger life and cause damage to the machine.
In the "NC/PLC Variables" window, enter the NC system variables and PLC variables that you
want to monitor or change in the list:
● Variable
Address for NC/PLC variable.
Incorrect variables have a red background and are displayed with a # character in the value
column.
● Comment
Any comment on the variable.
The columns can be displayed and hidden.
● Format
Specify the format in which the variable is to be displayed.
The format can be specified (e.g. floating point).
● Value
Displays the actual value of the NC/PLC variables.
PLC variables
Inputs Input bit (Ex), input byte (EBx), input word (EWx), input double word (EDx)
Outputs Output bit (Ax), output byte (ABx), output word (AWx), output double word
(ADx)
Bit memory Memory bit (Mx), memory byte (MBx), memory word (MWx), memory double
word (MDx)
Times Time (Tx)
Counters Counter (Cx)
Data Data block (DBx): Data bit (DBXx), data byte (DBBx), data word (DBWx),
data double word (DBDx)
Formats
B Binary
H Hexadecimal
D Decimal without sign
+/-D Decimal with sign
Grinding
Formats
F Floating point (for double words)
A ASCII character
Notation examples
Permissible notation for variables:
● PLC variables: EB2, A1.2, DB2.DBW2
● NC variables:
– NC system variables: Notation $AA_IM[1]
– User variables / GUD: Notation GUD/MyVariable[1,3]
– OPI notation: /CHANNEL/PARAMETER/R[u1,2]
Inserting variables
The start value for "Filter/Search" of variables differs. For example, to insert the variable $R[0],
enter the following start value:
● The start value is 0 if you filter according to "System variables".
● The start value is 1 if you filter according to "All (no filter)". In this case, all signals are
displayed and shown in the OPI notation.
The GUD from the machine data is only displayed in the Search window for the variable
selection when the associated definition file has been activated. Otherwise, the sought
variables must be entered manually, e.g. GUD/SYG_RM[1]
The following machine data is representative for all variable types (INT, BOOL, AXIS, CHAR,
STRING): MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL
Note
Display of NC/PLC variables
● System variables can be dependent on the channel. When the channel is switched over,
the values from the selected channel are displayed.
● For user variables (GUD), it is not necessary to make a specification according to global
or channel-specific GUD. The first element of a GUD array starts with index 0 as for NC
variables.
● Using the tooltip, you can display the OPI notation for NC system variables (except for
GUD).
Servo variables
Servo variables can only be selected and displayed at "Diagnostics" → "Trace".
Grinding
Changing and deleting values
2. Press the "NC/PLC variables" softkey.
- OR -
2. Press the "PLC" and "NC/PLC variab." softkeys.
The "NC/PLC Variables" window opens.

3. Position the cursor in the "Variable" column and enter the required vari‐
able.
4. Press the <INPUT> key.
The operand is displayed with the value.
The "NC/PLC Variables: Details" window opens. The information for "Var‐
iable", "Comment" and "Value" is displayed in full length.
6. Position the cursor in the "Format" field and select the required format
with <SELECT>.
7. Press the "Display comments" softkey.

The "Comments" column is displayed. You have the option of creating
comments or editing existing comments.
Press the "Display comments" softkey once again to hide the column.
8. Press the "Change" softkey if you would like to edit the value.
The "Value" column can be edited.
9. Press the "Insert variable" softkey if you wish to select a variable from a
list of all existing variables and insert this.
The "Select Variable" window opens.
10. Press the "Filter/search" softkey to restrict the display of variables (e.g.
to mode group variables) using the "Filter" selection box and/or select the
desired variable using the "Search" input box.
Press the "Delete all" softkey if you would like to delete the entries for the
operands.
11. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the changes or the deletion.
Grinding
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the changes.
Changing operands
Depending on the type of operand, you can increment or decrement the address by 1 place
at a time using the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys.
Note
Axis names as index
For axis names, the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys do not act as index, e.g. for
$AA_IM[X1].
Examples
DB97.DBX2.5
Result: DB97.DBX2.6
$AA_IM[1]
Result: $AA_IM[2]
MB201
Result: MB200
/Channel/Parameter/R[u1,3]
Result: /Channel/Parameter/R[u1,2]
15.6.2 Saving and loading screen forms

You have the option of saving the configurations of the variables made in the "NC/PLC
variables" window in a screen form that you reload again when required.
Editing screen forms

If you change a screen form that has been loaded, then this is marked using with * after the
screen form name.
The name of a screen form is kept in the display after switching-off.
Procedure
1. You have entered values for the desired variables in the "NC/PLC varia‐
bles" window.
2. Press the ">>" softkey.
Grinding
15.7 Version
3. Press the "Save screen" softkey.

The "Save screen: Select archiving" window opens.
4. Position the cursor on the template folder for variable screen forms in
which your actual screen form should be saved and press the "OK" soft‐
key.
The "Save screen: Name" window opens.
5. Enter the name for the file and press the "OK" softkey.
A message in the status line informs you that the screen form was saved
in the specified folder.
If a file with the same name already exists, they you will receive a prompt.
6. Press the "Load screen" softkey.
The "Load screen" window opens and displays the sample folder for the
variable screen forms.
7. Select the desired file and press the "OK" softkey.
You return to the variable view. The list of all of the predefined NC and
PLC variables is displayed.
15.7 Version
15.7.1 Displaying version data

The following components with the associated version data are specified in the "Version data"
window:
● System software
● Basic PLC program
● PLC user program
● System extensions
● OEM applications
● Hardware
Information is provided in the "Nominal version" column as to whether the versions of the
components deviate from the version supplied on the CompactFlash Card.
The version displayed in the "Actual version" column matches the version of the
CF card.
The version displayed in the "Actual version" column does not match the version
of the CF card.
You may save the version data. Version displays saved as text files can be further processed
as required or sent to the hotline in the event of an error.
Grinding
15.7 Version
Procedure
1. Select the "Diagnosis" operating area.
2. Press the "Version" softkey.

The "Version Data" window appears.
Data from the available components are displayed.
3. Select the component for which you would like more information.
4. Press the "Details" softkey, in order to receive more exact information on

the components displayed.
15.7.2 Save information

All the machine-specific information of the control is combined in a configuration via the user
interface. You can save machine-specific information on the drives that have been set-up.
Procedure

It takes some time to call the version display. While the version data is
being determined a progress message box and the appropriate text are
displayed in the dialog line.
3. Press the "Save" softkey.
The "Save Version Information: Select Archive" window opens. The fol‐
lowing storage locations are offered depending on the configuration:
● Local drive
● Network drives
● USB
● Version data (archive: Data tree in the "HMI data" directory)
4. Then press the "New directory" softkey if you wish to create your own
directory.
Grinding
15.8 Logbook
5. Press the "OK" softkey. The directory is created.
6. Press the "OK" softkey again to confirm the storage location.
The "Save Version Information: Name" window opens. The following op‐
tions are available:
● In the "Name:" text field, the file name is pre-assigned with <Machine
name/no.>+<CF-card number>. "_config.xml" or "_version.txt" is
automatically attached to the file names.
● In text field "Comment", you can add a comment that is stored with
the configuration data.
Select the following data via a checkbox:
● Version data (.TXT): Output of pure version data in text format.
● Configuration data (.XML): Output of configuration data in XML format.
The configuration file contains the data you entered under Machine
identity, the license requirements, the version information and the
logbook entries.
7. Press the "OK" softkey to start the data transfer.
15.8 Logbook
15.8.1 Overview
The logbook provides you with the machine history in an electronic form.
If service is carried out on the machine, this can be electronically saved. This means that it is
possible to obtain a picture about the "History" of the control and to optimize service.
Editing the logbook

You can edit the following information:
● Editing information on the machine identity
– Machine name/No.
– Machine type
– Address data
● Make logbook entries (e.g. "filter replaced")
● Deleting logbook entries
Note
Deleting logbook entries
Up to the 2nd commissioning, you have the option to delete all of the entered data up to
the time of the first commissioning.
Grinding
15.8 Logbook
Output of the logbook

You have the possibility of exporting the logbook by generating a file using the "Save version"
function in which the logbook is contained as section.
15.8.2 Displaying and editing the logbook
Procedure
3. Press the "Logbook" softkey.

The "Machine logbook" window opens.
Editing end customer data
You have the option of changing the address data of the end customer
using the "Change" softkey.
- OR -
Using the "Clean up" softkey, you can delete all logbook entries.
All entries, except the date of the first commissioning, are deleted and
the softkey "Clean up" is deactivated.
Note
As soon as the 2nd commissioning has been completed, the "Clean up" softkey to delete the
logbook data is no longer available.
15.8.3 Making a logbook entry

Using the "New logbook entry" window to make a new entry into the logbook.
Grinding
15.8 Logbook
Enter your name, company and department and a brief description of the measure taken or a
description of the fault.
Note
If you wish to make line breaks in the "fault diagnostics/measure" field, use the key combination
<ALT> + <INPUT>.
The date and entry number are automatically added.
Sorting the entries

The logbook entries are displayed numbered in the "machine logbook" window.
More recent entries are always added at the top in the display.
Procedure
1. The logbook is opened.

2. Press the "New entry" softkey.
The "New logbook entry" window opens.
3. Enter the required data and press the "OK" softkey.
You return to the "Machine logbook" window and the entry is displayed
below the machine identity data.
Note
Up to the end of the 2nd commissioning, you have the option to delete the logbook entries up
to the time of the first commissioning using the "Clean up" softkey.
Searching for a logbook entry

You have the option for searching for specific entries using the search function.
1. The "Machine logbook" window is opened.

2. Press the "Search..." softkey and enter the desired term in the search
form. You can make a search according to date/time, company name/
department or according to fault diagnostics/measure.
The cursor is positioned on the first entry that corresponds to the search
term.
3. Press the "Continue search" softkey if the entry found is not the one that
you are looking for.
Grinding
15.9 Remote diagnostics
Additional search option
Press the "Go to Beginning" softkey to start the search at the latest entry.
Press the "Go to End" softkey to start the search at the oldest entry.
15.9.1 Setting remote access

You can influence the remote access to your control in the "Remote diagnostics (RCS)"
window.
Here, rights for all types of remote control are set. The selected rights are defined from the
PLC and using the setting at the HMI.
The HMI can restrict the rights specified from the PLC, but however, cannot extend the rights
beyond the PLC rights.
If the settings made permit access from outside, then this is still dependent on a manual or
automatic confirmation.
Rights for remote access

The "Specified from PLC" field shows the access rights for remote access or remote monitoring
specified from the PLC.
In the "Selected in the HMI" selection box, you have the possibility of setting rights for remote
control:
● Do not permit remote access
● Permit remote monitoring
● Permit remote control
The combination of the settings in the HMI and in the PLC show the valid status as to whether
access is permitted or not. This is displayed in the "Resulting from" line.
Settings for the confirmation dialog box

If the settings made for "Specified from the PLC" and "Selected in the HMI" permit access from
outside, then this is however, still dependent on either a manual or automatic confirmation.
As soon as a remote access is permitted, at all of the active operating stations, a query dialog
box is displayed for the operator at the active operating station to either confirm or reject an
access.
Grinding
For the case that there is no local operation, then the control behavior can be set for this
particular scenario. You define how long this window is displayed and whether, after the
confirmation has expired, the remote access is automatically rejected or accepted.
Display of the state
Remote monitoring active
Remote control active
If remote access is active, using these icons you will be informed in the status line as to whether
a remote access is presently active or whether only monitoring is permitted.
Procedure
2. Press the "Remote diag." softkey.

The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.
3. Press the "Change" softkey.
The "Selected in the HMI" is activated.
4. If you desire remote control, select the entry "Permit remote control".
In order that remote control is possible, the entry "Permit remote control"
must be specified in the fields "Specified from the PLC" and "Selected in
the HMI".
5. Enter new values in the group "Behavior for confirming remote access"
if you wish to change the behavior for confirming remote access.
The settings are accepted and saved.
References
Grinding
15.9.2 Permit modem

You can permit remote access to your control via a teleservice adapter IE connected at X127.
Software option
You need the "MC Information System RCS Host" option to display the "Permit
modem" softkey.
Procedure
1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.
2. Press the "Permit modem" softkey.

Access to the control via modem is enabled so that a connection can be
established.
3. To block access again, press the "Permit modem" softkey again.
15.9.3 Request remote diagnostics

Using the "Request remote diagnostics" softkey, from your control you have the option of
actively requesting remote diagnostics with your machinery construction OEM.
The access via modem must be enabled if the access is to be made via modem.
When requesting remote diagnostics, you obtain a window with the corresponding pre-
assigned data and values of the ping service. If required, you can ask your machine
manufacturer for this data.
Data Meaning
IP address IP address of the remote PC
Port Standard port that is intended for remote diagnostics
Send duration Duration of the request in minutes
Send interval Cycle in which the message is sent to the remote PC in seconds
Ping send da‐ Message for the remote PC
ta
Grinding
Procedure
1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.
2. Press the "Request remote diagnostics" softkey.

The "Request remote diagnostics" window is displayed.
3. Press the "Change" softkey if you would like to edit the values.

The request is sent to the remote PC.
References
15.9.4 Exit remote diagnostics
Procedure
1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" is opened and it is possible that remote

monitoring or remote access is active.
2. Block the modem access if access via modem is to be blocked.
- OR -
In the "Remote Diagnostics (RCS)" window, reset the access rights to
"Permit no remote access".
Grinding
Teaching program 16
16.1 Teaching in programs
The "Teach in" function can be used to edit programs in the "AUTO" and "MDA" modes. You
can create and modify simple traversing blocks.
You traverse the axes manually to specific positions in order to implement simple machining
sequences and make them reproducible. The positions you approach are applied.
In "AUTO" teach-in mode, the selected program is "taught".
In "MDA" teach-in mode, you teach to the MDA buffer.
External programs, which may have been rendered offline, can therefore be adjusted and
modified according to need.
16.2 General sequence
General sequence
Select the desired program block, press the relevant softkey "Teach po‐
sition", "Rap. tra. G01", "Straight line G1" or "Circ. interm. pos. CIP", and
"Circ. end pos. CIP" and traverse the axes to change the program block.
You can only overwrite a block with a block of the same type.
- OR -
Position the cursor at the desired point in the program, press the relevant
softkey "Teach position", "Rap. tra. G01", "Straight line G1" or "Circ. in‐
terp. pos. CIP", and "Circ. end pos. CIP" and traverse the axes to insert
a new program block.
In order for the block to be inserted, the cursor must be positioned in an
empty line using the cursor key and input key.
Press the "Accept" softkey to teach-in the modified or new program block.
Note
All defined axes are "taught in" in the first teach-in block. In all additional teach-in blocks, only
axes modified by axis traversing or manual input are "taught in".
If you exit teach-in mode, this sequence begins again.
Grinding
Teaching program
16.3 Inserting a block
Operating mode or operating area switchover

If you switch to another operating mode or operating area in teach-in mode, the position
changes will be canceled and teach-in mode will be cleared.
16.3.1 Teaching in positions

You have the option of traversing the axes and writing the current actual values directly to a
new position block.
Requirement
"AUTO" mode: The program to be edited is selected.
Proceed as follows
3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.
4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.
5. Traverse the axes to the relevant position.

6. Press the "Teach position" softkey.
A new program block with the current actual position values will be cre‐
ated.
Grinding
Teaching program
16.3.2 Input parameters for teach-in blocks
Parameters for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0, G1, and circle end position CIP
X Approach position in X direction
Y Approach position in Y direction
Z Approach position in Z direction
F Feedrate (mm/r; mm/min) - only for teach-in of G1 and circle end position CIP
Parameters for teach-in of circle intermediate position CIP
I Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction
J Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction
K Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction
Transition types for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0 and G1, and ASPLINE
The following parameters are offered for the transition:
G60 Exact stop
G64 Corner rounding
G641 Programmable corner rounding
G642 Axis-specific corner rounding
G643 Block-internal corner rounding
G644 Axis dynamics corner rounding
Motion types for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0 and G1

The following motion parameters are offered:
CP Path-synchronous
PTP Point-to-point
PTPG0 Only G0 point-to-point
Grinding
Teaching program
16.4 Teach-in via Windows
Transition behavior at the beginning and end of the spline curve

The following motion parameters are offered:
Start
BAUTO Automatic calculation
BNAT Curvature is zero or natural
BTAN Tangential
End
EAUTO Automatic calculation
ENAT Curvature is zero or natural
ETAN Tangential
16.4.1 General
The cursor must be positioned on an empty line.
The windows for pasting program blocks contain input and output fields for the actual values
in the WCS. Depending on the default setting, selection fields with parameters for motion
behavior and motion transition are available.
When first selected, the input fields are empty unless axes were already traversed before the
window was selected.
All data from the input/output fields are transferred to the program via the "Accept" softkey.
Precondition
"AUTO" mode: The program to be edited is selected.
Procedure
1 Select the "Machine" operating area.
Grinding
Teaching program
5. Use the cursor and input keys to position the cursor at the desired point
in the program.
If an empty row is not available, insert one.
6. Press the softkeys "Rap. tra. G0", "Straight line G1", or Circ. interm. pos.
CIP" and "Circ. end pos. CIP".
The relevant windows with the input fields are displayed.
7. Traverse the axes to the relevant position.

A new program block will be inserted at the cursor position.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel your input.
16.4.2 Teach in rapid traverse G0

You traverse the axes and teach-in a rapid traverse block with the approached positions.
Note
Selection of axes and parameters for teach-in
You can select the axes to be included in the teach-in block in the "Settings" window.
You also specify here whether motion and transition parameters are offered for teach-in.
16.4.3 Teach in straight G1

You traverse the axes and teach-in a machining block (G1) with the approached positions.
Note
Selection of axes and parameters for teach-in
You also specify here whether motion and transition parameters are offered for teach-in.
Grinding
Teaching program
16.5 Editing a block
16.4.4 Teaching in circle intermediate and circle end point CIP

Enter the intermediate and end positions for the circle interpolation CIP. You teach-in each of
these separately in a separate block. The order in which you program these two points is not
specified.
Note
Make sure that the cursor position does not change during teach-in of the two positions.
You teach-in the intermediate position in the "Circle intermediate position CIP" window.
You teach-in the end position in the "Circle end position CIP" window.
The intermediate or interpolation point is only taught-in with geometry axes. For this reason,
at least 2 geometry axes must be set up for the transfer.
Note
Selection of axes for teach in
16.5 Editing a block

You can only overwrite a program block with a teach-in block of the same type.
The axis values displayed in the relevant window are actual values, not the values to be
overwritten in the block.
Note
If you wish to change any variable in a block in the program block window other than the
position and its parameters, then we recommend alphanumerical input.
Requirement
The program to be processed is selected.
Grinding
Teaching program
16.6 Deleting a block
Procedure
5. Click the program block to be edited.

6. Press the relevant softkey "Teach position, "Rap. tra. G0", "Straight line
G1", or "Circ. interm. pos. CIP", and "Circ. end pos. CIP".
The relevant windows with the input fields are displayed.
7. Traverse the axes to the desired position and press the "Accept" softkey.
The program block is taught with the modified values.
- OR -
16.6 Deleting a block

You have the option of deleting a program block entirely.
Requirement
"AUTO" mode: The program to be processed is selected.
Grinding
Teaching program
16.7 Settings for teach-in
Procedure
5. Click the program block to be deleted.

6. Press the ">>" and "Delete block" softkeys.
The program block on which the cursor is positioned is deleted.

In the "Settings" window, you define which axes are to be included in the teach-in block and
whether motion-type and continuous-path mode parameters are to be provided.
Proceed as follows
Grinding
Teaching program
5. Press the ">>" and "Settings" softkeys.

The "Settings" window appears.
6. Under "Axes to be taught" and "Parameters to be taught", select the check

boxes for the relevant settings and press the "Accept" softkey to confirm
the settings.
Grinding
Teaching program
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy 17
17.1 Overview
The "Ctrl-Energy" function provides you with the following options to improve the energy
utilization of your machine.
Ctrl-E Analysis: Measuring and evaluating the energy consumption

Acquiring the actual energy consumption is the first step to achieving better energy efficiency.
The energy consumption is measured and displayed at the control using the SENTRON PAC
multi-function device.
Depending on the configuration and connection of the SENTRON PAC, you have the possibility
of either measuring the power of the whole machine or only a specific load.
Independent of this, the power is determined directly from the drives and displayed.
Ctrl-E Profiles: Control of energy saving states of the machine

To optimize the energy consumption, you have the option of defining energy saving profiles
and saving them. For instance, your machine has a basic and a more sophisticated energy-
saving mode - or under certain conditions, automatically switches itself off.
These defined energy states are saved as profiles. At the user interface, you have the
possibility of activating these energy-saving profiles (e.g. the so-called tea break key).
Note
Ctrl-E Deactivating profiles
Disable Ctrl-E profiles before a series startup in order to prevent the NCU unintentionally
shutting down.
17.2 Displaying energy consumption

The SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy entry screen provides an easy-to-interpret overview of the energy
consumption of the machine. To display the values and the graphical representation, a Sentron
PAC must be connected and a long-term measurement configured.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
17.2 Displaying energy consumption
This shows a consumption display with the following bar chart:

● Current power display
● Measurement of the current energy consumption
● Comparison measurement for the energy consumption
Figure 17-1 Ctrl-Energy entry screen with display of the current energy consumption
Display in the "Machine" operating area

The first row of the status display shows the current power status of the machine.
Display Meaning
A red bar indicates that the machine is not operating productively.
A dark-green bar in the positive direction indicates that the machine is operating
productively and consuming energy.
A light-green bar in the negative direction indicates that the machine is feeding
energy back into the power supply system.
References
Information on the configuration is provided in the following reference:
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Ctrl-Energy" softkey.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
17.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption
- OR -
+ Press the <Ctrl> + <E> keys.
The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy" window opens.

(
17.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption

For the currently selected axes, you have the option of measuring and recording the energy
consumption.
Measurement of the energy consumption by part programs

The energy consumption of part programs can be measured. Single drives are taken into
account for the measurement.
They specify in which channel the start and stop of the part program should be initiated and
which number of repetitions are to be measured.
Save measurements
Save the measured consumption values so that you can subsequently compare the data.
Note
Up to three data records are displayed. The oldest data record is automatically overwritten if
there are more than three measurements.
Measurement duration
The measurement duration is limited. When the maximum measurement duration is reached,
the measurement is terminated and a corresponding message is output in the dialog line.
Procedure
1. The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy" window is open.
2. Press the "Ctrl-E analysis" softkey.

The "Ctrl-E Analysis" window opens.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
17.4 Displaying measured curves
3. Press the "Start measurement" softkey.

The "Setting Measurement: Select Device" window opens.
4. Select the desired device in the list, possibly activate the "Measure part
program" checkbox, enter the number of repetitions, possibly select the
desired channel, and press the "OK" softkey.
The trace is started.
5. Press the "Stop measurement" softkey.
The measurement is terminated.
6. Press the "Graphic" softkey, to track the measurement characteristic.
7. If you want to track the consumption values, press the "Details" softkey.
8. Press the "Save measurement" softkey to save the consumption values

of the actual measurement.
The selection of the axis to be measured depends on the configuration.
References
Information on the configuration is provided in the following reference:
17.4 Displaying measured curves

You can display current or saved measurement curves graphically or as detailed tables.
Display Meaning
Start of the measurement Shows the time at which the measurement was started by pressing the
"Start measurement" softkey.
Duration of the measure‐ Shows the measurement duration in seconds until the "Stop measurement"
ment [s] softkey is pressed.
Device Displays the selected measured component.
● Manually
● Total, drives
● Total, machine
Supplied energy [kWh] Shows the supplied energy of the selected measured component in kilo‐
watts per hour.
Regenerated energy Shows the regenerated energy of the selected measured component in
[kWh] kilowatts per hour.
Energy totals [kWh] Shows the total of all measured drive values or the total of all axes as well
as fixed value and Sentron PAC.
Display in the "Ctrl-E Analysis" window.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
17.5 Long-term measurement of the energy consumption
Procedure
1. The "Ctrl-E Analysis" window is open and you have already performed
and saved measurements.
2. Press the "Graphic" and "Saved measurements" softkeys.
The measurement curves are displayed in the "Ctrl-E Analysis" window.
3. Press the "Saved measurements" softkey again if you only want to see
the actual measurement.
4. Press the "Details" softkey to display the exact measurement data and
consumption values of the last three saved measurements and possibly
a current measurement.
17.5 Long-term measurement of the energy consumption

The long-term measurement of energy consumption is performed in the PLC and saved. The
values from times in which the HMI is not active are also recorded.
Measured values
The infeed and regenerative power values as well as the sum of the power are displayed for
the following periods:
● Current and previous day
● Current and previous month
● Current and previous year
Precondition
SENTRON PAC is connected.
Procedure
1. The "Ctrl-E Analysis" window is open.
2. Press the "Long-term measurement" softkey.

The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy Analysis Long-term Measurement" win‐
dow opens.
The results of the long-term measurement are displayed.
4. Press the "Back" softkey to terminate the long-term measurement.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
17.6 Using the energy-saving profile

In the "Ctrl-E Profile" window, you can display all of the defined energy-saving profiles. Here,
directly activate the required energy-saving profile - or inhibit or release profiles.
SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy energy-saving profiles
Display Meaning
Energy-saving profile All energy-saving profiles are listed.
active in [min] The remaining time until the defined profile is reached is displayed.
Note
Disable all energy-saving profiles
For example, in order not to disturb the machine while measurements are being made, select
"Disable all".
Once the pre-warning time of a profile has been reached, an alarm window that shows the
remaining time is displayed. Once the energy-saving mode has been reached, then an
appropriate message is displayed in the alarm line.
Predefined energy-saving profiles
Energy-saving profile Meaning

Simple energy-saving mode Machine units that are not required are either throttled or shut down.
(machine standby) When required, the machine is immediately ready to operate again.
Full energy-saving mode (NC Machine units that are not required are either throttled or shut down.
standby) Wait times are incurred at the transition into the ready to operate state.
Maximum energy-saving The machine is completely switched-off.
mode (auto shut-off) Longer wait times are incurred at the transition into the ready to operate
state.
The selection and function of the displayed energy-saving profiles can differ.
References
Information on the configuration of the energy-saving profiles is provided in the following
reference:
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Ctrl-Energy" softkey.
- OR -
Press the <CTRL> + <E> keys.
+
Press the "Ctrl-E profile" softkey.

The "Ctrl-E Profile" window opens.
3. Position the cursor on the required energy-saving profile and press the
"Activate immediately" softkey if you wish to directly activate this state.
4. Position the cursor on the required energy-saving profile and press the
"Disable profile" softkey if you wish to disable this state.
The profile is disabled. The energy-saving profile cannot be active, i.e. it
is grayed out and displayed without time details.
The labeling of the "Disable profile" softkey changes to "Enable profile".
Press the "Enable profile" softkey in order to withdraw the energy-saving
profile disable.
5. Press the "Disable all" softkey in order to disable all states.
All the profiles are disabled and cannot be active.
The labeling of the "Disable all" softkey changes to "Enable all".
6. Press the "Enable all" softkey to withdraw the disable for all profiles.
Grinding
Ctrl-Energy
Grinding
Easy XML 18
18.1 Easy XML
The "Create user dialogs" function allows you to design customer- and application-specfic HMI
user interfaces with an XML-based script language.
This script language makes it possible to display menus and dialog forms in the <CUSTOM>
operating area on the HMI.
These scripts can also be executed from an NC program with the MMC(...) instruction.
Purposes
The defined script instructions offer the following properties:
1. Display dialogs containing the following elements:
– Softkeys
– Variables
– Texts and Help texts
– Graphics and Help displays
2. Open dialogs by:
– Pressing the (start) softkeys
3. Restructure dialogs dynamically:
– Edit and delete softkeys
– Define and design variable fields
– Insert, exchange and delete display texts (language-dependent or independent)
– Insert, exchange and delete graphics
4. Initiate operations in response to the following actions:
– Displaying dialogs
– Input values (variables)
– Select a softkey
– Exiting dialogs
5. Data exchange between dialogs:
Grinding
Easy XML
18.2 Easy Extend (828D only)
6. Variables
– Read (NC, PLC, drive and user variables)
– Write (NC, PLC, drive and user variables)
– Combine with mathematical, comparison or logic operators
7. Execute functions:
– Subprograms
– File functions
– PI services
8. Apply protection levels according to user classes
9. Controlling dialog content with part program instructions
Calling user dialogs

If the "xmldial.xml" configuration file is stored in the /card/oem/sinumerik/hmi/appl directory,
start the user dialogs by pressing the <CUSTOM> key.
The configured softkeys are displayed when the <CUSTOM> operating area is called. You
open and operate the configured dialogs via the softkeys.
Note
After the initial copying of the file to the directory, a RESET of the control is required.
Note
Scripts that originate from the SINUMERIK 802D sl and 808 can be executed without change
in the 828D.
References
A description for configuring your own dialogs is available in the following reference:
SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual;
Easy XML Programming Manual
18.2.1 Overview
Easy Extend enables machines to be retrofitted with additional units, which are controlled by
the PLC or that require additional NC axes (such as bar loaders, swiveling tables or milling
heads), at a later point in time. These additional devices are easily commissioned, activated,
deactivated or tested with Easy Extend.
Grinding
Easy XML
The communication between the operator component and the PLC is performed via a PLC
user program. The sequences to be executed for the installation, activation, deactivation and
testing of a device are stored in a statement script.
Available devices and device states are displayed in a list. The view of the available devices
can be controlled for users according to their access rights.
The subsequent chapters are selected for example only and are not available in every
statement list.
Up to 64 devices can be managed.
References
SINUMERIK 828D Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual
18.2.2 Enabling a device

The available device options can be protected with a password.
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Easy Extend" softkey.
A list of the connected devices is displayed.
3. Press the "Enable function" softkey.

The "Enabling of the Devices Option" window opens.
4. Enter the option code and press the "OK" softkey.
A tick appears in the appropriate checkbox in the "Function" column and
the function is enabled.
Grinding
Easy XML
18.2.3 Activating and deactivating a device
Status Meaning
Device activated
System waiting for PLC checkback signal
Device faulty
Interface error in the communication module
Procedure
1. Easy Extend is opened.
2 You can select the desired device in the list with the <Cursor up> and
<Cursor down> keys.
3. Position the cursor on the device option for which the function has been
unlocked and press the "Activate" softkey.
The device is marked as activated and can now be used.
4. Select the desired activated device and press the "Deactivate" softkey to
switch the device off again.
18.2.4 Initial commissioning of additional devices

Normally, the device has already been commissioned by the machine manufacturer. If an initial
commissioning has not been performed or if, for example, function tests are to be performed
again (e.g. when retrofitting additional devices), this is possible at any time.
The "Start-up" softkey has been declared as Manufacturer data class (M).
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Easy Extend" softkey.
Grinding
Easy XML
18.3 SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens
3. Press the "Start-up" softkey.

4. Press the "Comm. start-up" softkey to start the commissioning.
Before starting, a complete data backup is generated which you can then
use in case of an emergency.
5. Press the "Cancel" softkey if you want to abort the commissioning pre‐
maturely.
6. Press the "Restore" softkey to load the original data.
7. Press the "Device function test" softkey to test the machine manufactur‐
er's intended function.
18.2.5 Commissioning Easy Extend

The additional devices are managed with an Easy XML script.
References
For further information about configuring, please refer to:
SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual

"Run MyScreens" allows you to design your own user interface for machine manufacturer- or
user-specific functional expansions and implement a user-specific layout.
You also have the possibility to modify or replace configured Siemens or machine-
manufacturer user interfaces.
With the newly created user interface, you can process, for example, part programs. The
dialogs are designed directly on the control system.
Software option
To expand the number of dialogs, you require one of the following software options:
● SINUMERIK 828D/840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens
● SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens + Run MyHMI
● SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyHMI / 3GL
● SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyHMI / WinCC
Grinding
Easy XML
Purposes
Defined script instructions permit the following functions:
1. Display dialogs containing the following elements:
– Softkeys
– Variables
– Texts and Help texts
– Graphics and Help displays
2. Open dialogs by:
– Pressing the (start) softkeys
3. Restructure dialogs dynamically:
– Edit and delete softkeys
– Define and design variable fields
– Insert, exchange and delete display texts (language-dependent or independent)
– Insert, exchange and delete graphics
4. Initiate operations in response to the following actions:
– Displaying dialogs
– Input values (variables)
– Select a softkey
– Exiting dialogs
5. Data exchange between dialogs:
6. Variables
– Read (NC, PLC and user variables)
– Write (NC, PLC and user variables)
– Combine with mathematical, comparison or logic operators
7. Execute functions:
– Subprograms
– File functions
– PI services
8. Apply protection levels according to user classes
References
A description for configuring your own dialogs is available in the following reference:
SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual;
SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens (BE2) Programming Manual; SINUMERIK 840D sl /
828D
Grinding
Service Planner (828D only) 19
19.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks
With the "Service Planner", maintenance tasks have been set up that have to be performed
at certain intervals (e.g. top up oil, change coolant).
A list is displayed of all the maintenance tasks that have been set up together with the time
remaining until the end of the specified maintenance interval.
The current status can be seen in the status display.
Messages and alarms indicate when a task has to be performed.
Acknowledging a maintenance task

Acknowledge the message when a maintenance task has been completed.
Service Planner
Display Meaning
Pos Position of the maintenance task in the PLC interface.
Maintenance task Name of the maintenance task.
Interval [h] Maximum time until next servicing in hours.
Remaining time [h] Time until the interval expires in hours.
Status Display of the current status of a maintenance task.
The maintenance task has been started.
The maintenance task is completed.
The maintenance task is deactivated.
Procedure
2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Service planner" softkey.
The window with the list of all the maintenance tasks that have been set
up appears.
Grinding
Service Planner (828D only)
19.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks
3. Perform the maintenance task when the maintenance interval has nearly
expired or when prompted to do so by alarms or a warning.
4. After you have performed a pending maintenance task and the task is
signaled as "Completed", position the cursor at the appropriate task and
press the "Servicing performed" softkey.
A message is displayed confirming the acknowledgment, and the main‐
tenance interval is restarted.
Note
You can perform the maintenance tasks before the interval expires. The maintenance interval
is restarted.
Grinding
Easy Message (828D only) 20
20.1 Overview
Easy Message enables you to be informed about certain machine states by means of SMS
messages via a connected modem:
● For example, you would like to be informed about emergency stop states
● You would like to know when a batch has been completed
Control commands
● HMI commands are used to activate or deactivate a user.
Syntax: [User ID] deactivate¸ [User ID] activate
● A special area is reserved in the PLC to which you can send commands in the form of PLC
bytes using SMS commands.
Syntax: [User ID] PLC DataByte
The user ID is optional and required only if a corresponding ID has been specified in the
user profile. The string PLC indicates that a PLC byte is to be written. It is followed by the
data byte to be written in the following format: Base#Value. Base can take the values 2, 10
and 16 and defines the number base. Then follows the separator # and the value of the
byte. Only positive values are allowed to be sent.
Examples:
2#11101101
10#34
16#AF
Active users
In order to receive an SMS message for certain events, you must be activated as user.
User logon
As registered user, you can log on via SMS to inquire about messages.
Grinding
Easy Message (828D only)
20.2 Activating Easy Message
Action log
You can obtain precise information about incoming and outgoing messages via SMS logs.
NOTICE
Data security
If the Easy Message function is used to set command bytes in the PLC via SMS message,
there is the possibility that the content of the SMS message is falsified by third parties, and
the data on the PLC is no longer consistent.
We recommend verifying received SMS messages using the optional user ID.
References
Information on the GSM modem can be found in the
● PPU SINUMERIK 828D Manual
You can find further information on the MODEM MD720 on the Internet at:
● MODEM MD720 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/mdm/102401328?
c=70936043019&pnid=15923&lc=en-WW)
Calling the SMS Messenger
2. Press the "Easy Msg." softkey.
20.2 Activating Easy Message

To commission the connection to the modem for the SMS Messenger, activate the SIM card
at the initial start-up.
Requirement
The modem is connected and the interfaces are activated.
The modem is activated via the machine data 51233 $MSN_ENABLE_GSM_MODEM.
Grinding
20.3 Creating/editing a user profile
Procedure
Activating the SIM card

The "SMS Messenger" window appears.
"Status" shows that the SIM card has not been activated with a PIN.
2. Enter the PIN, repeat the PIN and press the "OK" softkey.
3. If you made an incorrect entry several times, enter the PUK code in the
"PUK Input" window and press the "OK" softkey to activate the PUK code.
The "PIN input" window is opened and you can enter the PIN number as
usual.
Activating a new SIM card

The "SMS Messenger" window appears.
"Status" shows that the connection to the modem has been activated.
3. Press the "Delete PIN" softkey to delete the stored PIN.

Enter the new PIN in the "PIN Input" window at the next power up.

User identification
Display Meaning
User name Name of the user to be created or logged on.
Telephone number Telephone number of the user to which the messages are to be sent.
The telephone number must include the country code in order that
control commands can identify the sender (e.g. +491729999999)
User ID The user ID has 5 digits (e.g. 12345)
● It is used to activate and deactivate the user via SMS. (e.g. "12345
activate")
● The ID is used to additionally verify the incoming and outgoing
messages and to activate the control commands.
Grinding
Events that can be selected

You must set-up the events for which you receive notification.
Note
Selecting alarms
You have the option of selecting tool management type or measuring cycles alarms. This
means that you obtain notification by SMS as soon as alarms are output, without having to
know the number ranges.
Requirement
The modem is connected.
Procedure
Creating a new user

1. Press the "User profiles” softkey.
The "User Profiles" window appears.
3. Enter the name and telephone number of the user.

4. If required, enter the ID number of the user.
5. In the area "send SMS for the following events" area, activate the appro‐
priate checkbox and when required, enter the desired value (e.g. the unit
quantity, which when it is reached, a notification should be sent).
- OR -
Press the "Default" softkey.
The appropriate window is opened and displays the default values.
6. Press the "Send test message" softkey.
An SMS message with predefined text is sent to the specified telephone
number.
Editing user data and events

1. Select the user whose data you want to edit and press the "Edit" softkey.
The input fields can be edited.
2. Enter new data and activate the desired settings.
- OR -
Press the "Default" softkey to accept the default values.
Grinding
20.4 Setting-up events
20.4 Setting-up events

In the "Send SMS for the following events" area, select the events using the check box, which
when they occur, an SMS is sent to the user.
● Programmed messages from the part program (MSG)
In the part program, program an MSG command via which you receive an SMS.
Example: MSG ("SMS: An SMS from a part program")
● Select the following events using the <SELECT> key
– The workpiece counter reaches the following value
An SMS is sent if the workpiece counter reaches the set value.
– The following program progress is reached (percent)
An SMS is sent if, when executing a part program, the set progress is reached.
– Actual NC program reaches runtime (minutes)
An SMS is sent after the set runtime has been reached when executing an NC program.
– Tool usage time reaches the following value (minutes)
An SMS is sent if the usage time of the tool reaches the set time when executing a part
program (derived from $AC_CUTTING_TIME).
● Messages/alarms from the Tool Manager
An SMS is sent if messages or alarms are output to the Tool Manager.
● Measuring cycle messages for tools
An SMS is sent if measuring cycle messages are output that involve tools.
● Measuring cycle messages for workpieces
An SMS is sent if measuring cycle messages are output that involve workpieces.
● Sinumerik messages/alarms (error when executing)
An SMS is sent if NCK alarms or messages are output that cause the machine to come to
a standstill.
● Machine faults
An SMS is sent if PLC alarms or messages are output that cause the machine to come to
a standstill (i.e. PLC alarms with Emergency Off response).
● Maintenance intervals
An SMS is sent if the service planner registers pending maintenance work.
● Additional alarm numbers:
Here, specify additional alarms where you should be notified if they occur.
You can enter individual alarms, several alarms or alarm number ranges.
Examples:
1234,400
1000-2000
100,200-300
Requirement
● The user profile window is opened.
● You selected the event "Measuring cycle messages for tools", "Measuring cycle messages
for workpieces", "Sinumerik messages/alarms (errors when executing)", "Machine faults"
or "Maintenance intervals".
Grinding
20.5 Logging an active user on and off
Editing events
1. Activate the required check box and press the "Details" softkey.
The appropriate window opens (e.g. "Measuring cycle messages for
workpieces") and shows a list of the defined alarm numbers.
2. Select the corresponding entry and press the "Delete" softkey to remove
the alarm number from the list.
- OR -
Then press the "New" softkey if you wish to create a new entry.
The "Create new entry" window opens.
Enter the data and press the "OK" softkey to add the entry to the list.
Press the "Save" softkey to save the settings for the result.
3. Press the "Standard" softkey to return to the standard settings for the
events.
20.5 Logging an active user on and off

Only active users receive an SMS message for the specified events.
You can activate users, already created for Easy Message, with certain control commands via
the user interface or via SMS.
The connection has been established to the modem.
Procedure
1. Press the "User profiles” softkey.
2. Select the desired user in the User name field and press the "User active”
softkey
Note
Repeat step 2 to activate further users.
- OR -
Send an SMS with the User ID and the "activate" text to the control (e.g.
"12345 activate")
If the telephone number and the user ID match the stored data, the user
profile is activated.
You receive a message of success or failure per SMS.
3. Press the "User active” softkey to log off an activated user.
- OR -
Grinding
20.6 Displaying SMS logs
Send an SMS with the "deactivate" text (e.g. "12345 deactivate") to log
off from the Messenger.
An SMS message is not sent to the deactivated user for the events speci‐
fied in the user profile.
20.6 Displaying SMS logs

The SMS data traffic is recorded in the "SMS Log" window. In this way, it is possible to see
the chronological sequence of activates when a fault occurs.
Symbols Description
Incoming SMS message for the Messenger.
Message that has reached the Messenger, but which has not been pro‐
cessed (e.g. incorrect user ID or unknown account).
SMS message sent to a user.
Message that has not reached the user because of an error.
Requirement
Procedure
1. Press the "SMS log" softkey.
The "SMS Log" window appears.

All the messages that have been sent or received by the Messenger are
listed.
Note
Press the "Incoming" or "Outgoing" softkey to restrict the list.
Grinding
20.7 Making settings for Easy Message
20.7 Making settings for Easy Message

You can change the following Messenger configuration in the "Settings" window:
● Name of the controller that is part of an SMS message
● Number of sent messages
– The SMS counter provides information on all sent messages.
– Limit the number of sent messages in order to receive an overview of the costs through
SMS messages, for example.
Setting the SMS counter to zero
When a set limit is reached, no further SMS messages are sent.

Press the "Reset SMS counter" softkey to reset the counter to zero.
Requirement
Procedure
2. Enter an arbitrary name for the controller in the "Machine name" field.
3. If you want to limit the number of sent SMS messages then select the
"Specify limit for SMS counter" entry and enter the desired number.
When the maximum number of messages is reached, you obtain a cor‐
responding error message.
Note
Check the SMS log to see the exact time when the limit was reached.
- OR -
3. Press the "Default" softkey.
If you have freely selected a machine name, this is replaced by a default
name (e.g. 828D).
Grinding
Edit PLC user program (828D only) 21
21.1 Introduction
A PLC user program consists to a large degree of logical operations to implement safety
functions and to support process sequences. These logical operations include the linking of
various contacts and relays. These logic operations are displayed in a ladder diagram.
You can edit the ladder diagrams with the following tools:
● Ladder add-on tool
Using the ladder add-on tool, you can find program errors or fault causes and directly make
minor corrections.
● Ladder editor
You require the ladder editor to use all of the operations supported by the particular PLC
type.
Software option
You require the "SINUMERIK 828 Ladder Editor" option to edit PLC user pro‐
grams.
21.2 Displaying and editing PLC properties
21.2.1 Displaying PLC properties

The following PLC properties can be displayed in the "SIMATIC LAD" window:
● Operating state
● Name of the PLC project
● PLC system version
● Cycle time
● Processing time
The processing time can be reset.
You can also update the project data or load a new PLC user program.
Grinding
Edit PLC user program (828D only)
21.2 Displaying and editing PLC properties
Procedure
2. Press the "PLC" softkey.

The ladder diagram representation opens and displays the PLC informa‐
tion.
21.2.2 Resetting the processing time

You can reset the processing time of the PLC user program.
Procedure
1. Ladder add-on tool is open.

You have loaded project data.
2. Press the "Reset proc. time" softkey.
The data of the processing time is reset.
21.2.3 Loading modified PLC user program

Load the project data to the PLC if some changes have been made to the project data and a
new PLC user program is available.
When the project data is loaded, the data classes are saved and loaded to the PLC.
Requirement
Check whether the PLC is in the Stop state.
Note
PLC in the RUN state
If the PLC is in the RUN state, a corresponding message is displayed and the "Load in Stop"
and "Load in Run" softkeys appear.
With "Load in Stop", the PLC is set to the Stop state and the project is stored and loaded to
the CPU.
With "Load in Run", the loading operation is continued and the PLC project loaded to the PLC.
Only those data classes that have really been changed are loaded, i.e. generally INDIVIDUAL
data classes.
Grinding
21.3 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables
Procedure

You have changed project data.
2. Press the "PLC Stop" softkey if the PLC is in the Run state.
3. Press the "Load to CPU" softkey to start the loading operation.

All data classes are loaded.
4. When the PLC project has been loaded, press the "PLC Start" softkey to
switch the PLC to the Run state.

Changes can only be made to the NC/PLC variables with the appropriate password.
WARNING
Incorrect parameterization
Changes in the states of NC/PLC variables have a considerable influence on the machine.
Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger life and cause damage to the machine.
In the "NC/PLC Variables" window, enter the NC system variables and PLC variables that you
want to monitor or change in the list:
● Variable
Address for NC/PLC variable.
Incorrect variables have a red background and are displayed with a # character in the value
column.
● Comment
Any comment on the variable.
The columns can be displayed and hidden.
● Format
Specify the format in which the variable is to be displayed.
The format can be specified (e.g. floating point).
● Value
Displays the actual value of the NC/PLC variables.
PLC variables
Inputs Input bit (Ex), input byte (EBx), input word (EWx), input double word (EDx)
Outputs Output bit (Ax), output byte (ABx), output word (AWx), output double word
(ADx)
Bit memory Memory bit (Mx), memory byte (MBx), memory word (MWx), memory double
word (MDx)
Times Time (Tx)
Grinding
PLC variables
Counters Counter (Cx)
Data Data block (DBx): Data bit (DBXx), data byte (DBBx), data word (DBWx),
data double word (DBDx)
Formats
B Binary
H Hexadecimal
D Decimal without sign
+/-D Decimal with sign
F Floating point (for double words)
A ASCII character
Notation examples
Permissible notation for variables:
● PLC variables: EB2, A1.2, DB2.DBW2
● NC variables:
– NC system variables: Notation $AA_IM[1]
– User variables / GUD: Notation GUD/MyVariable[1,3]
– OPI notation: /CHANNEL/PARAMETER/R[u1,2]
Inserting variables
The start value for "Filter/Search" of variables differs. For example, to insert the variable $R[0],
enter the following start value:
● The start value is 0 if you filter according to "System variables".
● The start value is 1 if you filter according to "All (no filter)". In this case, all signals are
displayed and shown in the OPI notation.
The GUD from the machine data is only displayed in the Search window for the variable
selection when the associated definition file has been activated. Otherwise, the sought
variables must be entered manually, e.g. GUD/SYG_RM[1]
Grinding
The following machine data is representative for all variable types (INT, BOOL, AXIS, CHAR,
STRING): MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL
Note
Display of NC/PLC variables
● System variables can be dependent on the channel. When the channel is switched over,
the values from the selected channel are displayed.
● For user variables (GUD), it is not necessary to make a specification according to global
or channel-specific GUD. The first element of a GUD array starts with index 0 as for NC
variables.
● Using the tooltip, you can display the OPI notation for NC system variables (except for
GUD).
Servo variables
Servo variables can only be selected and displayed at "Diagnostics" → "Trace".
Changing and deleting values
2. Press the "NC/PLC variables" softkey.
- OR -
2. Press the "PLC" and "NC/PLC variab." softkeys.
The "NC/PLC Variables" window opens.

3. Position the cursor in the "Variable" column and enter the required vari‐
able.
The operand is displayed with the value.
The "NC/PLC Variables: Details" window opens. The information for "Var‐
iable", "Comment" and "Value" is displayed in full length.
6. Position the cursor in the "Format" field and select the required format
with <SELECT>.
Grinding
7. Press the "Display comments" softkey.

The "Comments" column is displayed. You have the option of creating
comments or editing existing comments.
Press the "Display comments" softkey once again to hide the column.
8. Press the "Change" softkey if you would like to edit the value.
The "Value" column can be edited.
9. Press the "Insert variable" softkey if you wish to select a variable from a
list of all existing variables and insert this.
The "Select Variable" window opens.
10. Press the "Filter/search" softkey to restrict the display of variables (e.g.
to mode group variables) using the "Filter" selection box and/or select the
desired variable using the "Search" input box.
Press the "Delete all" softkey if you would like to delete the entries for the
operands.
11. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the changes or the deletion.
- OR -
Changing operands
Depending on the type of operand, you can increment or decrement the address by 1 place
at a time using the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys.
Note
Axis names as index
For axis names, the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys do not act as index, e.g. for
$AA_IM[X1].
Examples
DB97.DBX2.5
Result: DB97.DBX2.6
$AA_IM[1]
Result: $AA_IM[2]
MB201
Result: MB200
/Channel/Parameter/R[u1,3]
Result: /Channel/Parameter/R[u1,2]
Grinding
21.4 Displaying and editing PLC signals in the status list
21.4 Displaying and editing PLC signals in the status list

PLC signals are displayed and can be changed in the "PLC Status List" window.
The following lists are shown

Inputs (IB)
Bit memories (MB)
Outputs (QB)
Variables (VB)
Data (DB)
Setting the address

You can go directly to the desired PLC address to monitor the signals.
Editing
You can edit the data.
Procedure
2. Ladder add-on tool is opened.
3. Press the "Status list” softkey.

The "Status List" window appears.
4. Press the "Set address" softkey.
The "Set Address" window appears.
5. Activate the desired address type (e.g. DB), enter the value and press
the "Accept" softkey.
The cursor jumps to the specified address.
The "RW" input field can be edited.
7. Enter the desired value and press the "Accept" softkey.
Grinding
21.5 View of the program blocks
21.5.1 Displaying information on the program blocks

You can display all the logic and graphic information of a program block.
● Logic information
The following information is displayed in a ladder diagram (LAD):
– Networks with program parts and current paths
– Electrical current flow through a number of logical operations
● Select program block
Select the program block that you want to display.
● Program status
You call information about the program status.
● Symbolic address
You select between specification in absolute or symbolic address.
● Zoom
You can enlarge or reduce the ladder diagram.
● Search
You can use the "Search" function to quickly reach points in the PLC user programs where
you would like, for example, to make changes.
● Edit
You can insert, edit or delete networks.
● Symbol information
You can display all symbolic identifiers used in the selected network.
Procedure
3. Press the "Window 1" or "Window 2" softkey.
Grinding
21.5.2 Structure of the user interface

The following figure shows the user interface.

Figure 21-1 Screen layout
Table 21-1 Key to screen layout
Screen element Display Meaning

1 Application area
2 Supported PLC program language
* Program change exists
3 Name of the active program block
Representation: Symbolic name (absolute name)
4 Program status
Run Program is running

Stop Program is stopped
Status of the application area
Sym Symbolic representation
Abs Absolute representation
Grinding
Screen element Display Meaning

5 Display of the active keys (<INPUT>, <SELECT>)
6 Focus
Performs the tasks of the cursor
7 Information line
Displays information, e.g. for searching
21.5.3 Control options

In addition to the softkeys and the navigation keys, there are further shortcuts in this area.
Shortcuts
The cursor keys move the focus over the PLC user program. When the window borders are
reached, scrolling is performed automatically.
Shortcuts Action
To the first column of the row
To the last column of the row
Up a screen
Down a screen
One field to the left, right, up or down
To the first field of the first network
-or-
Grinding
Shortcuts Action
To the last field of the last network
-or-
Open the next program block in the same window
Open the previous program block in the same window
The function of the Select key depends on the position of the input focus.
● Table row: Displays the complete text row
● Network title: Displays the network comment
● Command: Displays all operands
If the input focus is positioned on a command, all operands including the
comments are displayed.
21.5.4 Displaying the program status

You can display the program status.
The following Information is displayed:
● Program status: "Run" or "Stop"
● Status of the application area: "Sym" or "Abs"
Displaying the program status

If your PLC has the "Progress status" function, the status values are displayed at the time of
execution of the operations. The status of the local data memory and the accumulators is also
displayed.
The "Progress status" display is also controlled using the "Program stat." softkey
Colors for displaying the program status

In the progress status, different colors are used to display information.
Display Color
Signal flow of the busbar when the status is active Blue
Signal flow in the networks Blue
All operations that are active and that are executed without Blue
error (corresponds to the signal flow)
Status of the Boolean operations (corresponds to the signal Blue
flow)
Timers and counters active Green
Grinding
Error during execution Red

No signal flow Gray
No network executed Gray
STOP operating state Gray
Procedure
1. The program block view is open.
2. Press the "Program stat." softkey to display the program status display
in the status display.
3. Press the "Program stat." softkey again to hide the program status display
in the status display again.
21.5.5 Changing the address display

You can select between specification in absolute or symbolic address.
Elements for which there are no symbolic identifiers are automatically displayed with absolute
identifiers.
Procedure
2. Press the "Symbol. address" softkey.

The list of operands is displayed sorted according to symbolic address.
3. To return to the display showing the absolute addresses press the "Sym‐
bol. address" softkey again.
21.5.6 Enlarging/reducing the ladder diagram

You can enlarge or reduce the representation of the ladder diagram.
Grinding
Procedure
2. Press the "Zoom +" softkey to enlarge the section of the ladder diagram.
After enlarging, the "Zoom -" softkey is available.
3. Press the "Zoom -" softkey to reduce the section of the ladder diagram
again.
21.5.7 Program block
21.5.7.1 Displaying and editing the program block

You can create and edit program blocks and display further information as follows:
● Local variables
You can display local variables of a block.
● Create new program block
You can create a new program block.
● Open program block
You can display all the logic and graphic information of the program block and edit the block.
● Properties
You can display the properties of a block and edit them, when required.
● Protection
You can protect a block
Procedure
3. Press the softkey:

● "Window 1 OB1"
- OR -
● "Window 2 SBRO"
4. Press the "Program block" softkey.
Grinding
21.5.7.2 Displaying local variable table

You have the option of displaying the local variable table of an INT block.
The following information is listed in the tables.
Name Freely assigned

Variable type Selection:
● IN
● IN_OUT
● OUT
● TEMP
Data type Selection:
● BOOL
● BYTE
● WORD
● INT
● DWORD
● DINT
● REAL
Comment Freely assigned
Procedure
1. The "Program Block" window is open.

3. Press the "Local variables" softkey.
The "Local Variables" window appears and lists the created variables.
21.5.7.3 Creating a program block
Overview
The failure of a single input, output or relay normally results in the failure of the complete system.
Using the Ladder add-on tool, you can perform a PLC diagnosis in order to find fault causes
or program errors. You can directly make small corrections or modifications.
Generating an INT_100/INT_101 block

If an INT_100 or INT_101 block is missing, it can be added via the vertical softkey bar. If these
INT blocks exist in a project, they can be deleted via the vertical softkey bar. You also have
the opportunity to change the networks of interrupt routines on the control as well as to save
and load these changes.
Grinding
Editing the interrupt routines

You can edit the following interrupt programs:
● INT_100 - interrupt program (is executed before the main program)
● INT_101 - interrupt program (is executed after the main program)
Marshalling data
Using the Ladder add-on tool, you can "re-wire" inputs (via INT_100) or outputs (via INT_101)
for service purposes.
Note
Saving the PLC project when changing the operating area
If you have created INT_100/INT_101 blocks or inserted, removed or edited networks in an
INT block, you must save the project before you change from the PLC area into another
operating area. Transfer the project to the PLC using the "Load to CPU" softkey. If this is not
done, all of the changes will be lost and must be re-entered.
Please take the appropriate program note into consideration.
References
The editing of the INT_100 and INT_101 interrupt programs can be enabled or disabled.
Related information is contained in the Basic Functions Function Manual, Chapter P4: PLC
for SINUMERIK 828D
Creating a new block

You can create new program blocks with the ladder editor.
Name INT _100, INT_101

The number from the selection field "Number of subprogram" is taken for
the name of the INT block.
Author A maximum of 48 characters is permitted.
Number of subpro‐ 100, 101
gram
Data class Individual
Comment A maximum of 100 lines and 4096 characters are permitted.
Note
Access protection
You have the option of protecting blocks that have been newly created against being accessed.
Grinding
Requirement
Software option
To edit the entire PLC user program, you require the "SINUMERIK 828 Ladder
Editor" option.
If this option is not available, you can only edit INT100 and INT101.
Procedure
1. The "Program Block" window is open.

The "Properties" window opens.
3. Select den desired INT block and enter the name of the author, the num‐
ber of the subprogram and, if required, a comment.
21.5.7.4 Opening a program block in the window

You can display all the logic and graphic information for a program block.
Procedure
1. The relevant block is selected and the "Program Block" window is open.
2. Select the desired block and press "Open".
The block is displayed in the currently active window 1 or window 2.
21.5.7.5 Displaying/canceling the access protection

You can password protect your program organizational units (POUs) in the PLC 828
programming tool. This prevents other users from accessing this part of the program. This
means that it is invisible to other users and is encrypted when it is downloaded.
A lock symbol is used to show a password-protected POU in the block overview and in the
ladder diagram.
Grinding
Procedure
2. Press the "Protection" softkey.
The "Protection" window opens.
Removing protection
3. Enter the password.
● "This program block remains protected" is activated:
You have the option of editing or deleting the block. Protection is
reactivated when you load the PLC user program to the PLC.
● "This program block remains protected" is deactivated:
Block protection is permanently withdrawn. After being loaded to the
PLC, the PLC user program is not protected.
Setting protection
4. Enter the required password in the first line "Please enter password" and
re-enter the password in the second line.
5. Activate the "Protect all program blocks using this password" checkbox,
if you wish to protect all of the user program blocks.
Note:
Program blocks that are already password-protected are not affected.
21.5.7.6 Editing block properties subsequently

You can edit the title, author and comments of a block.
Note
You cannot edit the block name, subprogram number and data class assignment.
Procedure
3. Press the "Properties" softkey.
The "Properties" window appears.
21.5.8 Editing the program block with the "Ladder editor"
21.5.8.1 Editing the PLC user program

You can change and extend the PLC user program with the ladder editor.
Grinding
All the operations supported by the PLC type are available for the editing. Subprograms and
interrupt programs can be added and deleted.
Software option
You require the "SINUMERIK 828 ladder logic editor" option to edit PLC user
programs.
Note
Saving changes
If you make changes in the program, you must save the project before you change from the
PLC area to another operating area. You can transfer the project to the PLC using the "Load
to CPU" softkey. If this is not done, all of the changes will be lost and must be re-entered.
Please note the corresponding program information:
Editing functions
● Edit block
– Create connecting lines, contacts, coils, and boxes
– Change operands
– Delete operations
● Network
– Create
You can create and then edit a new network.
– Delete
Only empty networks can be edited. Networks, that already include statements, can only
be deleted.
References
For information, please refer to the Basic Functions Function Manual, Chapter P4: PLC for
SINUMERIK 828D
21.5.8.2 Editing a program block

You can edit program blocks with the ladder logic editor.
Requirement
To edit program blocks, the program status must be set to STOP.
Grinding
Procedure
1. The ladder logic display (LAD) is open.

2. Press the "Program block" softkey and select the block that you want to
edit.
The program block is opened in the appropriate window.
4. Press the "Change" softkey to open the editing mode.
If the program status display is active, a message is displayed that you
can confirm with "OK".
5. If you want to insert connecting lines, position the cursor at the desired
position and press the appropriate softkey, e.g. "-->".
- OR -
Press the "Contacts" softkey and select the desired operation in the list
that opens.
- OR -
Press the "Coils" softkey and select the desired operation in the list that
opens.
- OR -
Press the "Boxes" softkey and select the desired operation in the list that
opens.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey to confirm the respective action.
The changes will now be saved.
Note:
The changes only take effect when the user program is loaded to the CPU.
Note
Save changes
If you make changes in the program, you must save the project before you change from the
PLC area to another operating area. You can transfer the project to the PLC using the "Load
to CPU" softkey. If this is not done, all of the changes will be lost and must be re-entered.
Please note the corresponding program information:
Loading the program to the CPU
1. Press the "PLC-CPU" and "Load to CPU" softkeys.
2. Press the "OK" softkey to start the load operation.

After the error-free compilation of the program, the PLCT is switched to
the STOP state and loaded to the PLC.
Grinding
21.5.8.3 Deleting a program block

You can change and delete blocks with the ladder editor.
Requirement
Software option
You require the "SINUMERIK 828 ladder logic editor" option to edit PLC user
programs.
Procedure
2. Select the desired block and press "Delete".
5. Press "OK" to delete the block.
- OR -
Press "Cancel" to abort the action.
References
The editing of the INT_100 and INT_101 interrupt programs can be enabled or disabled.
Related information is contained in the Basic Functions Function Manual, Chapter P4: PLC
for SINUMERIK 828D
21.5.8.4 Inserting and editing networks

You can create a new network and then insert operations (bit operation, assignment, etc.) at
the selected cursor position.
Only empty networks can be edited. Networks, that already include statements, can only be
deleted.
Grinding
A simple, single line can be edited for each network. You can create a maximum of 3 columns
per network.
Column Operation
Column 1 ● NO contact -| |-
-|/|-
● NC contact
Column 2 NOT -|NOT|-
(optional) Rising edge -|P|-
Falling edge -|N|-
Assign -( )
Set -(S)
Reset -(R)
Column 3 Assign -( )
(only possible if no assign, set or reset oper‐ Set -(S)
ations were specified in the second column) Reset -(R)
Note
Logical AND (serial contact) and logical OR (parallel contact) are not possible.
The bit combinations comprise one or several logical operations and the assignment to an
output / bit memory.
If the cursor is moved further to the left with the arrow key, the type of assignment or a logic
operation can be selected. A further logic operation cannot be placed to the right of an
assignment. A network must always be terminated with an assignment.
References
For further information about PLC programming, please refer to:
Basic Functions Function Manual, PLC for SINUMERIK 828D (P4)
Procedure
1. An INT100 or INT101 routine has been selected.

2. Press the "Edit" softkey.
3. Position the cursor on a network.

4. Press the "Insert network" softkey.
- OR -
Grinding
If the cursor is positioned on "Network x", a new, empty network is inser‐

ted behind this network.
5. Position the cursor on the desired element below the network title and
press the "Insert operation" softkey.
The "Insert Operation" window appears.
6. Select the desired bit operation (NC contact or NO contact) or assignment
7. Press the "Insert operand" softkey.
8. Enter the logic operation or the command and press the <INPUT> key to
complete the entry.
9. Position the cursor on the operation that you want to delete and press
the "Delete operation" softkey.
- OR -
Position the cursor on the title of the network that you want to delete and
press the "Delete network" softkey.
- OR -
Press the <DEL> key.
The network, including all the logic operations and operands, or the se‐
lected operation is deleted.
21.5.8.5 Editing network properties

You can edit the network properties of an INT block.
Network title and network comment

The title can have a maximum of 3 lines and 128 characters. The comment can have a
maximum of 100 lines and 4096 characters.
Procedure
1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is open.
2. Use the cursor keys to select the network that you want to edit.
Grinding
21.6 Displaying symbol tables
3. Press the <SELECT> key.

The "Network Title / Comment" window opens and shows the title and a
possibly assigned comment for the selected network.
The fields can be edited.
6. Enter the changes and press the "OK" softkey to transfer the data to the
user program.
21.5.9 Displaying the network symbol information table

All of the symbolic identifiers used in the selected network are displayed in the "Network
Symbol Information Table" window.
The following information is listed:
● Names
● Absolute addresses
● Comments
The symbol information table remains empty for networks that do not contain any global
symbols.
Procedure
1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is open.
2. Select the desired network and press the "Symbol info" softkey.
The "Network Symbol Information Table" window appears.
3. Use the cursor keys to move within the table.
21.6 Displaying symbol tables

You can display the symbol tables that are used to obtain an overview of the global operands
available in the project.
The name, address and possibly also a comment is displayed for each entry.
Grinding
21.7 Displaying cross references
Procedure
2. Press the "Symbol table" and "Sym. tab. selection" softkeys.

The list with the symbol table entries is displayed.
3. Select the desired table and press the "Open" softkey.

The table is displayed.
4. Use the cursor keys to select the desired entry.
21.7 Displaying cross references

You can display all the operands used in the PLC user project and their use in the list of cross
references.
This list indicates in which networks an input, output, bit memory, etc. is used.
The list of cross references contains the following information:
● Block
● Address in the network
● Context (command ID)
Symbolic and absolute address

You can select between specification in absolute or symbolic address.
Elements for which there are no symbolic identifiers are automatically displayed with absolute
identifiers.
Opening program blocks in the ladder diagram

From the cross references, you can go directly to the position in the program where the operand
is used. The corresponding block is opened in window 1 or 2 and the cursor is set on the
corresponding element.
Procedure
2. Press the "Cross refs." softkey.

The list of cross references opens and the operands are displayed sorted
according to absolute address.
Grinding
21.8 Searching for operands
3. Press the "Symbol. address" softkey.

The list of operands is displayed sorted according to symbolic address.
4. Press the "Absolute address" softkey to return to the display showing the
absolute addresses.
5. Select the desired cross reference and press the "Open in window 1" or
"Open in window 2" softkey.
The ladder diagram is opened and the selected operand is marked.
6. Press the "Find" softkey.

The "Find / Go To" window opens.
7. Select "Find operand" or "Go to" and enter the sought element or the
desired line and select the search order (e.g. search up).
9. If an element is found that corresponds to the sought element, but is not

at the appropriate position, press the "Find next" softkey to find where
the search term occurs next.

You can use the search function to quickly reach points in very large programs where you
would like, for example, to make changes.
Restricting the search

● "Window 1" / "Window 2"
With "Go to", you can jump directly to the desired network.
● "Cross references", "Symbol table"
With "Go to", you can jump directly to the desired line.
Requirement
Window 1 / window 2, the symbol tables or the list of cross references is open.
Procedure
1. Press the "Find" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears. The "Find / Go To" window opens at
the same time.
2. Select the "Find operand" entry in the first input field if you are searching
for a specific operand and enter the search term in the "Find" input field.
3. Select the search range (e.g. Find all).
Grinding
4. Select the "In this program unit" or "In all program units" entry if you are
in "Window 1" or "Window 2" or in the symbol table in order to restrict the
search.
If the operand you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is
highlighted.
Press the "Continue search" softkey if the operand found during the
search does not correspond to the element you are looking for.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey if you want to cancel the search.
Further search options
1. Press the "Go to start" softkey to jump to the start of the ladder diagram
in window 1 or window 2, or the list (cross references, symbol table).
2. Press the "Go to end" softkey to jump to the end of the ladder diagram in
window 1 or window 2, or the list (cross references, symbol table).
Grinding
HT 8 22
22.1 Overview
The mobile SINUMERIK HT 8 handheld terminal combines the functions of an operator panel
and a machine control panel. It is therefore suitable for visualization, operation, teach in, and
programming at the machine.
1 Customer keys (user-defined)

2 Traversing keys
3 User menu key
4 Handwheel (optional)
Operation
The 7.5 TFT color display provides touch operation.
It also has membrane keys for traversing the axes, for numeric input, for cursor control, and
for machine control panel functions like start and stop.
Grinding
HT 8
22.1 Overview
It is equipped with an emergency stop button and two 3-position enabling buttons. You can
also connect an external keyboard.
References
For more information about connection and startup of the HT 8, see the following references:
Customer keys
The four customer keys are freely assignable and can be set up customer-specifically by the
machine manufacturer.
Integrated machine control panel

The HT 8 has an integrated machine control panel consisting of keys (e.g. start, stop, traversing
keys, etc.), and keys reproduced as softkeys (see machine control panel menu).
See Section "Controls on the machine control panel" for a description of the individual keys.
Note
PLC interface signals that are triggered via the softkeys of the machine control panel menus
are edge triggered.
Enabling button
The HT 8 has two enabling buttons. Thus, you can initiate enabling functions for operations
that require enabling (e.g. displaying and operating of traversing keys) with either your right
hand or your left hand.
Enabling buttons are available for the following key positions:
● Released (no activation)
● Enabling (center position) - enabling for channel 1 and 2 is on the same switch
● Panic (completely pushed through)
Grinding
HT 8
22.2 Traversing keys
Traversing keys
To traverse the axes of your machine using the traversing keys of the HT 8, you must select
"JOG" mode or either the "Teach In" or "Ref.Point" submode. Depending on the setting, the
enabling button must be activated.
Virtual keyboard
A virtual keyboard is available for the easy entry of values.
Changing the channel

● You are able to switch the channel by touch in the status display:
– In the Machine operating area (large status display), by touch operation of the channel
display in the status display.
– In the other operating areas (no status display), by touch operation of the channel display
in the screen headers (yellow field).
● The "1… n CHANNEL" softkey is available in the machine control panel menu that can be
reached via the user menu key "U".
Operating area switchover

You can display the operating area menu by touching the display symbol for the active
operating area.
Handwheel
The HT 8 is available with a hand wheel.
References
For information about connecting the hand wheel, refer to:
Operator Components and Networking Manual; SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl

The traversing keys are not labeled. However, you can display a label for the keys in place of
the vertical softkey bar.
Grinding
HT 8
Labeling of the traversing keys is displayed for up to six axes on the touch panel by default.
Showing and hiding

You can link the showing and hiding of the label to activation of the enabling button, for
example. In this case, the traversing keys are displayed when you press the enabling button.
If you release the enabling button, the traversing keys are hidden again.
All existing vertical and horizontal softkeys are covered or hidden, i.e. other
softkeys cannot be used.
Grinding
HT 8
22.3 Machine control panel menu
22.3 Machine control panel menu

Here you select keys from the machine control panel which are reproduced by the software
by touch operation of the relevant softkeys.
See chapter "Controls on the machine control panel" for a description of the individual keys.
Note
PLC interface signals that are triggered via the softkeys of the machine control panel menus
are edge triggered.
Showing and hiding

The user menu key "U" displays the CPF softkey bar (vertical softkey bar) and the user softkey
bar (horizontal softkey bar).
You can expand the user softkey bar to display eight additional softkeys via the
menu forward key.
You use the "Back" softkey to hide the menu bar again.
Grinding
HT 8
22.4 Virtual keyboard
Softkeys on the machine control panel menu

Available softkeys:
"Machine" softkey Select the "Machine" operating area

"[VAR]" softkey Select the axis feedrate in the variable increment
"1… n CHANNEL" Change the channel
softkey
"Single Block" soft‐ Switch single block execution on/off
key
"WCS MCS" softkey Switch between WCS and MCS
"Back" softkey Close the window.
Note
The window will automatically disappear when changing regions areas with the "Menu Select"
key.
22.4 Virtual keyboard

The virtual keyboard is used as the input device for touch operator panels.
It opens when you double-click an operator element with input capability (editor, edit field).
The virtual keyboard can be positioned anywhere on the operator interface. In addition, you
can toggle between a full keyboard and a reduced keyboard that only includes the number
block. Moreover, with the full keyboard, you can toggle between English key assignments and
the keyboard assignment for the current language setting.
Procedure
1. Click in the required input field in order to place the cursor there.
2. Click the input field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter your values via the virtual keyboard.
- OR -
Position the cursor on an another operator element.
The value is accepted and the virtual keyboard is closed.
Positioning of the virtual keyboard

You can position the virtual keyboard anywhere in the window by pressing the empty bar next
to the "Close window" icon with your finger or a stylus and moving it back and forth.
Grinding
HT 8
22.5 Calibrating the touch panel
Special keys on the virtual keyboard

① Num:
Reduces the virtual keyboard to the number block.
② Eng:
Toggles the keyboard assignment between the English keyboard assignment and the keyboard
assignment for the current language setting.
Number block of the virtual keyboard
Use the "Deu" or "Eng" keys to return to the full keyboard with the English keyboard assignment
or the keyboard assignment of the current language setting.

It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel upon first connection to the controller.
Note
Recalibration
If the operation is not exact, then redo the calibration.
Grinding
HT 8
Procedure
1. Press the back key and the <MENU SELECT> key at the same time to
start the TCU service screen.
2. Touch the "Calibrate TouchPanel" button.

The calibration process will be started.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen and touch the three calibration
points one after the other.
The calibration process has terminated.
4. Touch the horizontal softkey "1" or the key with the number "1" to close
the TCU service screen.
Grinding
Appendix A
A.1 840D sl / 828D documentation overview
Grinding
Appendix
A.1 840D sl / 828D documentation overview
*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO
'
6DOHVEURFKXUH &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ30b &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

ದ6,180(5,.'bVO 6,180(5,.'VO 6,180(5,.' 6,027,21 (0&GHVLJQJXLGHOLQHV &WUO(QHUJ\
ದ6,180(5,.' W\SH% %$6,&7%$6,&0 6,1$0,&66
ದ6,180(5,.' 6,1$0,&66FRPEL DQGPRWRUVIRU
%$6,&7 PRWRUV).DQG3+ SURGXFWLRQPDFKLQHV
8VHUGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO '
' ' '
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ8QLYHUVDO ದ%DVLFV ದ,62WXUQLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJ ದ-RESODQQLQJ ದ,62PLOOLQJ
ದ0LOOLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJF\FOHV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO ' 'VO 'VO ' 'VO
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6 6
0DQXDO 0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO /LVW0DQXDO /LVW0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

ದ1&8 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO ದ&1&1&.3/& ದ0DFKLQHGDWD ದ0DFKLQHGDWD *XLGHOLQHVIRU
ದ2SHUDWLRQFRPSRQHQWV 6HUYLFH0DQXDO GULYH ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV PDFKLQH
DQGQHWZRUNLQJ ದ%DVLFVRIWZDUHDQG ದ9DULDEOHV ದ3DUDPHWHUV FRQILJXUDWLRQ
RSHUDWLQJVRIWZDUH ದ9DULDEOHV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO 'VO 6 'VO '
'
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO

ದ%DVLFIXQFWLRQV 7RROPDQDJHPHQW 'ULYHIXQFWLRQV 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
ದ([WHQGHGIXQFWLRQV
ದ6SHFLDOIXQFWLRQV
ದ6\QFKURQL]HGDFWLRQV
ದ,62GLDOHFWV
,QIRWUDLQLQJ (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'2&RQ&' 0\'RFXPHQWDWLRQ ,QGXVWU\0DOO

0DQDJHU
7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWV 0DQXDO
ದ(DV\PLOOLQJ 7RRODQG
ZLWK6KRS0LOO PROGPDNLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJPDGHHDV\
ZLWK6KRS7XUQ
Grinding
Index
Base offset, 74
Basic blocks, 120
A Binary format, 314
Block
Access protection
editing, 395
Program block, 394
Search, 124
Actual-value display, 36
Searching - interruption point, 126
Adapter-transformed view, 278
Block search
Adding
Mode, 127
INT block, 392
Program interruption, 126
Additional components
Search target parameters, 127
Initial commissioning, 366
Search target specification, 126
Address
Using, 123
absolute, 390
changing the display, 390
symbolic, 390
Alarm log
C
display, 329 Calculating the dressing tool position - CYCLE435
Sorting, 330 External programming, 199
Alarms Calibrating the swivel axis
Displaying, 327 B axis, 230
Sorting, 330 Changing the representation
Any file Ladder diagram, 390
Creating, 293 Channel switchover, 68
Archive Chuck dimensions, 96
Generate in the program manager, 314 Coarse and fine offsets, 74
generating in the system data, 315 Code carrier connection, 255
Punched tape format, 314 Collision avoidance, 231
read in archive from system data, 318 Context-sensitive online help, 56
reading-in in the Program Manager, 317 Contour call - CYCLE62
Auxiliary functions Function, 194
H functions, 161 Parameter, 195
M functions, 161 Coordinate system
Axes Switching over, 69
Defined increment, 111 Copying
Direct positioning, 113 Directory, 300
Referencing, 64 Program, 300
Repositioning, 122 Counter-spindle, 97
Traversing, 111 Creating
Variable increment, 112 Any file, 293
Directory, 290
Dressing program, 292
B G Code program, 291
INT block, 393
B axis
Job list, 294
Calibrating the swivel axis, 230
NC directory on the local drive, 285
Backing up
Program block, 138, 391, 393
Data - in the Program Manager, 314
Program list, 295
Data - via the system data, 315
User dialog, 363
Setup data, 319
Workpiece, 291
Grinding
Index
Cross references Dictionary

displaying operands, 402 Importing, 51
Ctrl-Energy Directory
Energy analysis, 355 Copying, 300
Energy-saving profiles, 360 Creating, 290
Functions, 355 Deleting, 302
Measuring the energy consumption, 357 Highlight, 299
Saved measuring curves, 359 Pasting, 300
Cutting edge numbers, 247 Properties, 303
CYCLE4071 Selecting, 299
External programming, 201 Displaying
CYCLE4072 cross references, 402
External programming, 202 Energy consumption, 355
CYCLE4073 Local variable table, 392
External programming, 206 PLC properties, 379
CYCLE4074 PLC signals, 385
External programming, 207 Program level, 121
CYCLE4075 Program status, 389
External programming, 210 symbol table, 401
CYCLE4077 Dressing program
External programming, 213 Creating, 292
CYCLE4078 Program directory, 283
External programming, 216 DRF (handwheel offset), 129
CYCLE4079 Drive
External programming, 218 Logical drive, 304
CYCLE435 - calculate dressing tool position Setting up, 305
External programming, 199 DRY (dry run feed), 129
CYCLE495 - form-truing Duplo number, (See sister tool number)
External programming, 195 DXF file
CYCLE62- contour call Cleaning, 143
Function, 194 close, 143
Parameter, 195 Open, 143
Cylinder error compensation, 98 Reference point, 147
Cylindrical grinding Tolerance, 147
Measuring a tool, 82 DXF-Reader, 142
D E
Data block (SB2), 117 Easy Extend, 364
Deleting Activate/deactivate device, 366
Directory, 302 Enabling a device, 365
INT block, 392 Initial commissioning, 367
Network, 399 Easy Message, 371
Operation, 399 Commissioning, 372
Program, 302 Settings, 378
Program block, 398 User log on/off, 376
Device Editing
Activate/deactivate, (See Easy Extend) Block, 395
Enabling, (See Easy Extend) Network, 399
Diagnostics Network properties, 400
PLC user program, 379, 392 PLC signals, 385
Program block, 391, 392, 395, 396
Grinding
Index
Editing with the "Ladder editor"

PLC user program, 395
Editor I
Calling, 133
IME
Settings, 140
Chinese characters, 47
EES
Korean characters, 52
Creating drives, 305
Information
Enabling button, 406
Program block, 386, 391
Energy consumption
Initial commissioning
Displaying, 355
Additional components, 366
Measuring, 357
Easy Extend, 367
Energy-saving profiles, 360
Inserting
Executing
Network, 399
Program, 288
Operands, 399
EXTCALL call, 311
Operation, 399
INT block
adding, 392
F creating, 393
Feed data deleting, 392
Actual value window, 39 Interruption point
Form-truing - CYCLE495 Approaching, 126
External programming, 195
J
G Job list
G Code program Creating, 294
Creating, 291
G functions
Display all G groups, 159 L
G Functions
Ladder add-on tool
Displaying selected G groups, 157
PLC diagnostics, 379, 392
GCC (G code converter), 129
Ladder diagram
Global user variables, 152
Changing the representation, 390
Ladder editor
Editing a program block, 396
H Editing the PLC user program, 379, 395
Handheld terminal 8, 405 Ladder viewer, 379
Handwheel Layer selection, 143
Assigning, 100 Loading
Highlight PLC user program, 380
Directory, 299 Local variable table
Program, 299 displaying, 392
High-Speed Cutting, 160 Logbook
HSC information, 160 Delete entries, 339
HT 8 Displaying, 339
Enabling button, 406 Edit the address data, 339
Overview, 405 Entry search, 340
Touch Panel, 411 Making an entry, 339
Traversing keys, 407 Output, 337
User menu, 409 Overview, 338
Virtual keyboard, 410
Grinding
Index
M N
Machine control panel NC directory
Operator controls, 29 creating on local drive, 285
Machine model, 231 NC/PLC variables
Machine-specific information Changing, 334, 383
Save, 337 displaying, 332, 381
Machining Network
Canceling, 116 deleting, 399
Starting, 115 displaying symbol identifiers, 401
Stopping, 115 editing, 399
Machining time inserting, 399
Representation, 178 Network properties
Machining times editing, 400
Display in block display, 40, 118 New contour
Magazine Function - Milling, 185
Positioning, 267 Parameter - Milling, 186
Magazine list, 265
Magazine management, 242
Main spindle, 96 O
Maintenance tasks
Online help
Monitoring/performing, 369
Context-sensitive, 56
Manual mode, 107
OP 015 black
Settings, 113
Operator panel front, 59
Traversing axes, 111
OP 019 black
MDA
Operator panel front, 59
Deleting a program, 105
Open
MDI
DXF file, 143
Executing a program, 104
Program, 287
Loading a program, 102
Opening
Saving a program, 103
program block in the window, 394
Measurement
Operands
Tool, 251
cross references, 402
Measuring
inserting, 399
Workpiece zero, 93
Operating area
Measuring a tool
Changing, 41
Cylindrical grinding, 82
Operating mode
Surface grinding, 87
AUTO, 67
Messages
Changing, 41
Displaying, 327
JOG, 66, 107
Sorting, 330
MDI, 67
Mode groups, 68
REPOS, 67
Mold making
TEACH IN, 67
G functions, 160
Operation
MRD (Measuring Result Display), 129
deleting, 399
Multi-channel view, 235
inserting, 399
"Machine" operating area, 235
Operator panel front
Settings, 239
OP 015 black, 59
OP 019 black, 59
Operator panel fronts, 20
Grinding
Index
Option opening in the window, 394

SINUMERIK extended touch, 59 Search, 133
Selecting, 136
Program blocks, 138
P Numbering, 136
Program control
Parameter
Modes of operation, 129
Calculating, 43
Program editing, 121
Changing, 43
Program level
Entering, 43
Displaying, 121
Pasting
Program list
Directories, 300
Creating, 295
Program, 300
Program Manager, 281
PLC diagnostics
Searching for directories and files, 297
Ladder add-on tool, 379, 392
Program runtime, 164
PLC properties
Program status
displaying, 379
displaying, 389
PLC signals
Programmed stop 1, 129
displaying, 385
Programmed stop 2, 129
editing, 385
Programs
PLC user program
Correcting, 121
Diagnostics, 379, 392
Editing, 133
editing with the "Ladder editor", 395
Managing, 281
Ladder add-on tool, 379
Renumbering blocks, 137
Ladder editor, 379, 395
Replacing text, 135
loading, 380
Running-in, 117
Resetting the processing time, 380
Searching for a program position, 133
Search function, 403
Selecting, 116
Preview
Teach-in, 345
Program, 298
Properties
Program
Directory, 303
Closing, 287
Program, 303
Copying, 300
Protection levels
Creating with cycle support, 180
Softkeys, 54
Deleting, 302
PRT (no axis motion), 129
Executing, 288
Highlight, 299
Open, 287
Pasting, 300
Q
Preview, 298 Quantity, 261
Properties, 303
Selecting, 299
Program block R
Access protection, 394
R parameters, 151
Copying and inserting, 136
Reactivating
creating, 391, 393
Tool, 263
Current, 40, 118
Reading in
Delete, 136
Setup data, 321
deleting, 398
Reference, 64
editing, 391, 392, 395, 396
Relocating
editing with the ladder editor, 396
Tool, 268
Information, 386, 391
Numbering, 137
Grinding
Index
Remote access Single block

permit, 343 Coarse (SB1), 117
Setting, 341 Fine (SB3), 117
Remote diagnostics, 341 Sister tool number, 246
Exit, 344 Skip blocks, 130
requesting, 343 SKP (skip blocks), 129
Repositioning, 122 SMS messages, 371
Resetting the processing time Log, 377
PLC user program, 380 Special characters, 21
RG0 (reduced rapid traverse), 129 Spindle chuck data
Run MyScreens, 367 Parameter, 98
Store chuck dimensions, 96
Spindle data
S Actual value window, 39
Spindle speed limitation, 95
Save
Status display, 34
Setup data, 319
Submode
SB (single blocks), 129
REF POINT, 67
SB1, 117
Supplement
SB2, 117
User interface, 367
SB3, 117
Surface grinding
Screenshots
Measuring a tool, 87
Copy, 331
Switching off, 63
Creating, 331
Switching on, 63
Open, 331
Switching over
Search
Channel, 68
in the Program Manager, 297
Coordinate system, 69
Search function
Unit of measurement, 70
PLC user program, 403
Symbol table
Search mode, 127
displaying, 401
Searching
Symbolic identifiers
Logbook entry, 340
displaying in the network, 401
Selecting
Synchronized actions
Directory, 299
Displaying status, 162
Program, 299
Service Planner, 369
Setting actual values, (See setting zero offsets)
Settings
T
Editor, 140 Tailstock, 97
For automatic operation, 166 Teach-in, 345
For manual operation, 113 Changing blocks, 350
Multi-channel view, 239 Circle intermediate position CIP, 350
Teach-in, 352 Continuous-path mode, 347
Tool lists, 278 Deleting blocks, 351
Setup data General sequence, 345
Backing up, 319 Inserting a position, 346
reading in, 321 Inserting blocks, 348
Simultaneous recording, 169 Motion type, 347
Before machining, 170 Parameter, 347
Changing a graphic, 173 Rapid traverse G0, 349
Views, 172 Settings, 352
Traversing block G1, 349
Grinding
Index
Templates Local LUD, 154

Creating, 296 Program PUD, 155
Storage locations, 296 R parameters, 151
Tool Searching, 156
Change type, 277
Delete, 252
Details, 273 V
Dimensioning, 244
Variable screen forms, 335
Loading, 253
Virtual keyboard, 410
Measurement, 251
Reactivating, 263
Relocating, 268
Unloading, 253
W
Tool data Wear, 261
Actual value window, 38 Wear, summed offset, 261
Backing up, 319 Work offsets
reading in, 321 Active WO, 75
Tool life, 261 delete, 81
Tool list, 246 Delete, 81
Tool lists Grinding frames, 78
Settings, 278 Overview, 76
Tool management, 241 Seat offsets, 78
List filtering, 270 Working area limitation
Sorting lists, 270 Defining, 94
Tool parameters, 244 Workpiece
Tool types, 243 Creating, 291
Tool wear, 261 Workpiece counter, 164
Tool wear list Workpiece zero
Open, 260 Automatic measurement, 93
Touch Panel Manual measurement, 93
Calibrating, 411
Transformed view, 278
Z
Zero offsets
U Displaying details, 79
Unique cutting edge numbers Overview, 73
Unique, 247 Settable ZO, 77
Unit of measurement Setting, 71
Switching over, 70 Zero point
User agreement, 65 DXF file, 147
User data, 150 Zero point settings
User dialog Backing up, 319
Creating, 363 reading in, 321
User interface
operating, 388
Representation, 387
Supplementing, 367
User variables
Activating, 156
Channel GUD, 153
Defining, 156
Global GUD, 152, 156
Grinding
Index
Grinding

Grinding - Siemens

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grinding - Siemens

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grinding - Siemens

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Working in the manual mode 5

Machining the workpiece 6

Collision avoidance (only

Valid for: Manage tools 13

Software Version Managing programs 14

Easy Message (828D only) 20

Siemens AG Order number: 6FC5398-0EP40-0BA2 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

My Documentation Manager (MDM)

Hotline and Internet address

4.3.1 Operating modes....................................................................................................................66

4.11.5 Deleting an MDA program....................................................................................................104

6.11 Working with DXF files.........................................................................................................142

8 Generating a G-code program..................................................................................................................177

10.3 Measuring in JOG................................................................................................................226

13.12 Tool details...........................................................................................................................273

14.16 Setup data............................................................................................................................319

21.5.5 Changing the address display..............................................................................................390

1.2 Industrial security

2.2 Operator panel fronts

Operator controls and indicators

1 Alphabetic key group

Figure 2-1 View of OP 010 operator panel front

2.2.2 Keys of the operator panel

Keys and key combinations

<NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL>

<NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL> + <SHIFT>

<Cursor left> + <CTRL>

<CTRL> + <ALT> + <S>

Menu forward key

2.3 Machine control panels

2.3.2 Controls on the machine control panel

(1) Emergency Off button

Figure 2-2 Front view of machine control panel (milling version)

Emergency Off button

Press the button in situations where:

● Stop processing the current programs.

Operating modes, machine functions

Traversing axes with rapid traverse override and coordinate switchover

Spindle control with override switch

Feed control with override switch

2.4 User interface

2.4.1 Screen layout

1 Active operating area and mode

Figure 2-3 Grinding user interface

2.4.2 Status display

Status display of "Machine" operating area

The machine is productive and energy is being consumed.

The machine is feeding energy back into the grid.

The power rating display must be switched on in the status line.

Active operating area

"Program" operating area

"Program manager" operating area

"Diagnosis" operating area

"Start-up" operating area

Active mode or submode

"Teach In" submode

"Ref Point" submode

Alarms and messages

&KDUDFWHUVOLVWHGIRUWKHSKRQHWLFQRWDWLRQLQSXW 3KRQHWLFQRWDWLRQLQSXW